Chapter VII
* * * * *
FROM 1900 ONWARDS.
[Sidenote: 1900.]
The new year opened auspiciously by the capture of Osman Digna on the 18th January by Captain F. Burges, Mamur Mohammed Bey, and a police patrol, in the Warriba Hills, some 90 miles south-west of Suakin. This notorious Emir was sent to Rosetta to join the other Dervish prisoners, and is now (1904) at Damietta.
[Sidenote: Sudd and Survey expeditions.]
All the rivers were exceptionally low during the winter of 1899-1900, and the various expeditions and survey parties which were now started off had much difficulty in getting through to their posts.
Major Peake commenced clearing the sudd on the last day of December, and succeeded in opening a channel in the following April (vide p. 304). Sir W. Garstin also came up to study the Bahr el Jebel and Bahr el Ghazal rivers.
At the end of February parties of English (Uganda) (under Captain Gage), French (under Lieutenant Tanquedec), and Congolese (under Commandant Henry) troops arrived at Omdurman, having been found by Major Peake trying to cut their way through Block 3. The Uganda and Congolese parties were sent back, and the French (who were evacuating the Bahr el Ghazal) continued their journey to Europe.
[Sidenote: Abyssinian Frontier.]
With the object of coming to an arrangement with Abyssinia regarding the frontier between that country and the Sudan, two surveying expeditions were sent out towards the end of 1899, under Major Austin, D.S.O., and Lieutenant Gwynn, D.S.O., respectively. The former, with Lieutenant Bright, surveyed up the Sobat and Baro Rivers to Gore, and thence in a southerly direction to the Gelo, returning viâ the Pibor River to Nasser. Owing to obstruction on the part of local Abyssinian chiefs Major Austin was unable to penetrate to Lake Rudolf, but the geographical results of his expedition were most useful. Lieutenants Gwynn and Jackson started up the Blue Nile to Famaka, thence south along the edge of the Abyssinian plateau, and across the Sonka to the Garre river, whence they returned viâ Nasser, after doing much valuable survey work.
On 22nd December, 1899, Sir R. Wingate was appointed Sirdar and Governor-General, vice Lord Kitchener, called to South Africa.
[Sidenote: Millenniumists.]
In January, 1900, an increasing sect in Omdurman, which was dubbed “the Millenniumists,” and might have led to trouble, was suppressed.
[Sidenote: Rabeh Zubeir.]
In April Rabeh Zubeir was attacked near Lake Chad by three converging French columns; he himself was killed, and his kingdom absolutely destroyed.
The rest of the year was mostly occupied in the Government settling down to its work, organising the exhausted country, etc.; no events of any importance took place till the end of the year.
[Sidenote: Kiro.]
A Sudanese post was established in November at Kiro, on the left bank of the Upper Nile, a few miles north of the Belgian post, about 5° 30′ north lat. This post, finding in April, 1901, that it was just south of 5° 30′, crossed the river to Mongalla, where it established itself permanently.
[Sidenote: Occupation of Bahr el Ghazal.]
On November 29th, 1900, an expedition under Lieut.-Colonel Sparkes left Omdurman in steamers in order to occupy the Bahr el Ghazal. It consisted of five British and 13 native officers, 82 regulars, and 266 irregulars, with necessary stores, transport, etc.
[Sidenote: 1901.]
The party arrived at Meshra el Rek on 14th December, 1900, and patrols were sent out to reconnoitre. Tonj was quickly fixed on as temporary headquarters (1st January, 1901), and small expeditions were made by Colonel Sparkes to Wau, Fort Desaix, Rumbek, Amadi, Kiro, Shambe, and back to Tonj, whilst the remainder of the party consolidated its position and made friends with the natives. Lieutenant Fell, R.N., started cutting the sudd in the Jur river, with the object of opening up a waterway from the Bahr el Ghazal river, but his arduous labours, lasting for the next 15 months, were not crowned with success till June, 1902. Major W. Boulnois meanwhile conducted a patrol to Deim Zubeir, Telgona, Faroge (Forga), and Chamamui, meeting with a most friendly reception from the chiefs of these districts, and returned to Tonj on 10th April. Shortly afterwards the same officer proceded to Rumbek and chastised some raiding Nuers, with the effect of bringing the Agars and other Dinkas in at once to acknowledge Government authority.
Colonel Sparkes now made an extensive patrol to the south, to visit Sultan Tembura of the Nyam Nyams. Here, after many difficulties of travel, he arrived on 25th June, 1901, and was most cordially received by the Sultan, whose people were of a comparatively highly civilised order. Sparkes returned to Wau on the 27th July, and proceeded north shortly afterwards, suffering severely from fever. In November, as Major Boulnois, besides many of the troops, was invalided owing to the same cause, Major Hunter assumed command of the Occupation Force.
[Sidenote: Frontiers.]
In the spring of 1901 the question of the Sudan-Eritrea and Abyssinian Frontiers claimed the attention of the Sudan Government. Colonel Hon. M. G. Talbot concluded, with Lieutenant Colli, at Kassala, on 16th April, a treaty[210] regarding the frontier between Sabderat, the Atbara, Tomat, and Todluk, and a new grazing convention was also concluded between Colonel Collinson (Mudir of Kassala) and Signor Martini (Governor-General of Eritrea) on 28th February, 1901. Major Gwynn, D.S.O., with Captain Smyth, V.C., continued his surveys from Famaka northwards (he having arrived at this place from Addis Abbaba on the 14th April), and fixed a series of important points during his journeys, which extended altogether from Jebel Jerok to Gallabat.
[Sidenote: Major Austin’s expedition.]
Meanwhile Major Austin and Lieutenant Bright had started from Nasser on a further expedition south-eastwards from Nasser on the 12th January. They were to find stores provided by the Abyssinians at Murle, on the north bank of Lake Rudolf, but on arriving at this point, after making a valuable survey from Nasser, they found no signs of Abyssinians or stores. They then struck south along the western shore of the lake, and after suffering severely from hunger and sickness, and losing 39 out of 53 of their men by starvation, they eventually arrived at Lake Baringo on the 6th August.
[Sidenote: Darfur.]
Since 1898 Ali Dinar had been with some difficulty establishing himself on the throne of Darfur. He was appointed Government-Agent in that country, and in June, 1901, he began paying an annual tribute.
[Sidenote: Raids in Darfur.]
In September Ali Dinar sent a strong force under Tirab Suleiman against the Maalia and Rizeigat Arabs in the south, whom he wished to bring under his sway. Tirab raided them heavily, and on their taking refuge in Kordofan threatened to pursue them thither. The consequent consternation in Kordofan was only allayed by the Mudir mobilising a force of camel corps, etc., near the frontier at Foga and Nahud. Matters quieted down, and Ali Dinar expressed his apologies.
[Sidenote: Wadai.[211]]
To turn to affairs in Wadai:—
At the end of 1898 Sultan Yusef died and nominated his second son Ibrahim to succeed him, whilst Abdel Aziz his eldest son, who was a violent and war-like character, was blinded to preclude the possibility of disturbance. As Dud Murra the youngest of the three brothers got on well with Ibrahim he was left unmolested, and the late Sultan Yusef’s body was duly interred at Wara, the recognised burial place of Wadai Sultans. Ibrahim, on his accession, though his father Yusef was a strong Senussiist, refused to give up merissa drinking and declared himself an anti-Senussiist. It was at Sultan Yusef’s request that Senussi had sent Mohammed El Sunni as his representative at the Court of Abesher at the end of 1897.
Owing to widespread animosity against Ibrahim, caused partly by this friction with the Senussiists and partly by his execution of several of the Agids[212] he determined to leave Abesher on the pretext of going on pilgrimage to Wara, but in reality to seek refuge in the mountains of Abu Sinun. Sheraf El Din now took charge of affairs with the tacit consent of Jerma Othman the chief Agid, and sent an expedition to bring back the fugitive Ibrahim alive or dead. He was eventually betrayed by the ex-dervish Emir Zogal[213] and brought to Abesher, where after being, it is reported, blinded, he died of his wounds and was buried (1900). “Better,” he said, “to die as a Sultan in my Palace than to flee shamefully before slaves.” (The party sent to capture Ibrahim was under the command of the slave Gorani Gelma.) In 1902 his remains were transferred to Wara.
Thereupon Ahmed Abu Ghazali (so-called on account of his long neck), the son of the former Sultan Ali, was proclaimed Sultan through the influence of Sheraf El Din, who continued to have the chief hand in the government. This direction of affairs by a eunuch was, however, extremely unpopular and, as a protest, in September, 1901, Sultan Bekhit of Dar Sula refused to comply with orders from Abesher. Jerma, too, endeavoured to install Asil as Sultan in place of Ahmed Ghazali, but as the latter threatened to have Asil’s eyes put out, he fled to Fitri and surrendered near there to Lieut.-Colonel Destenave, in the French sphere. Ahmed now became annoyed with Jerma, as he considered him responsible for the flight of Asil, whilst the people, on the other hand, by whom Jerma was much liked, demanded the head of Ghazali’s chief adviser, Sheraf El Din. The Senussi agent, however, Mohammed El Sunni, now stepped in and effected a reconciliation between Jerma and Sheraf El Din, but the Sultan deeply incensed at the conduct of Jerma determined to kill him. Mohammed Sunni, hereupon, again intervened at the critical moment and obtained his reprieve.
With Jerma free again the Sultan and Sheraf El Din considered they were no longer safe at Abesher and both resolved to seek refuge in Dar Salamat. On the flight of the Sultan, Jerma at once assumed the direction of affairs at the capital and unsuccessfully attacked the fugitive Sultan’s rearguard soon after it had quitted Abesher. The pursuit was continued and a severe engagement took place about 40 miles further south. Another action was subsequently fought in Dar Salamat in November, 1901, and Ghazali continued his flight to El Batha.
Jerma now returned to Abeshe and in December 1901 proclaimed Dud Murra, a youth of barely 20 years of age and brother of Sultan Ibrahim, as Sultan.
[Sidenote: Mohammed El Sunni.]
Mohammed El Sunni, the Senussi agent, is reported (1903) to be dead, and since the death of the Senussi, in May, 1902, the prestige of that doctrine is said to have materially decreased in Wadai.
[Sidenote: Rome Conference.]
In November, in consequence of difficulties in the frontier negotiations between the Sudan, Eritrea and Abyssinia, a Conference was held in Rome, which resulted in agreements satisfactory to all, and included customs, postal and telegraph conventions between the Sudan and Eritrea (vide pp. 292-295).
[Sidenote: Recapitulation to the end of 1901.]
Meanwhile the Sudan Government had been settling itself, exploring its vast territories, organising and administering the country, instituting legislation, extending communications, and in general laying the foundations of good government. Various small disturbances, not necessary to chronicle in detail, had occurred, chiefly in the neighbourhood of the frontiers, slave-raiding or refusal of sections of tribes to pay tribute being the chief causes; but on the whole, in spite of deficiency of population, limited numbers of officials, and rigid but necessary economy, the Sudan settled down into an era of peace and growing prosperity.
[Sidenote: 1902. Bahr el Ghazal.]
In January, 1902, Captain A. M. Pirie occupied Deim Zubeir and Chamamui, and was then recalled, owing to the murder of Lieutenant Scott-Barbour by the Agar Dinkas. This officer had been in charge of a camel convoy between Shambe and Rumbek, and was treacherously assassinated on the banks of the Naam river (Rohl) on 10th January. A punitive expedition was quickly organised by Major Hunter, and in a series of rapid marches it killed many of the Agars, burned their villages and captured their cattle. A further expedition under Captain L. Stack, arriving viâ Shambe from Khartoum in March, completed the punishment. Myang Matyang, the chief offender, died in July of wounds received, and the Agars came in and sued for peace, which was granted.
[Sidenote: Ali Dinar.]
In January Ali Dinar was seriously ill, and was at one time reported to be dead; but he recovered completely.
[Sidenote: Nuer expedition.]
A small exploring expedition sent under Major Blewitt up the Khor Filus into the Nuer country, belonging to Denkur, in April only resulted in the Nuers first defying the troops, and then fleeing further into the interior.
[Sidenote: Sudd.]
Meanwhile Major G. E. Matthews had been hard at work for five months on the 15th block of sudd, but, owing to there being no current to take away the cut blocks, it was practically a hopeless task, and was temporarily given up, the “false channel” which circumvented this portion of the sudd proving sufficient for purposes of navigation.
[Sidenote: Surveys.]
During the spring Major Gwynn continued his surveys along the Sudan-Eritrea frontier, fixing points up to Ras Kasar on the Red Sea, and eventually finishing up at a point 100 miles north of Suakin.
[Sidenote: Treaty with Menelek.]
On the 15th May a treaty was signed at Addis Abbaba, defining the Sudan-Abyssinian frontier line, and containing other important clauses (vide p. 296).
[Sidenote: Western Sudan.]
The great religious Sheikh El Senussi, who had previously been residing at the oasis of Kufra, becoming uneasy at the advance of the French in the Lake Chad region, as well as being apprehensive of the possible eventualities that might follow the victory of Omdurman, moved his headquarters to Geru,[214] about 10 days north of Abesher, in the year 1900. In order, too, to extend his influence and safeguard his interests, he established a zawia at Bir Alali about four days north of Lake Chad and wrote on three separate occasions to Sultan Ali Dinar of Darfur requesting him to prepare zawias for him in Jebel Marra and in Dar Zaghawa. The Sultan, however, was unwilling to be saddled with such an illustrious but inconvenient guest, and the matter eventually fell through in 1902. From that time no visits of Senussiists to El Fasher have been reported.
At last the situation in the west was brought to a head by a French patrol searching a Senussiist zawia in Kanem for reported arms. A collision ensued some time in August, 1901, which was insignificant and partook of the nature of a raid. On 19th November, however, a more serious collision took place, in which a small French force was defeated by Sheikh el Barrani, the Senussi representative in Kanem.
On the 18th January, 1902, the French, strongly reinforced, attacked the Senussiists at the zawia of Alali, in Kanem, and the latter, though assisted by the Aulad Suleiman (Tuareg) tribe, sustained a severe defeat.
The Jehad was now proclaimed by the Senussi, and hundreds of his adherents flocked into Geru from Tripoli, Wadai, and the surrounding deserts. It appears, however, that the intention of the Senussi was merely to act on the defensive, for no forward movement was undertaken; there were even rumours that the Sheikh intended to retire north to Kufra to avoid collision with the enemy. At a third action, however, which appears to have been fairly decisive, Mohammed Abu Egeil, the Senussi general in Kanem, was killed, and the Senussiists fell back eastwards and northwards.
During May, 1902, the Sheikh el Senussi sickened, owing, it is said, to his anxiety regarding the situation. He is reported to have died on 30th May, and to have nominated his nephew, Ahmed el Sherif, as his successor. The story of his death was not confirmed, and for a long time rumours were rife of his appearance at Kufra, at Jaghbub, etc., with the intention of proclaiming himself a Mahdi, of going to Mecca on pilgrimage, etc., etc.; the shrine in which he was buried was reported to have been opened, and found empty, and many other stories of his reappearance were told. It seems, however, most probable that he did die on or about the date given, and it is certain that his successor has removed himself and all his property back to Kufra.
[Sidenote: Darfur.]
In July Ali Dinar reported that Arabi Dafaalla, ex-Dervish Emir on the Upper Nile, had surrendered to him with all his men and 3,000 rifles, and had received the “Aman.”
[Sidenote: Cholera.]
During the summer the cholera, which had been ravaging Egypt, made its appearance at Halfa, and eight natives died. Owing, however, to the strict surveillance there and at Suakin no further cases occurred in the Sudan.
On the 20th July Major Hunter, Acting Commandant of Bahr el Ghazal, died of blackwater fever.
[Sidenote: British garrison.]
During the winter of 1902-03 the British garrison of Khartoum was raised from one company, which up to this time had remained only during the cold weather, to a whole battalion, permanently quartered there.
[Sidenote: Small disturbances.]
Various small raids into the Sudan took place during the years 1900-03 along the Abyssinian frontier, the chief offenders being Wad Mahmud in the Keili district, and a brigand named Hakos on the border near Gallabat. Appeals to the higher Abyssinian authorities produced little result, owing to their want of control over these outlying districts. The end of these two brigands is recorded later.
In Kordofan the restless tribes of the southern hill districts were never at peace, but the inter-tribal disturbances were purely local, and in no way threatened the stability of the Government in these parts.
[Sidenote: 1903.]
In the Eastern Sudan the Rasheida slave-traders and the Gemilab tribe threatened at various times to give trouble, but they have quieted down, and the latter tribe has “come in.”
[Sidenote: Delimitations.]
At the end of 1902 Major C. W. Gwynn proceeded, with Major C. E. Wilson, to the further delimitation of the Abyssinian frontier. He completed the demarcation from the Setit to just south of Kirin, and returning, viâ Kodok, in May, 1903, settled the limits of the new Sudanese leased territory of Itang on the Upper Baro River.
Colonel Hon. M. G. Talbot also met the Italian delegates at Kassala in February, 1903, and together they delimitated the frontier from Abu Gamal to the Setit, opposite the mouth of the Khor Royan, which point now forms the junction of Eritrea, Abyssinia, and the Sudan (vide p. 290).
[Sidenote: Bahr el Ghazal.]
Colonel Sparkes set out on 13th January on a patrol to Hofrat el Nahas, the famous copper mines in Southern Darfur. He arrived there on March 1st, and was told that no European had visited it since 1876. The country was totally deserted, and it was evident that if the mines were worked, transport, although perhaps possible on the Bahr el Arab during some parts of the year, would be a matter of great difficulty. Colonel Sparkes returned to Deim Zubeir on 21st March, having marched a distance of 667 miles.
A patrol was meanwhile sent to open up relations with the powerful Azande chief, Yambio. Its commander, Captain Armstrong, was most unfortunately killed by an elephant on the 23rd February, and although the journey was continued by Colour-Sergeant Boardman, R.M.A., the expedition did not meet with success, for on reaching the Nyam Nyam country it was attacked by Yambio’s son (Mangi), and had to retire, though without loss (except of baggage, etc.).
[Sidenote: Wadai.]
After continual fighting with Dud Murra, Ahmed El Ghazali was caught (20th March, 1903) in an ambush; his eyes were put out, and he was kept a captive with the Agid Salamat at Abesher. Wadai now became more or less settled, and trade was reopened to the north and east.
[Sidenote: Bahr el Ghazal negotiations.]
During the past three years negotiations with the Government of the Congo Free State on the subject of the Bahr el Ghazal have been taking place; up to date, however, they have produced no definite result.
[Sidenote: Shilluks.]
In April, Kur Wad Nedok, Mek of the Shilluks, was deposed for malpractices, and Fadiet Wad Kwad Keir elected in his place.
[Sidenote: Kordofan. False prophet, September.]
On the 1st September, 1903, it was reported from El Obeid that a certain Mohammed El Amin, who had recently returned from Mecca and settled in Jebel Tagale, had proclaimed himself Mahdi. Colonel Mahon, C.B., D.S.O., left Khartoum at once with a squadron of cavalry, and marching viâ the Fachi-Shoya-Sherkeila route surprised and captured the false prophet at Ageila without fighting. He was conducted to El Obeid, where he was hanged on the 27th September.
[Sidenote: October.]
It having been reported that Mansur Abdel Rahman, a cousin of Sultan Ali Dinar of Darfur, was raiding or collecting taxes from people in Kordofan, Captain Carter proceeded with a small force of Camel Corps from El Eddaiya and surprised the party, numbering some 40 rifles and horsemen, at Sherafa, and captured Mansur, who was subsequently liberated after the restoration of the property he had taken.
[Sidenote: Nile-Red Sea Railway.]
Work on this railway was commenced in November, 1903.
[Sidenote: Darfur.]
During the summer of 1903 one or more treasonable conspiracies to seize the throne of Darfur were nipped in the bud by the present Sultan Ali Dinar. Adam Rijal, the Commandant of Jebel El Hella, and Tirab Suleiman, another important general, both suffered the death penalty in consequence. The ex-Dervish Emirs, Zogal and Karamalla Kirkesawi, were also both mysteriously put out of the way.
In December, 1903, at the Sultan’s request, the boundaries of Darfur were clearly explained to him in writing.
[Sidenote: Mahmal.]
The first Mahmal[215] to leave Darfur for Mecca since the conquest of that country by Zubeir Pasha in 1873 arrived at Khartoum in November. The value of the “Surra”[216] was stated to be about £450. The Mahmal proceeded viâ Suakin to Jedda, and returned to Khartoum at the end of June.
[Sidenote: Upper Nile. Thalweg Agreement.]
A provisional agreement defining the Thalweg of the Nile between N. Lat. 5° and 5° 30′ was drawn up on 13th September by Captain R. C. R. Owen, representing the Sudan Government, and the late General Utterwulghe, on behalf of the Government of the Congo Free State.
[Sidenote: Floods.]
The winter of 1903-04 will be memorable for the exceptional height of the Nile and its tributaries in the Upper Nile region, consequent on which there followed very extensive floods.
[Sidenote: Eastern Sudan. Hakos.]
The brigand Hakos, who had caused considerable annoyance by raiding and robbery along the frontier between the Setit and Gallabat, was reported to have been killed on 16th December near Nogara. Had his career not been thus suddenly terminated, the Emperor Menelik had agreed with the Sudan Government to take combined action against him.
[Sidenote: Abyssinian Coal Expedition.]
An expedition to prospect for coal in the valley of the Goang (Upper Atbara), near Chelga, was despatched by the Sudan Government from Khartoum in December, 1903.
[Sidenote: 1904. Itang.]
Captain H. H. Wilson left Kodok on the 23rd December, 1903, with merchants to establish a trading station at Itang on the Baro. After making the preliminary arrangements there he visited Ras Tesemma Nado at Gore. His Excellency, the Governor-General, subsequently visited Itang in May, 1904.
[Sidenote: Ibrahim Wad Mahmud.]
In April, 1903, after the delimitation of the Abyssinian frontier, Ibrahim Wad Mahmud, the notorious slave raider of J. Jerok, was informed that as his village fell within the limits of the Sudan, he must cease raiding and settle down. As Ibrahim, however, in spite of a second letter of warning, continued to raid and openly defied the Government, in February a mixed force of about 800 men (partly irregulars) with two guns was sent under the command of Lieutenant-Colonel Gorringe (Governor, Sennar), to capture him. The expedition was completely successful and Jebel Jerok was surprised; Ibrahim, who succeeded in escaping, was handed over to Major G. de H. Smith[217] by Sheikh Hamed of Asosa on the 3rd of March. He was subsequently brought to Wad Medani, where he was tried and hanged on the 23rd May, 1904.
[Sidenote: Bahr El Ghazal. Lemaire Expedition.]
In October, 1903, a scientific mission hailing from the Congo Free State, under the leadership of the explorer Lemaire, arrived at Mvolo in the south-east Bahr El Ghazal. It withdrew in the following spring, but was again seen in 1905.
[Sidenote: 1904. Yambio Patrol.]
On the 27th January a strong patrol, under the command of Captain P. Wood, left Tonj to visit the Nyam Nyam Sultan Yambio. The object of the patrol was to establish friendly relations with the Nyam Nyam chiefs Riketa, Yambio, and Mangi. On arrival at Riketa’s (a son of Yambio, and avowedly friendly), the patrol met with a treacherous and hostile reception. Riketa’s village was accordingly destroyed, and the patrol returned to Tonj. Captain H. E. Haymes, R.A.M.C., who was wounded in the head, subsequently died at Tonj on the 15th March.
Yambio is now dead. Owing to his persistent treachery and hostility, a column under Major Boulnois was sent against him, and in a smart action by Major Carter, February 9th, 1905, Yambio and ten of his men were killed.
[Sidenote: Sudan-Eritrean Frontier.]
A provisional agreement regarding a slight rectification of the Sudan-Eritrea frontier near Karora was drafted by representatives of both Governments in January. It has not yet been ratified.
[Sidenote: Sudd.]
The work of opening the 15th block of sudd on the Bahr El Jebel was recommenced by Lieutenant Drury, late R.N., in October, 1903, and continued during the succeeding 6 months, but eventually had to be again abandoned before the real channel of the river had been entirely cleared. The clearing of this block will probably be resumed, and it is hoped, completed in 1905.
[Sidenote: Kordofan.]
In the spring of 1904, as several of the Meks of the Nuba Mountains continued to disregard Government orders to cease raiding and return looted property, punitive measures of a minor description were undertaken after repeated warnings, with most satisfactory results. In September, 1904, Major O’Connell with a force of 340 rifles, 3 guns and friendlies, successfully enforced the submission of the Nubas of Jabel Daier, about 60 miles south of El Obeid.
[Sidenote: Sketch of events in the Lado Enclave.]
After their defeat of the Dervishes at Rejaf in February, 1897 (vide p. 263), the Belgians, under Chaltin, proceeded to occupy the territory leased to King Leopold under the Treaty of May, 1894, whilst Arabi Dafaalla and his Dervishes retreated to his deim at Bor and thence, at the end of 1898 or beginning of 1899, across the Bahr El Ghazal to Kalaka and Dar Kara.
Chaltin at once commenced to build and fortify stations at Lado (which had ceased to exist), Kiro, Loka, and Yei, whilst further south, Dufile (now moved to New Dufile), and Mahaji, etc., were occupied. At the end of 1901 Captain Hanolet was appointed Commandant Supérieur of the Enclave, and continued to improve the stations and communications with great energy. In August, 1903, Captain Hanolet was replaced by Commissaire Général G. Utterwulghe. The lamented death of this able and universally popular officer took place at Yei on the 8th May, 1904; he was succeeded by Commandant Wacquez.
Lado is now the headquarters of the Lado Enclave, whilst Yei, a fortified military station on the river of that name, is next in importance. Good roads connecting the stations on the Nile with Yei are in course of construction, and automobiles are now being used with some success to assist in the supply of the troops in the Enclave. These number some 2,000-3,000 native regulars, who are said to be excellent soldiers.
A railway connecting the Congo at Stanleyville with the shores of Lake Albert Nyanza at Mahaji, immediately to the south of the Enclave, is now in course of construction.
[Sidenote: Mahdi on Blue Nile.]
In August, 1904, a religious fanatic named Adam, having first obtained promises of support from the Kenana Kawatil, openly declared himself Mahdi in the Kenana Khot near Senga. Prompt measures were taken to effect his arrest, and in the fight which ensued on his refusal to surrender the Mahdi and the whole of his adherents (11), were annihilated, while the Egyptian Mamur of Senga was unfortunately killed by the rebels.
[Sidenote: Progress in 1903-04]
During 1903-1904 the Sudan Government extended its influence over and established posts in some of the remotest parts of its territory. In the north, the desert west of Dongola was widely explored and a post established on the Arbain road. The Arab tribes living in the wildest regions of the Southern Atbai were visited and much of this country mapped. Further south, the heart of the district inhabited by the redoubtable Gemilab tribe was reconnoitred and surveyed. Posts were established in the little-known country, previously infested by Abyssinian brigands, between the River Setit and Gallabat, and in consequence of these measures for public security the trade with Abyssinia at the latter place rapidly increased.
South of Roseires the administration was extended to the mountainous district of J. Tabi, hitherto practically unexplored and unknown, and inhabited by a shy and distinctive Negro race. Further south, the country of the more northern Burun adjoining the Abyssinian frontier and, until recently, the happy hunting ground of border slave raiders, was pacified and effectively garrisoned by regulars, whilst the opening up of trade routes from the border districts of Abyssinia to the Blue and White Niles and Sobat was commenced. In the Upper Nile Province, the Shilluk tribe was brought under the more direct control of the Government, whilst considerable progress was made with the Dinkas on the Sobat and the deeply suspicious Nuers of the Bahr El Zeraf, whose country had long remained unexplored by a white man. The Pibor river was navigated for 170 miles beyond the Akobo junction, or 240 miles from its mouth, and its source was roughly determined.
At Mongalla a suitable station was constructed and the almost unknown tribes, Beri and Aliab, visited in the spring of 1904, posts being established where necessary.
In the Bahr El Ghazal Province,[218] patrols traversed a great part of the country and the main roads were improved sufficiently to admit of the successful introduction of wheeled transport. In Southern Kordofan effective administration was extended, and detachments of regular troops were quartered throughout the Nuba mountains.
The most important step taken by the Government during 1903-1904 for the economic development of the Sudan was the commencement of a railway connecting the port of Suakin with the present main line near the Atbara mouth. In addition, reconnaissances were carried out for a branch line from Abu Hamed to Merowe and Affat in the Dongola Province.
The future advancement of the country was further enhanced by the efforts made by the Government to encourage the cultivation of cotton, both by the issue of large grants of seed as well as by an arrangement through which a fair price was guaranteed to the producer for all cotton placed on the market.
[Sidenote: Visits of distinguished persons.]
It only remains to be stated that in January 1900, and again in February 1905, T.R.H. the Duke and Duchess of Connaught, and in November 1901 His Highness the Khedive, visited Khartoum; a year later General Lord Kitchener did the same and opened the Gordon College; whilst Lord Cromer paid visits in December 1899, January 1901 and January 1903, proceeding as far as Gondokoro in the latter year.
H.R.H. Princess Henry of Battenberg, accompanied by the Princesses Victoria of Battenberg and Beatrice of Saxe-Coburg, visited Khartoum in February 1904.
Sir William Garstin visited the White Nile, Bahr El Ghazal, Bahr El Zeraf and Blue Nile in 1899-1904, and the Bahr El Jebel in 1901 and again in 1904, when he also explored the River Atem or “Gertrude” Nile. In 1903 he visited Uganda, Semliki River, Albert Nyanza, as well as the Bahr El Jebel. The results of these journeys have now been published, August 1904 (F.O. Blue Book, Egypt, No. 2, 1904).
[Sidenote: Explorers.]
The following noted travellers, in addition to numerous distinguished sportsmen, have passed through Khartoum at different times since 1898: Wellby, Grogan, Donaldson-Smith, Henri, Gibbons, Neumann, Austin, Bright, Lionel Decle, Macmillan, and Bulpett, Sir C. Eliot, Powell Cotton, and Pierre. The latter arrived in January, 1904, from Zemio in Haut Ubangi viâ Deim Zubeir and Wau.
GOVERNORS-GENERAL OF THE SUDAN.
-----------------------+------------------------- | Date. Name. +-----------+------------- |Mohammedan.| Gregorian. -----------------------+-----------+------------- Osman Bey | 1240 | 1825 | | Maho Bey | 1241 | 1826 | | Khurshid Pasha | 1241 | 1826 | | Ahmed Pasha Abu Udn | 1254 | 1839 | | Ahmed Pasha El Minikli | 1259 | 1844 | | Khaled Pasha | 1262 | 1846 | | Abdel Latif Pasha | 1266 | 1850 | | Rustem Pasha | 1267 | 1851 | | Ismail Pasha Abu Jebel | 1268 | 1852 | | Selim Pasha | 1269 | 1853 | | Ali Pasha Sirri | 1270 | 1854 | | Ali Pasha Sharkas | 1271 | 1855 | | Arakil Bey | 1273 | 1857 | | Hassan Bey Salama | 1275 | 1859 | | Mohammed Bey Rasikh | 1278 | 1862 | | Musa Pasha Hamdi | 1279 | 1863 | | Jaafar Pasha Sadek | 1281 | 1865 | | Jaafar Pasha Mazhar | 1282 | 1866 | | Mumtaz Pasha | 1287 | 1871 | | Ismail Pasha Ayub | 1289 | 1873 | | Gordon Pasha | 1293 | 1877 | | Rauf Pasha | 1296 | 1879 | | Abdel Gader Pasha | 1299 | 1882 | | Ala El Din Pasha | 1300 | 1883 | | Gordon Pasha | 1301 | 1884[219] | | | | Kitchener Pasha | 1316 | 1899 | | Wingate Pasha | 1317 | 1899 -----------------------+-----------+-------------
[Footnote 210: Subsequently for the greater part cancelled (vide p. 290.)]
[Footnote 211: Taken chiefly from an account of Wadai written by Captain Julien, formerly resident at Kuti, published in “L’Afrique Française.”]
[Footnote 212: The Agids are the important men in Wadai, i.e., the chief noblemen, governors of districts, generals, etc.]
[Footnote 213: Vide p. 255.]
[Footnote 214: Approximately N. Lat. 19°, E. Long. 20° 10′.]
[Footnote 215: “Mahmal” means literally “something carried.” It is said to have been originated about the 12th Century A.D. by a certain Queen of Egypt named Shagar El Durr, of the Ayubite Dynasty, who prepared a very sumptuous litter (hodag), on which she intended to visit Mecca by camel. State affairs, however, prevented her making personal use of the “hodag,” which she therefore sent to Mecca with presents of money. This sending of the “hodag” to Mecca gradually became a custom, and was eventually copied in Syria. Nowadays a Mahmal leaves Cairo and Damascus simultaneously each year, and consists of a richly ornamented dome-shaped “hodag” or litter which is carried on a camel to Mecca and lodged in the “Kaaba” there until the Mahmal returns, when it is taken back again. The richly embroidered curtains, however, are presented to the “Kaaba” or Mosque.]
[Footnote 216: Surra means “package”—in this case a package of money: it is sent partly as a present to the Sherif of Mecca for the maintenance of the “Kaaba” and partly to the Arab Sheikhs along the road, who otherwise would endeavour to loot the Mahmal on its journey.]
[Footnote 217: Died at Khartoum, October 10th, of blackwater fever.]
[Footnote 218: H. E. Governor-General visited Wau in November, 1904; H. E. left Khartoum at 3 a.m. on the 7th November, and arrived at Wau at 11 a.m. on the 17th, the journey having occupied 10½ days. The return journey was accomplished, including the inspection of intermediate stations, in under 8 days—a “record.”]
[Footnote 219: To 26th January, 1885.]
=APPENDIX A.=
* * * * *
TEXT OF TREATIES AND AGREEMENTS REGARDING THE ANGLO-EGYPTIAN SUDAN.
* * * * *
(1.)
AGREEMENT BETWEEN HER BRITANNIC MAJESTY’S GOVERNMENT AND THE GOVERNMENT OF HIS HIGHNESS THE KHEDIVE OF EGYPT RELATIVE TO THE FUTURE ADMINISTRATION OF THE SUDAN.
WHEREAS certain provinces in the Sudan which were in rebellion against the authority of His Highness the Khedive have now been reconquered by the joint military and financial efforts of Her Britannic Majesty’s Government and the Government of His Highness the Khedive;
AND whereas it has become necessary to decide upon a system for the administration of and for the making of laws for the said reconquered provinces, under which due allowance may be made for the backward and unsettled condition of large portions thereof, and for the varying requirements of different localities;
AND whereas it is desired to give effect to the claims which have accrued to Her Britannic Majesty’s Government, by right of conquest, to share in the present settlement and future working and development of the said system of administration and legislation;
AND whereas it is conceived that for many purposes Wadi Halfa and Suakin may be most effectively administered in conjunction with the reconquered provinces to which they are respectively adjacent;
Now, it is hereby agreed and declared by and between the Undersigned, duly authorized for that purpose, as follows:—
ARTICLE I.
The word “Sudan” in this Agreement means all the territories South of the 22nd parallel of latitude, which:
1. Have never been evacuated by Egyptian troops since the year 1882; or
2. Which having before the late rebellion in the Sudan been administered by the Government of His Highness the Khedive, were temporarily lost to Egypt, and have been reconquered by Her Majesty’s Government and the Egyptian Government, acting in concert; or
3. Which may hereafter be reconquered by the two Governments acting in concert.
ARTICLE II.
The British and Egyptian flags shall be used together, both on land and water, throughout the Sudan, except in the town of Suakin, in which locality the Egyptian flag alone shall be used.
ARTICLE III.
The supreme military and civil command in the Sudan shall be vested in one officer, termed the “Governor-General of the Sudan.” He shall be appointed by Khedivial Decree on the recommendation of Her Britannic Majesty’s Government, and shall be removed only by Khedivial Decree, with the consent of Her Britannic Majesty’s Government.
ARTICLE IV.
Laws, as also Orders and Regulations with the full force of law, for the good government of the Sudan, and for regulating the holding, disposal, and devolution of property of every kind therein situate, may from time to time be made, altered, or abrogated by Proclamation of the Governor-General. Such Laws, Orders and Regulations may apply to the whole or any part named of the Sudan, and may, either explicitly or by necessary implication, alter or abrogate any existing Law or Regulation.
All such Proclamations shall forthwith be notified to Her Britannic Majesty’s Agent and Consul-General in Cairo, and to the President of the Council of Ministers of His Highness the Khedive.
ARTICLE V.
No Egyptian Law, Decree, Ministerial Arrêté, or other enactment hereafter to be made or promulgated shall apply to the Sudan or any part thereof save in so far as the same shall be applied by Proclamation of the Governor-General in manner hereinbefore provided.
ARTICLE VI.
In the definition by Proclamation of the conditions under which Europeans, of whatever nationality, shall be at liberty to trade with or reside in the Sudan, or to hold property, within its limits, no special privileges shall be accorded to the subjects of any one or more Power.
ARTICLE VII.
Import duties on entering the Sudan shall not be payable on goods coming from Egyptian territory. Such duties may, however, be levied on goods coming from elsewhere than Egyptian territory, but in the case of goods entering the Sudan at Suakin, or any other port on the Red Sea littoral, they shall not exceed the corresponding duties for the time being leviable on goods entering Egypt from abroad. Duties may be levied on goods leaving the Sudan, at such rates as may from time to time be prescribed by Proclamation.
ARTICLE VIII.
The jurisdiction of the Mixed Tribunals shall not extend, nor be recognised for any purpose whatsoever, in any part of the Sudan, except in the town of Suakin.
ARTICLE IX.
Until and save so far as it will be otherwise determined by Proclamation, the Sudan, with the exception of the town of Suakin, shall be and remain under martial law.
ARTICLE X.
No Consuls, Vice-Consuls, or Consular Agents shall be accredited in respect of nor allowed to reside in the Sudan, without the previous consent of Her Britannic Majesty’s Government.
ARTICLE XI.
The importation of slaves into the Sudan, as also their exportation, is absolutely prohibited. Provision shall be made by Proclamation for the enforcement of this Regulation.
ARTICLE XII.
It is agreed between the two Governments that special attention shall be paid to the enforcement of the Brussels Act of 2nd July, 1890, in respect to the import, sale, and manufacture of fire-arms and their munitions, and distilled or spirituous liquors.
Done in Cairo, the 19th January, 1899.
(Signed) BOUTROS GHALI—CROMER.
(2.)
WHEREAS, under our Agreement made the 19th day of January, 1899, relative to the future administration of the Sudan, it is provided by Article VIII. that the jurisdiction of the Mixed Tribunals shall not extend nor be recognised for any purpose whatsoever in any part of the Sudan except in the town of Suakin;
And Whereas no Mixed Tribunal has ever been established at Suakin and it has been found to be inexpedient to establish any such tribunal in that locality, by reason notably of the expenses which the adoption of this measure would occasion;
And Whereas grievous injustice is caused to the inhabitants of Suakin by the absence of any local jurisdiction for the settlement of their disputes, and it is expedient that the town of Suakin should be placed upon the same footing as the rest of the Sudan;
And Whereas we have decided to modify our said agreement accordingly in manner hereinafter appearing;
NOW, it is hereby agreed and declared by and between the Undersigned duly authorised for that purpose, as follows:
ARTICLE I.
Those provisions of our Agreement of the 19th day of January, 1899, by which the town of Suakin was excepted from the general regime established by the said Agreement for the future administration of the Sudan, are hereby abrogated.
Done at Cairo, the 10th of July, 1899.
(Signed) BOUTROS GHALI—CROMER.
(3.)
DECLARATION.
Signed at London, March 21, 1899.
[Ratifications exchanged at Paris, June 13. 1899.]
The undersigned, duly authorised by their Governments, have signed the following Declaration:—
The IVth Article of the Convention of the 14th June, 1898, shall be completed by the following provisions, which shall be considered as forming an integral part of it:—
1. Her Britannic Majesty’s Government engages not to acquire either territory or political influence to the west of the line of frontier defined in the following paragraph, and the Government of the French Republic engages not to acquire either territory or political influence to the east of the same line.
2. The line of frontier shall start from the point where the boundary between the Congo Free State and French territory meets the water-parting between the watershed of the Nile and that of the Congo and its affluents. It shall follow in principle that water-parting up to its intersection with the 11th parallel of north latitude. From this point it shall be drawn as far as the 15th parrallel in such manner as to separate, in principle, the Kingdom of Wadai from what constituted in 1882 the Province of Darfur; but it shall in no case be so drawn as to pass to the west beyond the 21st degree of longitude east of Greenwich (18° 40′ east of Paris), or to the east beyond the 23rd degree of longitude east of Greenwich (20° 40′ east of Paris).
3. It is understood, in principle, that to the north of the 15th parrallel the French zone shall be limited to the north-east and east by a line which shall start from the point of intersection of the Tropic of Cancer with the 16th degree of longitude east of Greenwich (13° 40′ east of Paris), shall run thence to the south-east until it meets the 24th degree of longitude east of Greenwich (21° 40′ east of Paris), and shall then follow the 24th degree until it meets, to the north of the 15th parallel of latitude, the frontier of Darfur as it shall eventually be fixed.
4. The two Governments engage to appoint Commissioners who shall be charged to delimit on the spot a frontier-line in accordance with the indications given in paragraph 2 of this Declaration. The result of their work shall be submitted for the approbation of their respective Governments.
It is agreed that the provisions of Article IX of the Convention of the 14th June, 1898, shall apply equally to the territories situated to the south of the 14° 20′ parallel of north latitude, and to the north of the 5th parallel of north latitude, between the 14° 20′ meridian of longitude east of Greenwich (12th degree east of Paris) and the course of the Upper Nile.
Done at London, the 21st March, 1899.
(L.S.) (Signed) SALISBURY.
(L.S.) (Signed) PAUL CAMBON.
(4.)
AGREEMENT BETWEEN GREAT BRITAIN AND HIS MAJESTY KING LEOPOLD II, SOVEREIGN OF THE INDEPENDENT STATE OF THE CONGO, RELATING TO THE SPHERES OF INFLUENCE OF GREAT BRITAIN AND THE INDEPENDENT STATE OF THE CONGO IN EAST AND CENTRAL AFRICA.
Signed at Brussels 12th May, 1894.
The undersigned, the Honorable Sir Francis Richard Plunkett, a Knight Grand Cross of the most distinguished Order of St. Michael and St. George, Her Britannic Majesty’s Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary to the King of the Belgians on behalf of the British Government, and M. van Eetvelde, Officer of the Order of Leopold, Grand Cross of the Orders of St. Gregory the Great, of Christ of Portugal, and of the African Redemption, etc., Secretary of State of the interior of the Independent State of the Congo, on behalf of the Government of the Independent State of the Congo, duly authorised by their respective Governments, have agreed as follows:—
His Majesty the King of the Belgians, Sovereign of the Independent State of the Congo, having recognised the British sphere of influence, as laid down in the Anglo-German Agreement of the 1st July, 1890 (No. 129), Great Britain undertakes to give to His Majesty a lease of territories in the Western basin of the Nile, under the conditions specified in the following Articles:
_Boundary. North of German Sphere. Watersheds between the Nile and the Congo._
Art. I. (a) It is agreed that the sphere of influence of the Independent Congo State shall be limited to the north of the German sphere in East Africa by a frontier following the 30th meridian east of Greenwich up to its intersection by the watershed between the Nile and the Congo, and thence following this watershed in a northerly and north-westerly direction.
(b) (Defines boundary from R. Zambezi to Lake Tanganyika.)
_Lease of certain territories by Great Britain to the Congo State. West shore of Lake Albert and Watershed between the Nile and the Congo._
Art. II. Great Britain grants a lease to His Majesty King Leopold II, Sovereign of the Independent State of the Congo, of the territories hereinafter defined, to be by him occupied and administered on the conditions and for the period of time hereinafter laid down.
Boundaries.
The territories shall be bounded by a line starting from a point situated on the west shore of Lake Albert, immediately to the south of Mahagi, to the nearest point of the frontier defined in paragraph (a) of the preceding Article. Thence it shall follow the watershed between the Congo and the Nile up to the 25th meridian east of Greenwich, and that meridian up to its intersection by the 10th parallel north, whence it shall run along that parallel directly to a point to be determined to the north of Fashoda. Thence it shall follow the “thalweg” of the Nile southward to Lake Albert, and the western shore of Lake Albert to the point above indicated south of Mahagi.
This lease shall remain in force during the reign of His Majesty King Leopold II, Sovereign of the Independent Congo State.
Nevertheless, at the expiration of His Majesty’s reign, it shall remain fully in force as far as concerns all the portion of the territories above-mentioned situated to the west of the 30th meridian east of Greenwich, as well as a strip of 25 kilom. in breadth, to be delimitated by common consent, stretching from the watershed between the Nile and the Congo up to the western shore of Lake Albert, and including the port of Mahagi.
This extended lease shall be continued as long as the Congo territories as an Independent State or as a Belgian Colony remain under the sovereignty of His Majesty and his Majesty’s successors.
Flag.
Throughout the continuance of a lease there shall be used a special flag in the leased territories.
Lease of Territory by Congo State to Great Britain between Lake Tanganyika and Lake Albert Edward.
[Art. III.[220] The Independent Congo State grants under lease to Great Britain, to be administered when occupied under the conditions and for a period hereinafter determined, a strip of territory 25 kilom. in breadth, extending from the most northerly port on Lake Tanganyika, which is included in it, to the most southerly point of Lake Albert Edward.
This lease will have similar duration to that which applies to the territories to the west of the 30th meridian east of Greenwich.]
Self-Denying Declaration.
Art. IV. His Majesty King Leopold II, Sovereign of the Independent Congo State, recognises that he neither has nor seeks to acquire any political rights in the territories ceded to him under lease in the Nile basin other than those which are in conformity with the present Agreement.
Similarly, Great Britain recognises that she neither has, nor seeks to acquire, any political rights in the strip of territory granted to her on lease between Lake Tanganyika and Lake Albert Edward other than those which are in conformity with the present Agreement.
Telegraphic Communication.
Art. V. The Independent Congo State authorises the construction through its territories by Great Britain, or by any Company duly authorised by the British Government, of a line of telegraph connecting the British territories in South Africa with the British sphere of influence on the Nile. The Government of the Congo State shall have facilities for connecting this line with its own telegraphic system.
This authorisation shall not confer on Great Britain or any Company, person, or persons, delegated to construct the telegraph line, any rights of police or administration within the territory of the Congo State.
Equality of Treatment in Territories Leased.
Art. VI. In the territories under lease in this Agreement the subjects of each of the Contracting Parties shall reciprocally enjoy equal rights and immunities, and shall not be subjected to any differential treatment of any kind.
In witness whereof the undersigned have signed the present Agreement, and have affixed thereto the seal of the arms.
Done in duplicate at Brussels, this 12th day of May, 1894.
(L.S.) FRANCIS RICHARD PLUNKETT.
(L.S.) EDM. VAN EETVELDE.
Claims of Turkey and Egypt in Basin of the Upper Nile not Ignored.
(1) Sir F. Plunkett to Mr. van Eetvelde.
British Legation, Brussels,
12th May, 1894.
M. LE SECRÉTAIRE D’ETAT,
The Earl of Kimberley, in authorising me to sign the Agreement of this day’s date for a lease of certain territories in the British sphere of influence in East Africa to His Majesty King Leopold II, has directed me to record the assurance that the parties to the agreement do not ignore the claims of Turkey and Egypt in the Basin of the Upper Nile.
I avail, etc.,
F. R. PLUNKETT.
(2) M. van Eetvelde to Sir F. Plunkett.
Brussels,
12th May, 1894.
SIR,
In signing on behalf of His Majesty King Leopold II, the Agreement of this day’s date, for a lease of certain territories in the British sphere of influence in East Africa, I reciprocate the assurance that the parties to the Agreement do not ignore the claims of Turkey and Egypt in the Basin of the Upper Nile.
I avail, etc.,
EDM. VAN EETVELDE.
_Explanatory Despatch relating to the above Agreement between Great Britain and the Congo State, of 12th May_, 1894.
The Earl of Kimberley to Mr. Hardinge.
Foreign Office,
23rd May, 1894.
SIR,
Claims of Egypt and Turkey to Equatorial Provinces.
* * * * * * * * *
On approaching His Majesty, Her Majesty’s Government found him fully disposed to enter into an arrangement which, while enabling him to continue the work he had commenced, would record his recognition of the position of Great Britain in her sphere, and of such claims as Egypt, and, through her, Turkey, may have to the Equatorial Provinces whose administration was abandoned owing to the evacuation of the Sudan.
I enclose copy of agreement by which His Majesty, having recognised, on behalf of the Congo State, the British sphere of influence as laid down in the Anglo-German Agreement of 1890, received from Great Britain leases of the territory specified in the Agreement under certain conditions.
Her Majesty’s Government are satisfied that, under the Agreement, this portion of the British sphere will be administered in a spirit in full accordance with the requirements of civilisation, and of the Acts of Berlin and Brussels.
* * * * * * * * *
I have, etc.,
KIMBERLEY.
(4a.)
DECLARATION BETWEEN GREAT BRITAIN AND THE CONGO FREE STATE, WITHDRAWING ART. III OF THE AGREEMENT OF 12TH MAY, 1894, RESPECTING THE TERRITORY BETWEEN LAKE TANGANYIKA AND LAKE ALBERT EDWARD.
Brussels, 22nd June, 1894.
DECLARATION.
In compliance with the request made by His Majesty the King of the Belgians, Sovereign of the Independent State of the Congo, that the Government of Her Britannic Majesty will consent to the withdrawal of Art. III. of the Agreement of the 12th May, 1894, the Undersigned, duly authorised by their respective Governments, agree that the said Article be withdrawn.
Done, in duplicate, at Brussels, the 22nd day of June, 1894.
F. R. PLUNKET.
EDMOND VAN EETVELDE.
(5.)
AGREEMENT re TRIBES BETWEEN KHOR BARAKA AND RED SEA.
With a view to establishing in a permanent manner the dependence of the semi-nomadic tribes which exist on the frontier between the Baraka and the Red Sea, and to determining precisely the frontier separating the Italian and Egyptian territory in this region, H.E. Ferik Sir Herbert Kitchener, Pasha, Sirdar of the Egyptian Army, and H.E. Cavaliere Oreste Baratieri, Lieut. General, Governor of the Colony of Eritrea, authorised by their respective Governments have agreed to the following articles:—
I. In the district between the Red Sea and the Baraka, the frontier line between Egypt and Eritrea shall follow a line which, starting from Ras Kasar joins the principal branch of the Karora about 2 kilom. from the coast, and follows the course of the Karora up to a point marked Karora on the map. The frontier then follows the watershed between the torrents Aiet and Merib on the north and the torrents Falkat and Sela on the south, up to a point on the plateau of Hagar Nush, to be fixed by the delineators, and from that point so fixed shall proceed to join the Baraka at a point which is also left to the delineators to establish, following a clearly determined natural line. From the Baraka, the line of frontier goes straight to the intersection of the 17th parallel north with the 37th meridian east of Greenwich.
II. The semi-nomadic tribes on the frontier known as the Hazerandowa (Ad-Azeri), Felunda (Aflenda), Beit Maleh, and Rashaida, together with the sections of the Beni Amer at present acknowledging the authority of Sheikh Idris Hamen, are recognised as dependent on the Egyptian Government; and the Beni Amer acknowledging Sheikhs Ali Husseid, and Mahmud Sherif, as well as the Hababs, are recognised as dependent on the Government of Eritrea.
III. The two Governments bind themselves to concede reciprocally, reserving themselves the power of imposing a moderate tax in payment, rights of pasturage and cultivation in their respective territories to such alien tribes as apply for the concession through their respective Governments. Such concession shall be limited only by the requirements of public safety and by the needs of other local tribes dependent on the Government giving the concession.
IV. The two Governments bind themselves reciprocally to oppose as far as is practicable, and without necessarily having recourse to force, the settlement in their respective territories of tribes who may cross the frontier in consequence of rebellion or defection of their chiefs.
In the interests of public tranquility, the two Governments further bind themselves to take into consideration according to the circumstances of each case, the expediency of total or partial disarmament of the tribes on the frontier, due allowance being made for the requirements of their defence.
Each of the two Governments, however, reserves to itself full liberty to decide upon the measures which it shall take in its own territory, both as regards the means of opposing the immigration of rebellious tribes, and in respect to the time, method and extent of the disarmament to which this article refers.
(Signed) HERBERT KITCHENER, Sirdar.
Asmara, 25th June, 1895.
(Signed) GENERALE O. BARATIERI.
7th July, 1895.
(6.)
ERITREA-SUDAN FRONTIER BETWEEN RAS KASAR AND THE KHOR BARAKA, AS SETTLED BY THE PARSONS-MARTINI AGREEMENT, SIGNED AT ASMARA, 7TH DECEMBER, 1898.
Being desirous of determining the Sudan and Italian frontier between Ras Kasar and Baraka, and thus ratifying the Kitchener-Baratieri Convention of the 7th July, 1895, the undersigned, El Lewa Parsons Pasha, Governor of Suakin and Commandant of Kassala Station, on behalf of His Highness the Khedive of Egypt; and Chevalier Ferdinando Martini, Extraordinary Civil Commissioner of the Colony of Eritrea, on behalf of His Majesty the King of Italy, have agreed as follows:—
Art. I. Starting from the Cape of Ras Kasar on the Red Sea the frontier between the Sudan and Eritrea follows a line which, following the heights of Halabai (Halibai) and Gaba Keli (Gabei-Helli) joins the bed of the Karora (Carora) and ascends the latter to the heights of Tefleinai (Teflanait), whence viâ Abbeinedu mountain it reaches the watershed between the valleys of Karora (Carora) and Tabbeh (Tabeh) on the south and the Aitara (Aitera) and Areirib (Arerib) on the north, it then runs in a westerly direction along the above-mentioned watershed to the hillock of Mashonkole (Sciancolet), and thence by the slopes of Sigat Alim (Sigat Tellim) it reaches a little to the north of Roribet mountain, the plateau of Hagar Nush (Nusch); thence it follows its northern edge to the summit of Hamoiet (Hamoet) and along the Hafta (Afta) torrent to the wells of the same name, thence to Jebel Aar (Monte Haar) over the undulating region which forms the watershed between the middle course of the Ambakta (Ambacta) and the Lui (Loi) torrent; from that rocky region it proceeds to the Baraka (Barca) and joins it at its confluence with the Ambakta (Ambacta) following the slopes which limit on the north the lower portion of this last named valley.
Art. II. Two Commissioners, delegated one by the Egyptian Government, and the other by the Italian Government, will proceed within six months to demarcate the frontier by erecting boundary pillars.
Done at Asmara in duplicate, in Italian and Arabic, on the 7th day of December, 1898.
(Signed) CHARLES PARSONS, PASHA.
(Signed) MARTINI.
(Names in brackets as spelt in Italian version—G.)
(7.)
DELIMITATION OF FRONTIER BETWEEN ERYTHRÆA AND THE EGYPTIAN-SUDAN.
From the point of junction of the Ambakta with the Baraka, the line of frontier follows the course of the latter (Baraka) up-stream to its junction with the Khor Dada, and then turning in a westerly direction follows the Dada throughout its course to its source at the foot of the Iskénié range of hills.
The line now turns southwards and follows the watershed between the streams flowing directly to the Baraka on the east and those flowing to the Gash and Langeb on the west. This watershed is defined by the Iskénié Koreb and Yaet (Tai-yé) ranges of hills, by Jebel Meesat and finally by Jebel Benefer.
From Jebel Benefer the line of frontier passes in almost a direct line to the Sabderat range, being defined south of Jebel Benefer by the low hill Tedelaié, by Jebel Afada-Gumbib, by the hills Gelmabai and Dobadob, and finally by the peak called Deberenis on the Sabderat range.
From Deberenis the line crosses the Sabderat range by Jebel Eunice to the peak called Kwasana, and thence crosses Khor Sabderat to a point on the range of hills south of the Khor.
This point has been marked by a pillar.
The cliff of Shababit is left in Sudanese territory.
W. J. WALTER.
CAPT. W. MEYER.
BONGIOVANNI SIMONE.
Sabderat,
1st June, 1899.
(The above is the sense of the original British and Italian versions combined: they are not exact translations of each other.—G.)
(8.)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE FRONTIER BETWEEN THE SUDAN AND ERITREA FROM SABDERAT TO TODLUC. (With Map.)
Commencing from the last pillar erected in 1899 by Major Walter and Captain Bongiovanni on the south of the Kassala-Sabderat road, the boundary runs in a southerly direction practically in a straight line to Jebel Anderaib, situated about 3 kilom. from the right bank of the Gash; from there it runs nearly due west to a point on the Gash south of Jebel Gulsa, which it leaves entirely in Sudan territory; from the right bank of the Gash it runs straight to the highest point of Jebel Abu Gamal.
[221][From Jebel Abu Gamal it proceeds in a straight line to a point in latitude 14° 52′ north, on the right bank of the Atbara in the small district of El Egeiri, which is bounded on the north by the districts of El Yoya and El Rumeila, and on the south by that of El Alim.]
[221][From this point it ascends the deepest channel of the Atbara till it reaches its junction with the Setit, where it leaves the Atbara and ascends the deepest channel of the Setit to a point between the districts of El Gereiish and Abuda.]
[221][From here it proceeds in a straight line on a true bearing of about 56° east of north to Todluc, leaving within the territory of Eritrea the group of low hills known as Jebel Alaklai.]
Done in double original at Todluk, the 16th day of April, 1901.
(Signed) M. G. TALBOT, Miralai, Commissioner for the Sudan.
(Signed) GIUSEPPE COLLI DI FELIZZANO, Tenente Piemonte Reale Cavalleria incaricato per il Governo dell’ Eritrea.
(9.)
DESCRIPTION OF THE LINE AGREED UPON FOR THE RECTIFICATION OF THE BOUNDARY BETWEEN THE ANGLO-EGYPTIAN SUDAN AND THE COLONY OF ERYTHRÆA. (With Map.)
The rectified boundary shall run from the highest summit of Jebel Abu Gamal to the highest point of the group of low hills known as El Burak, situated on the magnetic bearing of 175° from Abu Gamal and 14 kilometres distant.
From El Burak it shall run in a straight line to the eastern ridge of the Koraiteb Hills, passing through the highest rock of this ridge, the highest of the whole group, and leaving to the Sudan the water-holes in the Koraiteb Rocks to the west of this line. The Sudan Government, however, shall allow Erythræan subjects with caravans from Sogada to Noggara, or vice versâ, or engaged in collecting gum in Erythræan territory, to use these water-holes. This privilege shall not be extended to hunters in Erythræan territory.
Between El Burak and Koraiteb, owing to the necessity of avoiding the tracts of pathless bush so frequently met with in this waterless area, the Commission was compelled to keep to the west of the direct line. It was, consequently, impossible to do more than to ascertain that the little hill of Murawi, the ridge of Ginjar, or Wad Ganjar, and the pond or marsh of Um Sagit, lie within Sudan territory without constituting them boundary points.
From Koraiteb the boundary shall pass in a straight line to the conspicuous clump of trees surrounded by stones at the western end of the hill known as J. Nuwar, and from there, on a magnetic bearing of 166°, to the road cleared this winter by Bimbashi Savile between Umbrega and El Hafeira, and striking it on the ridge between Wad Mizammil and El Hafeira at a distance of about 520 metres, measured along the track from the point where it crosses the nearest water channel immediately west of the ridge.
The right of passage between the hills of J. Nuwar and J. El Batiota, as through the area known as El Makhram El Batiota, shall be enjoyed by the subjects of both Governments.
From the above-mentioned point on the Umbrega-El Hafeira road, now marked by a blazed “heglig” tree on the north side of the road, the boundary shall run straight to the bend of the Setit immediately opposite the mouth of the Khor Royan.
(Signed) M. G. TALBOT, Colonel, Commissioner for the Sudan.
Umbrega Camp,
February 18, 1903.
Copy given to the Erythræan Commissioner.—M. G. T.
(10.)
DECLARATION REGARDING THE SETTLEMENT OF THE ABYSSINIAN-SUDANESE-ERYTHRÆAN FRONTIERS.
It is agreed that, in order to complete the delimitation of the frontier between the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and Erythræa, a line shall be drawn from Abu Gamal (see Talbot-Colli map) to be eventually demarcated by special delegates in accordance with geographical features, in a southerly direction as far as the junction of the Khor Um Hagar with the River Setit. (See Talbot-Colli map 36° 37′ east long.)
The territory to the east of this line which has been recognised as Sudanese territory by the Emperor Menelik shall be transferred, subject to his consent, to Erythræa.
The parallelogram west of this line and north of the Tomat-Todluk line shall be ceded by Italy to the Sudan.
As a consequence of this arrangement the boundary line between the Sudan and Abyssinia from the Setit to Matamma shall be deflected towards the west, so as to leave on the Abyssinian side Nogara and the trade-route from Gondar northwards towards Erythræa.
The British and Italian Agents in Abyssinia will work together in concert to obtain from the Emperor Menelik in return for this extension of the Abyssinian boundary, a zone of territory to the East of Todluk-Maieteb line, which will give to Erythræa the whole of the Kunama tribe up to the Mareb.
Should these negotiations, after a reasonable lapse of time, prove unsuccessful, negotiations shall be resumed in Rome between the Italian and British delegates with the object of tracing the boundary between the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and Abyssinia on the basis of the Todluk-Ombrega or Maieteb-Jebel Obar lines, whilst, as regards the boundary between the Sudan and Erythræa, the status quo ante of the territory North of the Tomat-Todluk line shall be preserved.
The arrangement contemplated in the present declaration shall be regarded as secret until the consent of the Emperor Menelik has been obtained.
Done at Rome, this twenty-second day of November, in the year one thousand nine hundred and one.
(Signed) F. MARTINI. RENNELL RODD.
G. AGNESA. GLEICHEN, Kaimakam.
F. CICCODICOLA. J. L. HARRINGTON.
A. BODRERO.
(11.)
SABDERAT AGREEMENT.
Between the undersigned:—Colonel John Collinson, C.B., Mudir of Kassala, on the part of the Anglo-Egyptian Government, and Chevalier Ferdinando Martini, Royal Commissioner of Eritrea, on the part of the Government of His Majesty the King of Italy, have agreed to the following Convention:—
ARTICLE I.
From the 1st March, 1901, “The Parsons-Martini Convention” regarding the question of pasturage[222] in the territory of the Erithrean Government signed at Asmara on the 7th of December, 1898, is abrogated.
ARTICLE II.
Each Government reserves to itself to permit or forbid the temporary emigration into its territory of tribes, or fractions of tribes, who desire to enter its territory for the purpose of pasturage of their flocks and herds, and reserves to itself the conditions under which such permission will be granted.
ARTICLE III.
When temporary permission for grazing is given under Article II of this Convention, it is to be understood that those persons to whom such permission is given, are, from the time they cross the frontier, amenable to the laws at that time in force in the country they enter.
Made at Sabderat in duplicate in Italian and English this twenty-eighth day of February, 1901.
(Signed) J. COLLINSON, Colonel, Mudir, Kassala.
MARTINI.
N.B.—The originals of this agreement in English and Italian are retained in the Kassala office.
(Signed) J. COLLINSON.
(12.)
CUSTOMS CONVENTION BETWEEN THE ANGLO-EGYPTIAN SUDAN AND ERYTHRÆA.
ARTICLE I.
On the importation into the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan of any goods coming from the Italian Colony of Erythræa, no other or higher duties shall be imposed than those which are, or may be payable under the Egyptian Tariff for the time being in force on the importation into Egypt of the like goods coming from any third country, the most favoured in this respect, provided always that such duties shall not exceed five per cent. in the case of natural produce which may be proved, to the satisfaction of the Sudanese Custom House authorities at the place of entry into the Sudan, to be the bonâ fide produce of the said Colony of Erythræa, intended for consumption in the Sudan. Such goods however passing through the Sudan for consumption in Egypt, will have, on entering Egypt, to make good the difference between the duty here specified and the duty imposed by the Egyptian Tariff.
ARTICLE II.
On the importation into the Italian Colony of Erythræa, of any goods coming from the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan, no other or higher duties shall be imposed than those which are, or may be payable under the Tariff for the time being in force in the said Colony on the importation into the said Colony of the like foreign goods coming from any third country, the most favoured in this respect, provided always that such duties shall not exceed five per cent. in the case of natural produce which may be proved to the satisfaction of the Erythræan Custom House authorities at the place of entry into the said Colony to be the bonâ fide produce of the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan.
ARTICLE III.
Tobacco in all its forms coming from the Colony of Erythræa may be legally imported into the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan under the same conditions as may be applicable to tobacco imported into Egypt.
Tobacco in all its forms coming from the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan may be legally imported into the Colony of Erythræa on conditions to be established by the Governor of that Colony.
ARTICLE IV.
The importation of arms and ammunition of all kinds from the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan into Erythræa and from Erythræa into the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan is expressly prohibited.
ARTICLE V.
The importation of salt and of all alcoholic liquors into the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan from Erythræa and from the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan into Erythræa shall be subject to such conditions and restrictions as may be from time to time laid down by the respective Governments, which may at any time prohibit such importation if they shall think fit.
The importation of sugar and of manufactured cotton of all kinds from the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan into the Colony of Erythræa shall be subject to the conditions which shall be laid down by the Government of the Colony.
ARTICLE VI.
On the importation into the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan from the Italian Colony of Erythræa of any produce of the said Colony such as gum, india-rubber, ivory, or ostrich feathers, upon which a tax or royalty is imposed in the Sudan, there shall be levied on such produce the like tax or royalty as that which is for the time being in force in the Sudan, without prejudice to the payment of the duties leviable on such produce under the provisions of Article I.
The same dispositions shall apply to these categories of produce when imported into the Colony of Erythræa from the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan.
Provided always that deduction of the amount already paid in respect of Customs duties on the entry of such produce into either territory shall be made from the amount payable in respect of the said tax or royalty.
ARTICLE VII.
As regards the load tax which may be levied in the Sudan on loaded camels or other loaded transport-animals proceeding towards Erythræa, no higher tax shall be levied on these than is levied on transport-animals in the Mudiria of Kassala or the Administrative District of Suakin.
ARTICLE VIII.
The drawback upon goods coming from the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan and passing through the Italian Colony of Erythræa in transit, as well as that upon goods coming from the said Colony and passing in transit through the said territory, shall be equal in amount to the whole of the duty paid on their entry into the country through which they pass in transit, on condition that they be duly sealed and accompanied by certificates of origin delivered by the competent authorities, either Anglo-Egyptian or Erythræan as the case may be.
Provided always that the provisions of this article shall not apply to goods imported into Egypt and not intended for re-exportation thence.
ARTICLE IX.
Each of the two Governments shall decide where its own Customs Houses shall be and shall make its own valuations on imported and exported goods on the basis of their value at the place of import or export.
These valuations shall be revised every six months and communicated to each other by the respective authorities, who will exchange views with the object of establishing by friendly understanding the approximate cost of transport for the following six months.
ARTICLE X.
Goods exported from the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan into Erythræa will pay the same export duty (not exceeding one per cent.) as is paid on goods exported from Suakin or other Red Sea ports.
Goods exported from Erythræa into the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan may be subjected to an export or statistical duty of one per cent.
ARTICLE XI.
The coasting trade between the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan and the Italian Colony of Erythræa shall be subject to the treatment granted to the most favoured nation by either of the contracting parties.
ARTICLE XII.
The present Convention shall remain in force for ten years, dating from the day of the exchange of ratifications, but shall be subject to revision after five years, on the application of either of the contracting parties, provided that the application is made six months before the expiration of the five years.
In case neither of the two contracting parties shall have given notice six months before the expiration of the said period of ten years of their intention to terminate the present Convention, it shall remain in force for a further period of five years, and thereafter for successive periods of the like duration, unless either of the contracting parties shall have given notice as aforesaid six months before the expiration of the quinquennial period then current.
Done at Rome this twenty-sixth day of November, in the year one thousand nine hundred and one.
(Signed) MARTINI.
(Signed) GLEICHEN, Kaimakam.
Ratified at Cairo, 2nd January, 1902.
(13.)
POSTAL CONVENTION BETWEEN THE ANGLO-EGYPTIAN SUDAN AND ERYTHRÆA.
ARTICLE I.
From the date of the present Convention the Post Offices of the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan and of Erythræa will carry out the service of ordinary and registered (raccomandate) correspondence and of money orders between the Sudan and Erythræa, under the conditions, formalities and tariffs in force in the Universal Postal Union, except as hereinafter mentioned.
ARTICLE II.
The exchange of mails will take place weekly at Sabderat. Each Government will provide for the transport of the mails in its own territory.
ARTICLE III.
The Service of Money Orders between the Colony of Erythræa and the Sudan is carried out in accordance with the forms and regulations in force for the Money Order Service between Erythræa and Egypt.
ARTICLE IV.
This Convention is subject to revision every five years, dating from the exchange of ratifications, on the application of one of the contracting parties six months before the close of the quinquennial period.
ARTICLE V.
The Postal Convention (Parsons-Samminiatelli) of the 25th of December, 1897, is hereby cancelled.
Done at Rome this twenty-sixth day of November, in the year one thousand nine hundred and one.
(Signed) MARTINI.
(Signed) GLEICHEN, Kaimakam.
Ratified at Cairo, 8th January, 1902.
(14.)
TELEGRAPHIC CONVENTION BETWEEN THE ANGLO-EGYPTIAN SUDAN AND ERYTHRÆA.
ARTICLE I.
Telegrams between the Anglo-Egyptian territory of the Sudan and Erythræa can be despatched from or to any telegraphic station in either country.
ARTICLE II.
The telegraph line of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan is connected with that of Erythræa at the station of Sabderat which is worked by Italian personnel. The cost of the working of this telegraphic station will be divided equally between the two Governments.
ARTICLE III.
The total charge for telegrams between the two countries shall be at the rate of one lire (forty-two millièmes) for the first fifteen words or less, and five centesimi (two millièmes) per word after the first fifteen words.
The money received for such telegrams shall remain in the possession of the Administration from whose station the telegram is sent.
ARTICLE IV.
Telegrams from or to the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan through Erythræa and Perim to (or from) places beyond Perim will pay over and above the nominal tariff, a transit tax (over Erythræan lines and cables) of forty centesimi (sixteen millièmes) per word; which sum will be credited to the Administration of Erythræa in the half-yearly settlement of accounts.
ARTICLE V.
In like manner telegrams from (or to) the Erythræan Colony passing over Sudanese or Egyptian telegraph lines to (or from) places outside Egypt or the Sudan will pay, over and above the normal tariff, a transit tax of seventy-five centesimi (thirty millièmes) per word over the lines Kassala-Alexandria or Kassala-Suakin; which sum will be credited to the Administration of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan in the half-yearly settlement of accounts.
ARTICLE VI.
In case of interruption to the Italian Massawa-Perim cable, or to the lines and cables between the Sudan and abroad, it is agreed that the lines or cables of each Government shall be at the service of the other.
In this case the service telegrams of one Government passing over the lines and cables of the other will pay only half the transit taxes above mentioned.
ARTICLE VII.
The authorities of the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and of Erythræa will exchange mutually and free of cost, in English, Italian, or Arabic, political or military news which might interest each other.
ARTICLE VIII.
The half-yearly accounts above-mentioned shall be regulated on the 1st January and 1st July of each year.
ARTICLE IX.
The said Convention shall remain in force for the space of one year from the date of exchange of ratifications, but after this period it shall continue in force sine die until revised at the request of one of the two contracting parties who shall give at least six months notice of his wish for such revision.
ARTICLE X.
The Telegraphic Convention (Parsons-Samminiatelli) of the 25th December, 1897, is hereby cancelled.
Done at Rome this twenty-sixth day of November, in the year one thousand nine hundred and one.
(Signed) MARTINI.
(Signed) GLEICHEN, Kaimakam.
Ratified at Cairo, 8th January, 1902.
(15.)
TREATY BETWEEN GREAT BRITAIN AND ETHIOPIA. (With Map.)
His Majesty Edward VII, by the Grace of God, King of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, and of the British Dominions beyond the Seas, Emperor of India, and His Majesty Menelik II, by the Grace of God, King of Kings of Ethiopia, being animated with the desire to conform the friendly relations between the two Powers, and to settle the frontier between the Sudan and Ethiopia; and His Majesty King Edward having appointed as his plenipotentiary Lieut.-Colonel John Lane Harrington, a Commander of the Royal Victorian Order, His Majesty’s Agent at the Court of His Majesty Menelik II, King of Kings of Ethiopia, whose full powers have been found in due and proper form, and His Majesty the Emperor Menelik, negotiating in his own name as King of Kings of Ethiopia, they have agreed upon and do conclude the following Articles which shall be binding on themselves, their heirs and successors.
ARTICLE I.
The frontier between the Sudan and Ethiopia agreed on between the two Governments shall be:—The line which is marked in red on the map annexed to this Treaty in duplicate, and traced from Khor Um Hagar to Galabat, to the Blue Nile, Baro, Pibor, and Akobo rivers, to Helile, thence to the intersection of the 6° lat. north with the 35° long. east of Greenwich.
ARTICLE II.
The boundary as defined in Article I shall be delimited and marked on the ground by a Joint Boundary Commission which shall be nominated by the two High Contracting Parties, who shall notify the same to their subjects after delimitation.
ARTICLE III.
His Majesty the Emperor Menelik II, King of Kings of Ethiopia, engages himself towards the Government of His Britannic Majesty not to construct or allow to be constructed any work across the Blue Nile, Lake Tsana, or the Sobat which would arrest the flow of their waters into the Nile, except in agreement with His Britannic Majesty’s Government and the Government of the Sudan.
ARTICLE IV.
His Majesty the Emperor Menelik II, King of Kings of Ethiopia, engages himself to allow his Britannic Majesty’s Government and the Government of the Sudan to select, in the neighbourhood of Itang on the Baro River, a block of territory having a river frontage of not more than 2,000 metres, in area not exceeding 400 hectares, which shall be leased to the Government of the Sudan, to be administered and occupied as a commercial station so long as the Sudan is under the Anglo-Egyptian Government.
It is agreed between the two High Contracting Parties that the territory so leased shall not be used for any political or military purpose.
ARTICLE V.
His Majesty the Emperor Menelik II, King of Kings of Ethiopia, grants to his Britannic Majesty’s Government and the Government of the Sudan the right to construct a railway through Abyssinian territory to connect the Sudan with Uganda. A route for the railway will be selected by mutual agreement between the two High Contracting Parties.
The present Treaty shall come into force as soon as its ratification by His Britannic Majesty shall have been notified to the Emperor of Ethiopia.[223]
In faith of which His Majesty Menelik II, King of Kings of Ethiopia, in his own name, and Lieutenant-Colonel John Lane Harrington on behalf of his Majesty King Edward VII, King of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, and of the British Dominions beyond the Seas, Emperor of India, have signed the present Treaty in duplicate, written in the English and Arabic languages, identically, both texts being official, and have thereto affixed their seals.
Done at Addis Abbaba, this 15th day of May, 1902.
(16.)
NOTE.
ANNEX TO THE TREATY OF 10TH JULY, 1900,[224] REGARDING THE FRONTIER BETWEEN ETHIOPIA AND ERITREA, AND THE TREATY OF 15TH MAY, 1902, REGARDING THE FRONTIER BETWEEN THE SUDAN AND ERITREA.
His Majesty the Emperor of Ethiopia, Menelik II, Major Ciccodicola, Italian Minister in Ethiopia, and Lieutenant Col. Harrington, H.B.M’s. Agent in Ethiopia, have mutually agreed that:—
ARTICLE I.
The frontier treaty between Ethiopia and Eritrea previously determined by the line Tomat-Todluc is mutually modified in the following manner:—Commencing from the junction of the Khor Um Hagar with the Setit, the new frontier follows this river to its junction with the Maieteb, following the latter’s course so as to leave Mount Ala Tacura to Eritrea, and joins the Mareb at its junction with the Mai Ambessa.
The line from the junction of the Setit and Maieteb to the junction of the Mareb and Mai Ambessa shall be delimited by Italian and Ethiopian delegates so that the Cunama tribe belong to Eritrea.
ARTICLE II.
The frontier between the Sudan and Eritrea instead of that delimited by the English and Italian delegates by the Convention of the 16th April 1901, shall be the line which from Sabderat, is traced viâ Abu Gamal to the junction of the Khor Um Hagar with the Setit.
The present agreement shall come into force as soon as its ratification by the British and Italian Governments shall have been notified to the Emperor of Ethiopia.
In faith of which, His Majesty the Emperor of Ethiopia, Menelik II, in his own name and that of his successors, Major Ciccodicola in the name of his Majesty Victor Emmanuel III, King of Italy, and his successors, and Lieut.-Col. Harrington in the name of His Majesty Edward VII, King of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, and of the British Dominions beyond the Seas, Emperor of India, and his successors have signed the present note in triplicate; written in Italian, English, and Amharic languages, identically, all texts being official, and have thereto affixed their seals.
Done at Addis Abbaba, this 15th day of May, 1902.
(17.)
Sudan Agent’s Office,
Sudan Government, Cairo.
21st April, 1902.
MY LORD,
I have the honour to inform Your Lordship that the Sudan Government has had under consideration the question of duties to be paid on goods coming from Uganda into or passing through the Sudan.
It has been decided that the Customs Convention[225] recently concluded with Eritrea shall apply to such goods under the following conditions:—
1. Certificates of origin should be furnished by the Uganda authorities in order to facilitate and ensure the efficient collection of the proper Customs dues.
2. In the event of goods not specially specified in Article VI of the Convention being imported into the Sudan from Uganda, there shall be levied the following:—
(a) On goods proved to the satisfaction of the Sudanese Custom House authorities to be the bonâ fide natural produce of Uganda, a duty equal to that payable under the Egyptian Tariff for the time being in force on the importation into Egypt of the like goods coming from any third country but in no case to exceed 5 per cent.
(b) On other goods, a duty equal to that payable under the Egyptian Tariff above-mentioned without the 5 per cent. reservation. This duty is at present 8 per cent. ad valorem on most articles.
3. On gum, india-rubber, ivory, ostrich feathers, etc., etc., an import duty in accordance with (a) or (b) and in addition the existing royalty (20 per cent. at present), minus the amount of the import duty paid under (a) or (b).
In other words, imported goods which are liable to pay royalty in the Sudan are allowed a drawback of the original amount of import duty paid.
4. (a) Goods duly sealed and accompanied by certificates of origin delivered by Uganda Authorities, passing in transit through Anglo-Egyptian territory, other than goods imported into Egypt and not intended for re-exportation thence, shall be entitled to a drawback of the whole of the duty paid on their entry into the Sudan, i.e., of import duty, or of royalty, or of both.
(b) The maximum time allowed for goods passing in transit through Anglo-Egyptian territory will be six months.
I have the honour to be, my Lord,
Your Lordship’s most obedient servant,
(Signed) GLEICHEN, Miralai, Sudan Agent, Cairo.
(For Governor-General of the Sudan.)
The Right Honourable,
The EARL OF CROMER, G.C.B., G.C.M.G., K.C.S.I., C.I.E.
His Britannic Majesty’s Agent and Consul-General in Egypt.
Foreign Office,
12th May, 1902.
MY LORD,
I have received Your Lordship’s despatch No. 61, Confidential of 23rd ultimo, forwarding copy of a letter from the Agent of the Government of the Sudan at Cairo in regard to the duties to be paid on goods coming from Uganda into or passing through the Sudan.
I approve the proposals in Count Gleichen’s letter, and will communicate them to H.M.’s Commissioner in Uganda.
I am, etc.,
(Signed) LANSDOWNE.
THE EARL OF CROMER, G.C.B., etc., etc.
Cairo.
(18.)
BOUNDARY AGREEMENT BETWEEN FRANCE AND THE CONGO FREE STATE, 14TH AUGUST, 1894.
The undersigned, Gabriel Hanotaux, Minister for Foreign Affairs of the French Republic, etc.; Jacques Haussmann, Director of Political and Commercial Affairs at the Colonial Office, etc.; Joseph Devolder, ex-Minister of Justice and ex-Minister of the Interior and Education of His Majesty the King of the Belgians, Vice-President of the Supreme Council of the Congo Free State, etc.; and Baron Constant Goffinet, etc., Plenipotentiaries of the French Republic and of the Congo Free State, deputed to prepare an agreement relative to the boundaries of the respective possessions of the two states and to settle the other questions pending between them, have agreed upon the following provisions:—
Boundary between the Congo Free State and French Congo, Oubanghi, etc.
Art. 1. The frontier between the Congo Free State and the Colony of French Congo, after following the thalweg of the Oubanghi up to the confluence of the Mbomou[226] and of the Ouelle (or Welle), shall be constituted as follows:—(1) The thalweg of the Mbomou up to its source. (2) A straight line joining the watershed between the Congo and Nile Basins. From this point the frontier of the Free State is constituted by the said watershed up to its intersection with long. 30° east of Greenwich (27° 40′ east of Paris).
Arts. 2 and 3. French right of Police over the waters of the Mbomou.
Renunciation by Free State of Occupation or Influence over certain Districts. Watershed of Congo and Nile Basins, etc.
Art. 4. The Free State binds herself to renounce all occupation, and to exercise in the future no political influence west or north of a line thus determined:—Long. 30° east of Greenwich (27° 40′ east of Paris), starting from its intersection of the watershed of the Congo and Nile Basins, up to the point where it meets the parallel 5° 30′, and then along that parallel to the Nile.
Art. 5. Ratifications to be exchanged within three months.
Art. 6. In token of which the Plenipotentiaries have drawn up the present arrangement and affixed their signatures.
Given at Paris in duplicate, August 14, 1894.
G. HANOTAUX.
J. HAUSSMANN.
J. DEVOLDER.
BARON GOFFINET.
(Approved by the Government of the French Republic, by Law of 21st December, 1894.)
(19.)
AGREEMENT re FRONTIER ERITREA-ABYSSINIA. (With Map.)
In the name of the Holy Trinity:
His Majesty King Humbert I of Italy, and His Majesty Menelik II, King of Kings of Ethiopia, being desirous of settling the question of the frontier between Eritrea and Ethiopia, which was left unsettled at the conclusion of the Peace Treaty of Addis Abbaba of the 26th October, 1896, have agreed to conclude the following Convention.
Art. I. The line Tomat-Todluc-Mareb-Belesa-Muna, traced on the attached map, is acknowledged by the two contracting parties as the frontier between Eritrea and Ethiopia.
Art. II. The Italian Government hereby binds itself not to cede or sell to another Power, the territory lying between the line Tomat-Todluc-Mareb-Mai Ambessa-Mai Feccia-Mai Maretta-Mai Ha-Mahio-Plain of Pharaoh’s hens (1) and the line Tomat-Todluc-Mareb-Belesa-Muna, given by his Majesty Menelik II, King of Kings of Ethiopia, to Italy.
His Majesty Menelik II, King of Kings of Ethiopia, in his own name, his heirs and successors, and Captain Ciccodicola, in the name of His Majesty Humbert I, King of Italy, his heirs and successors, have with willingness and accord agreed to and written this Convention in Italian and Amharic, considering both as official (in case of error, however, in the writing, the Emperor Menelik will adhere to the Amharic text), and having approved of same they have affixed their seals thereto.
Written at the City of Addis Abbaba, this 10th day of July, 1900.
(Signed) Seal of the EMPEROR MENELIK.
(Signed) CAPT. FREDERICK CICCODICOLA. _Representative of H.M. the King of Italy_.
(1) Line proposed by the Emperor Menelik to Major Nerazzini in 1897.
(20.)[227]
BERLIN ACT, 26.2.85: Free Trade in Congo Basin, etc.
(21.)[227]
BRUSSELS ACT, 2.7.90 (in force since 2.4.94): Slave Trade, Firearms, Ammunition, etc. Amongst others, Great Britain, France, Italy, Russia, Turkey, and Abyssinia are Signatories.
[Footnote 220: This Article was withdrawn by a Declaration signed 22nd June, 1894 (vide below).]
[Footnote 221: These three paragraphs have been cancelled by the later agreement of 18.2.03—G.]
[Footnote 222: Not printed.—G.]
[Footnote 223: Done, September, 1902.—G.]
[Footnote 224: See No. 19.]
[Footnote 225: Vide No. 12.]
[Footnote 226: According to Junker’s map (Gotha, J. Perthes, 1888).]
[Footnote 227: Not printed here, but text may be found in Hertslet’s “Map of Africa by Treaty,” 1896 Edition, pp. 20 to 47, and pp. 48 to 106 respectively.]
=APPENDIX B.=
* * * * *
THE SUDD.
[Sidenote: General description. (Editor.)]
The “sudd” (in Arabic sadd = block) is a generic name by custom applied to the huge marshes through which the Bahr El Jebel, Bahr El Ghazal, Bahr El Zeraf and the lower portion of their tributaries wind their way. It forms an irregular triangle of which the northern base extends about 200 miles west from the mouth of the Bahr El Zeraf, and the southern apex lies about Bor, 250 miles S.S.E. of Lake No. It is difficult to estimate the area of these vast marshes, but it cannot be much less than 35,000 square miles.
These marshes are formed by the expansion of the rivers mentioned over this area, and probably represent the bed of an old prehistoric lake which has to a certain extent dried up. The theory has been put forward that in those far-off days a ridge about Kodok, subsequently broken through by the river, caused the holding-up of waters in this lake, but this is hardly the place to examine this theory in detail.
Suffice it to say that a great part of this area is covered with a shallow sheet of water, over almost the whole extent of which thick reeds and swamp-grasses have sprung up. Except in the actual river channels this water is probably nowhere more than 2 to 6 feet deep.
[Sidenote: Scenery.]
[Sidenote: Animal life.]
To the eye the effect is one of a vast extent of brilliant green papyrus, feathery reeds and sword-grass, 5 to 15 feet above the water, broken by occasional patches of light ambach trees, with channels of water, pools and lagoons dotting the “swamp-scape,” and here and there a sparse tree or two on the horizon. Occasionally, and more especially towards the south, ridges, or patches of mud or solid ground are visible, and in such parts there is much bird and animal life. In the lower (northern) reaches of the Sudd nearly all signs of life—except the brilliant little bee-eater, an occasional heron, fish-eagle, or “anvil bird,” the ubiquitous crocodile, and, of course, the insects—disappear; but in the more southerly parts are found many varieties of game.
[Sidenote: Inhabitants.]
On the Bahr El Jebel, for the first 150 miles south of Lake No there are no human inhabitants visible. Thereafter occasional Dinkas and their villages are seen up to about Bor (384 miles); whilst beyond this the Bari country commences, the population as the Lado Enclave is approached being considerably thicker on the east than on the west bank. The Bahr el Ghazal swamps and banks are almost uninhabited.
Of the larger species of game, elephant, giraffe, buffalo, and many sorts of antelope, including waterbuck, Leucotis, Cobus Maria, etc., etc., are seen towards the south, whilst the hippopotamus is excessively numerous almost throughout.[228] From the reeds and mudbanks arise clouds of wildfowl, crane, geese, (black and white, and brown), storks (saddleback, black, open-billed and marabou), herons (white, grey, egret, purple, “squacco,” and “Goliath”), bustard, and the quaint balaeniceps rex (whale-headed stork), besides pelican, spoonbill, ibis, and duck of every description; and of insect life the supply is unnecessarily large throughout. This latter includes several varieties of persistent and poisonous mosquitos (from the large scarlet one to the tiny anopheles), the trumpet-headed sudd insect and other kindred grasshopper-like creatures, millions of midges and mayflies, the serût fly, moths, spiders, fireflies, etc., etc. The sudd also swarms with coarse fish, some running to a considerable size.
[Sidenote: The true Sudd.]
Some confusion has been caused by the word “sudd” being applied to the whole of these marshes. As a matter of fact, the real sudd is only the obstructive floating vegetation, originated in the lagoons as described below, which is driven by force of circumstances into the river channels and there forms the block or sudd. By far the greater portion of the marshes are covered by standing reeds, papyrus and the like, which, although they cover and assist in the formation of the floating vegetation and even, when uprooted, form part of it, yet are not, strictly speaking, sudd in their original state.
Thus, the traveller who proceeds along the cleared channel from Lake No to Gondokoro will, in all probability, although in the middle of the “sudd,” see little, if any, genuine sudd at all.
[Sidenote: Formation of Sudd. (Sir W. Garstin.)]
In the Bahr El Jebel the main factors in forming sudd are the papyrus and the “um sûf.” These two, with the earth adhering to their roots, form the real obstruction. Many of the smaller swimming plants, such as the “Azolla” the “Utricularia” and the “Otellia Vallisneria” are mingled with the others, but they certainly do not play an important part in the formation of the obstacle. The ambach, too, has been unjustly accused of assisting in forming this barrier. This is not the case. This plant does not grow in any great quantity in the vicinity of the Bahr El Jebel, and its stem is so light and brittle that it would break when subjected to great pressure.
On the Bahr El Ghazal, on the contrary, the sudd is chiefly composed of the swimming plants above-mentioned. Their breeding places are Lake Ambadi and the other shallow lakes to the south.
The Ghazal sudd is much lighter in texture than that of the Jebel, and is consequently much easier to remove. At the same time, even in the former river, the sudd is at times dangerous, especially if it forms down-stream of a vessel, and if the latter has to work upon it from its up-stream end. The accident to Gessi Pasha’s expedition in 1880 proves that even the Bahr El Ghazal sudd can be an impassable obstacle under such circumstances.
Before alluding to the work done in removing the sudd, it may be as well to say a few words as to the principal causes of this remarkable barrier.
The Bahr El Jebel traverses the marshes between Bor and Lake No for some 380 miles of its course. South of Shambe the river has never been known to be blocked. On either side of the channel, in these immense swamps, extend large shallow lagoons, some of them covering a square mile or more of area. These lagoons are surrounded on every side by a luxuriant growth of aquatic plants, consisting chiefly of the papyrus and the grass known to the Arabs as the “um sûf” (the mother of wool). Both these plants grow in water, but not in any great depth. The papyrus attains a height of from 15 to 20 feet, with fibrous roots which strike deep into the ground. The “um sûf” rarely exceeds 5 feet in height, and its roots do not extend so deeply as do those of the papyrus. They are, however, very tough and difficult to break or cut through. These roots are bedded in the soil below the water, but the strong gales which blow in these regions loosen their hold to a large extent. If such a storm be accompanied by any rise of the water surface, large masses of these plants are set free from their original position, and begin to float on the surface of the lagoons. Their roots form such a tangled mass that large quantities of the earth in which they are embedded remain clinging to them. These act as ballast, and when the island of papyrus or reeds is detached and, under the influence of the wind, is set drifting about the lagoon, the weight of the earth retains the plants in their vertical position. Their roots, the moment they reach a shallow, act as anchors, and speedily strike down again into the muddy bottom of the lake. Large masses constantly change their position in this way. If the storm cease, they remain where they are. Unfortunately, at the commencement and end of the rainy season, stormy weather is the rule rather than the exception. At such seasons large areas of the marsh vegetation are in motion, driven hither and thither by the wind.
The Bahr El Jebel, where it passes through the swamps, has no banks whatever, and is, as a rule, separated from the lagoons merely by a narrow belt of papyrus. In many places it is in connection with them, and the water of the lakes flows in and out of the river, according to the level of the latter. As the stormy season in these latitudes heralds the approach of the annual rains, the rise of the river follows very speedily. The channel of the Bahr El Jebel being only of sufficient section to carry the low water supply, with the first rise in the levels the river spreads over the marshes, flooding them in all directions, and increasing the depth of water in the lagoons. It thus causes the areas of reed, already detached by the wind, to float still more easily. The continuous gales which prevail set hundreds of acres of these floating masses moving in one direction. Eventually they reach a point on the river where they are forced into the channel. Once there the current speedily carries them down-stream. Ere long their course is arrested by a projection on the edge of the channel or by a sharp bend. It may happen that an area of reed, several acres in extent, bursts into the river in a large sheet, and in such a case it must be necessarily arrested at the first point where the section is contracted. The result is that the channel is quickly blocked, though, perhaps, not at first to any great depth. Masses of weed, however, follow one another in succession, brought down by the stream. The section of the channel being reduced by the first obstruction, the velocity of the water rapidly increases, and these masses, following the easiest course, pass under the obstacle thus created. Each fresh mass arriving is sucked underneath those originally arrested, until at last the whole becomes wedged into one solid block, composed partly of earth and partly of stalks and roots of papyrus and reed, broken up by the extreme compression into an inextricable tangle. So great is the pressure applied by the water, that the surface of the block is often forced several yards above the water-level and is seamed by alternate ridges and furrows. The thickness varies greatly, according to the conditions and sections of the channel. In some cases it is not more than 4 to 6 feet, but it not infrequently obtains a thickness of 16 feet, below water, and occasionally as much as 22 feet have been observed.[229] Underneath this bar the river manages to force an outlet, but with a velocity increased proportionately to the smallness of the aperture. At the same time, the up-stream level rises, flooding the marshes in every direction, the water making use of any side channel that it can find. In time, doubtless, if left to itself, it would desert its original course, and the stream would take an entirely new direction, the original channel becoming permanently blocked. It generally, however, happens from natural causes, such as strong winds or increased heading-up of the water, that these blocks burst, and the obstacle is carried away. On such occasions a great wave passes down the channel, carrying everything before it, and sweeping away any similar blocks which may have been formed down-stream. Only in this way can the clearance of the sudd in certain years which has undoubtedly occurred be explained. Many of these blocks extend for a considerable length, some being as much as several miles long. It is easy to understand that such closures of the river channel cause not only a complete bar to navigation, but also a very serious obstacle to the free passage of the water. More than this, each block thus formed assists in the formation of others, by raising the water level up-stream, and thus assisting the flotation of further areas of papyrus and reed, much of which eventually finds its way into the river.
The movement of these great masses of weed, and the way in which they burst into the river, bears a striking resemblance to the descriptions given of an icefield when in motion. Their steady and resistless movement, the manner in which the fields break up, and the way in which they pile upon one another when an obstruction is encountered to their course, recall irresistibly what travellers relate of the action of the ice-floes when the pack is breaking up.
The sudd in this river, and in a less degree that in the Bahr El Ghazal, constitutes a very real danger to navigation. Should a steamer happen to be surrounded by it when in motion, the compression would certainly strain her framework to the risk of crushing it. Even should she escape this she will most probably be imprisoned for an indefinite time, owing to the river blocking on either side of her. During the stormy season, it should if possible always be arranged that two steamers should work in conjunction, one remaining down-stream, so as to be able to go to the assistance of the other if necessary.
As no fuel is to be met with throughout the whole length of the sudd region, a solitary steamer, if detained for some time by a block, may find herself eventually prevented from proceeding, or from making any attempt to free herself, owing to the absence of any means of generating steam in her boilers.
The Bahr El Ghazal sudd is, as has been said, of a different kind to that of the Bahr El Jebel. It is, as a rule, much lighter in consistency and easier to remove. This is doubtless due to the fact that the velocity of this river is very low, and, consequently, the pressure exerted by the water upon a block is small compared with that caused by similar conditions in the Bahr El Jebel. Again, on the Bahr El Ghazal, the papyrus and reeds do not extend on either side to any distance, nor are continuous and large lagoons close at hand. Between miles 42 and 52, up-stream of the junction with the Khor Deleib, there must, it is true, be always a risk of a block. In this reach the river passes through papyrus swamps, which are miniature editions of the Jebel marshes. Even here, however, the obstruction can hardly attain to the same solidity as in the case of the Jebel sudd, as the sluggish current of the Ghazal would fail to wedge the mass between the banks as tightly as would the rapid stream of the other river. Lake Ambadi appears to be a great nursery for the smaller varieties of the sudd plants. In the beginning of the rainy season these are carried down-stream and, as the channel wanders and twists, they form small obstructions. None of these, however, appear to be lasting, and it is rare that the Ghazal river is blocked for any length of time. It may be closed for a few months and then re-open itself. Thus in March and April, 1900, it was clear throughout its entire length, while in September of the same year it was blocked in more than one place. On this river, as on the Jebel, the sudd frequently sinks to the bottom, and decomposes, gradually raising the bed of the river. In this state it is very hard to remove.
[Sidenote: Botanical Composition.]
The sudd-forming plants may be classed in three divisions.[230]
The first, which contains plants whose roots descend to the river bed, is chiefly composed of the papyrus (Cyperus Papyrus), the common reed or “Bus” (Phragmites communis), and the feathery-headed grass (Saccharum Spontaneum).
The second kind is composed entirely of plants whose roots are in the water, but do not strike down to the ground or bed of river. The principal plant in this class is the “Um sûf” (Panicum pyramidale), grass, so called by the Arabs (“Mother of wool”) on account of the irritant hairs found on its leaf-sheaths which adhere to the skin of anyone touching them. In addition to the above, the wild bean (Vigna Nilotica) and creepers with purple flowers (Ipomœa) are found in profusion.
The third or last class of sudd is composed entirely of plants which swim upon the surface of the water. These form the cementing medium which binds the first two classes together.
The following are the principal components of this class:—
Pistia, a small cabbage-like plant with bright green leaves. Azolla, resembling moss in texture. Utricularia, Aldrovandia and Ceratophyllum, all resembling feathery floating streamers. The first variety has a series of small bulbs, like floats, attached to each streamer. The last is common in the canals and drains of Lower Egypt.
Otellia, a plant with big leaves and a white flower like a lily.[231] It is found everywhere in this class of sudd, and is met with at Damietta, where it is called by the Arabs “Lughmet el Kadi,” or the “Kadi’s pudding.”
In and among the above the blue-flowered creeper (Commellaria) is found.
[Sidenote: Detail. (Mr. Broun.)]
Regarding the detail of the formation, the first point of interest is that all the most important sudd plants propagate themselves by means of tubular rhizomes which run along the surface of the water giving out shoots from point to point. These shoots, after developing, give out other runners which cross the others and weave themselves into them, a further consolidation being given by twiners which bind them all together.
[Sidenote: Chief sudd plants.]
The most important sudd plants are, without doubt, Papyrus, “Um sûf” (Panicum pyramidale), and “Bus” (Phragmites communis).
“Um sûf” is probably the greatest source of blocks in the river courses, as it seems to thrive in deeper water than either the “Papyrus” or “Bus.” But all these give out long rhizomes. Those of the “Bus,” which is a very tall reed, extend sometimes quite 20 yards from the parent plants. These rhizomes either break away when the new shoots have developed and go to form new colonies elsewhere, or they are driven by the side of the others and gradually encroach on the river.
Among the climbers which bind the new growth (as well as the old) together, the principal are three kinds of Ipomœa, one vine and a leguminous twiner Vigna Nilotica. One of the Ipomœas (I. Reptans) deserves special mention, as it is not only a twiner, but possesses also tubular rhizomes, which enable it to float along the rhizomes of Papyrus, “Bus,” or “Um sûf,” and to knit them together as soon as they give out shoots. Among other plants which have also hollow stems are Jussiæa diffusa, which is also supplied with bunches of spine-shaped floats, and Polygonum tomentosum.
When all these floating masses are being tied together by the twiners the river brings down other plants as a packing to fill the interstices. The most common is Pistia Stratiotes, but there is also a constant supply of Ceratophyllum, Utricularia, Vallisneria and other plants of the same family; also Trapa bispinosa (the water-nut), Potomogetum, Azolla, etc. Little nooks are thus enclosed by runners from the Bus reed, the interior spaces of which are crammed with smaller plants.
It appears wonderful that with all this enormous mass of vegetation growing in these vast swamps in which no traces of human habitations can be seen, the natural decay of the plants does not gradually raise the level of the soil and force the water to keep to well-defined channels which, with the greater volume of water which they would contain would soon force for themselves a less winding course than they now follow.
[Sidenote: Action of fires.]
It appears that one of the chief causes of continuation of the old order of things is fire. Sparsely inhabited as the swamps are, they are swept through from end to end by fierce fires which carry everything before them and kill nearly all the trees which attempt to gain a footing. Here and there a few Kakamut, Dôm, Deleib, Dabka or Talh have managed to spring up, but they are so scattered that they do not count. The papyrus and reeds, instead of dying a natural death and forming soil by decay, are burnt down, and what of the ashes is not blown away by the wind is carried away by the next flood. Were it not for these fires it is probable that trees of the species mentioned above would spring out more abundantly, and it would not be a difficult matter to define the banks of the channel by plantations of these or other river-side trees, such as are to be found in Ceylon, for example, lining the river, e.g., Terminalis glabra, Vitex Leucoxylon, Vateria acuminata.
[Sidenote: Recent history of blocks and sudd-cutting. (Various.)]
In 1863, 1864, and 1868, heavy sudds blocked the Bahr El Jebel, and in the first mentioned year they extend to the north of Lake No.
In 1870, Sir Samuel Baker found the Bahr El Jebel closed with sudd at its mouth in Lake No. He attempted to ascend the Bahr El Zeraf but failed to reach the Upper Nile, and was obliged to return.
In 1871 he ascended the Bahr El Zeraf, and eventually forced his way into the main river near Shambe, literally lifting his boats and steamer over the intervening swamps and shallows.
In 1872 both the Bahr El Jebel and Bahr El Zeraf were closed, and in 1874 Ismail Pasha Ayub cleared away the sudd in the former river.
In 1878 Emin Pasha found it impossible to ascend the Bahr El Jebel from the south.
In 1879 and 1880 Marno (an Austrian) cleared the Bahr El Jebel of obstruction, completing his work in April, 1880.
In this same year Gessi Pasha undertook his disastrous journey in the Bahr El Ghazal, his steamer being blocked in that river for many weeks, and his expedition only being extricated by the timely arrival of another steamer under Marno, not, however, before he had lost many men.
In 1881 and 1884 the Bahr El Jebel was again closed by the sudd. During the period of Dervish rule nothing detailed was known regarding the state of the river, but in 1895 it was reported to the Intelligence Department that the White Nile was closed by the sudd. During this period the steamer “Mansurah” sank in the main channel in what is now known as the 15th block. The steamer was discovered during the Sudd operations of 1903-04.
As soon as possible after the battle of Omdurman (2nd September, 1898) steamers were sent up-stream to investigate. Major M. Peake attempted (7th October, 1898) to penetrate the Bahr El Jebel, but in vain. He steamed, however, up the Bahr El Ghazal nearly as far as Meshra el Rek. With Major Stanton he shortly afterwards steamed 157 miles up the Bahr El Zeraf, and was then stopped by shallow water.
In the following year, after a visit by Sir W. Garstin and Lt.-Col. Sparkes in the spring, operations for clearing the Bahr El Jebel were seriously undertaken, and Major Peake left Omdurman at the head of an expedition on 16th December, 1899. The party consisted of five gunboats, five English and some Egyptian officers, some British N.C.O.’s, 100 Sudanese, and a gang of 800 Dervish prisoners.
By the 27th March 1900, by means of hard and continuous labour, 14 blocks had been cleared out of 19, opening up 82 miles of river. Major Peake then avoided the remaining blocks by using side channels, arrived at Shambe, 25th April, 1900, and proceeded in clear water to Rejaf (5th May, 1900). Four (16th to 19th) out of the remaining five blocks were cleared by Lieutenant Drury, R.N., in January, 1901, and only the last one, the 15th, 22 miles long, and just south of Hellet El Nuer, still remained. It was considered, however, desirable to make renewed efforts to clear this block. Accordingly an expedition under the direction of Major G. E. Matthews was sent up in the winter of 1901-02, but did not succeed in completely opening the channel. The work of clearing this block was vastly increased owing to the entire absence of current. Nothing was done in 1902-03, but in 1903-04 Lieutenant Drury, late R.N., was again sent to renew the clearing operations. Practically no traces of Major Matthews’ work were discernible, and when, after dogged perseverance, the accomplishment of the task was well in sight the work had to be again reluctantly abandoned.
The false channel now in use is still liable to slight sudd-blocks, especially from April to June. A monthly steamer and other craft, however, keep the fairway open, as a ride, merely by their passage, and there is little or no danger of the channel being seriously blocked again.
[Sidenote: Method of clearing.]
The following was the method employed by Major Peake in clearing the sudd:—
The first operation was to cut and burn the whole of the vegetation growing on the surface; this was done by a party of men with swords, fasses,[232] and axes. Immediately this was done the line to be taken up for the first channel, generally about 12 yards in length, was marked out; this was trenched by the Dervish prisoners armed with fasses, picks, axes and saws, into pieces 4 yards square. After cutting down about 1 foot from the surface the water infiltrated; the men continued cutting until, owing to the depth of the water, they were unable to get any deeper. Holdfasts of telegraph poles were then driven as far as they would go around the edge of each piece. After this a 1½ inch flexible steel wire hawser was sunk as deep as it would go by means of the pronged poles, all round the piece to be removed; the ends of it were made fast to the bullards in the bow of the gunboat, one on the starboard side and one on the port, leaving sufficient slack wire to allow the steamer to go astern some 20 to 30 yards before she got the strain; “full speed astern” was then ordered. Full speed was kept up continually if the piece showed any sign of becoming detached until it came gradually away; as soon as the piece was quite clear, one end of the hawser was cast off and the piece was allowed to float down the stream; the holdfasts were pulled out by means of a rope, one end of which was made fast to the bow of the steamer, and the other by a hitch to the end of the holdfast. If the piece showed no signs of coming away, the engines were reversed and the steamer was brought close up to the sudd and then went astern again. This was repeated again and again until the piece was detached. Some pieces were known to take as much as two hours to get away. Sometimes with very thin sudd, after it had been trenched, the steamer would be run up with her bow on to the sudd, and on going astern would carry the piece with her; also with light sudd a grapnel anchor fixed to the steamer when going astern was found sufficient to tear away the piece.
Very often the sudd will be found with its roots adhering to the bottom; this is especially the case in a year when there is a very low Nile, like 1899-1900, or close up to the banks, when the first leading channel is being widened.
In this case a grapnel or ordinary anchor sunk to the bottom of the river and then dragged along by the steamer is useful. As soon as the leading steamer has opened up the channel a sufficient length to enable her not to interfere with a steamer working behind her, another steamer is put to work, the same way as the first, to widen the channel. This is generally laborious work, as there is not much current to act on the sudd, and in consequence it takes longer to get it away.
In cutting the trenches care should be taken to cut or saw through all roots.
(For further details of the sudd, see H.B.S., pp. 4 and 207 to 213 inclusive (Dr. Junker’s account); Sir W. Garstin’s invaluable reports (Egypt Blue Books No. 5 of 1899, pp. 15 to 19, No. 2 of 1901, pp. 34 to 43, and No. 2 of 1904); Major Peake’s Reports, 1900; and Mr. Broun’s Note, 27.4.03—from all of which, besides some original work by the Editor, the above description has been compiled.)
[Footnote 228: The writer counted 72 in one lagoon at Shambe.]
[Footnote 229: Such blocks are so solid that elephants have been seen to walk on them.]
[Footnote 230: The Director of Forests, Mr. A. Broun, does not agree with the classification, or all the details, &c., given. He has not found the feathery-headed grass, and states that the Um sûf would not, in any case, come in the second class.—Ed.]
[Footnote 231: Query Boottia Scabra or Nymphaea Lotus?—A. B.]
[Footnote 232: Native hoes.]
=APPENDIX C.=
* * * * *
ZOOLOGY OF THE SUDAN.
ZOOLOGY.
In preparing the following notes on the Zoology of the country, it has been assumed that the Mammals and Birds will present the most general interest. The variety and distribution of the large “game” animals has been briefly sketched, and, to make space for this, reference to the Invertebrate animals has been omitted.
MAMMALS.
[Sidenote: Primates.]
Apes and Monkeys are well represented in the Sudan. The Chimpanzee (Anthropopithecus troglodytes schweinfurthi) occurs in the Bahr el Ghazal region, where also is found the beautiful black and white fur-bearing Colobus guereza; Baboons (Papio hamadryas and P. anubis), Grivet (Cercopithecus sabæus) and Patas Monkeys (C. patas) abound and are widely distributed. Lemurs (Galago) occur, but are seldom met with.
[Sidenote: Carnivora.]
The Lion is found wherever the country is suited to its habits, and is in places plentiful. In 1880, one was seen half-way between Berber and Suakin, but at the present time it ranges little further north in the Sudan than Kassala. The Leopard, commoner than the Lion, but warier and less often seen, is even more widely distributed; the Cheetah or Hunting Leopard (Cynælurus jubatus) less so. Among smaller felines are the Serval, Caracal and Libyan Cat (Felis serval, F. caracal and F. libyca).
Hyænas, spotted and striped (H. crocuta and H. striata) are common; much rarer and more local is the Hyæna-like, but smaller, Aard Wolf (Proteles cristatus).
Jackals, Foxes and Fennecs are abundant; the Wild Dog (Lycaon pictus) is scarcer.
Smaller carnivora are Civets, Genets, the Mongoose, the Ratel, and the pretty little black-and-white Zorillas, which in coloration remind one of the American Skunks.
[Sidenote: Insectivora.]
The Insectivora are represented by Hedgehogs and Shrews (Erinaceus and Crocidura).
Bats (Chiroptera) are plentiful.
[Sidenote: Rodentia.]
Rodents (Rodentia) are represented by the common Porcupine, Hares, Ground-Squirrels (Xerus), Rats, and the Jerboas and Gerbilles—curious little nocturnal creatures living in holes in the desert sands. They have long hind legs and tails, progress by leaps like miniature kangaroos, are of a protective sandy coloration, and subsist entirely without water.
[Sidenote: Ungulata.]
Much the most interesting to the general traveller and sportsman are the Ungulata or hoofed animals, and in this “big game” the Sudan is particularly rich.
The Elephant is found on the Setit (from which during the Kharif or rainy season it ranges as far north as the Gash), the Upper Atbara, the Rahad, the Dinder, and the Blue Nile; it ranges across the Gezira in smaller numbers and becomes more plentiful again along the Upper Sobat, Pibor, the Bahr-el-Jebel, in the Bahr-el-Ghazal Province, along and west of the Bahr-el-Arab as far north as Kalaka. The ivory from these southern swampy districts is much larger than that from the Blue Nile and Abyssinian frontier—tusks running up to 130 lbs. or so in weight—but it is not of quite as good quality. No organized effort to capture and train adult African elephants has been made in modern times, and attempts to rear the young on cow’s or goat’s milk or farinaceous substitutes have generally failed.
The Black Rhinoceros (R. bicornis) was found as far north as the Gash in 1880; a very few still remain on the Setit, the Rahad, Dinder and Blue Nile; on the Bahr-el-Jebel, in the Bahr-el-Ghazal Province, and on the Bahr-el-Arab it is less scarce, while there is some reason to believe that in this last-named tract of country the White Rhinoceros (R. Simus) is not yet extinct. The destruction of Rhinoceroses in the Sudan is absolutely prohibited.
A curious little animal somewhat doubtfully placed by naturalists near the Rhinoceroses is the Hyrax, a small animal, in shape somewhat resembling a guinea-pig, which inhabits rocky hills in many parts of the Sudan.
The Wild Ass is found in some of the Eastern deserts; while Zebras (probably Grant’s Zebra) just extend into Sudan territory north of Gondokoro on both banks of the Bahr El Jebel.
Buffalo—the shorter-horned northern form (Bos caffer equinoctialis) are numerous in suitable localities, and appear to be holding their own; their distribution is roughly the same as that given for the Elephant.
Of Hartebeests, Bubalis tora is common on the Setit, the Upper Atbara and the Blue Nile tributaries; Bubalis jacksoni takes its place on the White Nile, Bahr-el-Ghazal and in S.W. Kordofan; a much scarcer and more local species, apparently Bubas Neumanni has been found on the White Nile near J. Ahmed Agha. The Tiang[233] or Bastard Hartebeest (Damaliscus tiang) is abundant in the Gezira, and in the southern and western parts of the Sudan; on the eastern side of the country it does not range north of the Dinder.
The Water-buck (Cobus defassa) is generally distributed where water and grazing are to be found; the beautiful Mrs. Gray’s Water-buck (C. maria)—the males of which are marked with a snow-white patch on the withers—is one of the most local of African Antelopes, inhabiting only the swamps of the Bahr-el-Ghazal and Bahr-el-Jebel.
The White-eared Cob (C. leucotis), commencing near Renk, follows the White Nile upwards, increasing in abundance in the Bahr-el-Ghazal, occurring also on the Sobat and the Pibor, and extending along the Bahr-el-Jebel into Uganda. On this last river the Uganda Cob (C. thomasi) has been shot.
The Roan Antelope (Hippotragus equinus bakeri) is locally distributed from the Setit to the south-west of the Sudan; the Blue Nile tributaries are perhaps the chief stronghold of this noble beast.
The Oryx leucoryx is plentiful in Western Kordofan; the Oryx beisa occurs in one or two localities east of the Atbara. The Addax ranges into the deserts of the Western Sudan, but very few have yet been shot by any European.
The greater Kudu (Strepsiceros capensis) is one of the scarcer Antelopes in the Sudan, occurring locally in Kordofan, and from the Blue Nile to the neighbourhood of Suakin.
The largest known form of Eland (the Taurotragus oryx gigas of Von Heuglin) is found in the Bahr-el-Ghazal Province.
The Lesser Reedbuck (Cervicapra bohor) occurs on both the Blue and White Niles and their tributaries, the Blue Nile examples carrying the finest heads. The Bushbuck of the White Nile is Tragelaphus scriptus, the Blue Nile form being T. decula.
The commonest Gazelles of the Sudan are the Ariel, the Red-fronted, the Dorcas, and Isabelline Gazelles (Gazella sœmmeringi, G. rufifrons, G. dorcas, and G. isabella), widely distributed; more local are the Addra Gazelle[234] of Kordofan (G. ruficollis) and Heuglin’s Gazelle of the Setit (G. ptilonura). Smaller common Antelopes are the Duiker, Dig-dig, and Oribi (Cephalophus, Madoqua, and Ourebia).
The Klipspringer (Oreotragus saltator) is found sparingly on the hills of the Red Sea Littoral.
Ibex (Capra nubiana) frequent the rocky hills of the Kassala and Suakin districts; Wild Sheep (Ovis lervia) have a wider range, but are much scarcer and shier, and have not been recently shot in the Sudan.
Giraffes are in parts numerous, their range in the Sudan area being approximately that of the Elephant, except that they are absent from localities which are entirely swampy.
A few Hippopotami still remain as far north as Dongola, and a few are to be found near Khartoum. Up the White Nile and the Bahr-el-Ghazal they abound, to such an extent that in places they become dangerous or a positive nuisance.
Wart-hogs (Phacochærus) are common and widely spread; while the Sennar Boar (Sus sennarensis) has only been obtained, and very rarely, in this one district.
[Sidenote: Edentata.]
A scaly ant-eater (Manis) occurs, and also a curious ant-bear (Orycteropus æthiopicus), very similar to the “Aard Vaark” of the Cape.
[Sidenote: Cetacea.]
No Cetaceans have been found in the Sudan rivers.
BIRDS.
The Bird fauna of the Sudan is rich and interesting. Visitors will be most struck by the aquatic species whose abundance on the rivers forms one of the most pleasing features of the scenery. The practice of shooting at birds from steamers (forbidden by law, as is all trading in plumes) cannot be too strongly deprecated. This practice has within the last 30 years banished most of the bird-life from the Egyptian parts of the Nile for ever.
Most of the birds, which are summer visitors to Europe, winter in the Sudan, or pass through it on their way further south. Conspicuous among these winter visitors are Hoopoes, Golden Orioles, Bee-eaters, Shrikes, Warblers, Wagtails, Flycatchers, &c. Small resident species are abundant, the various kinds of Weaver-finches predominating in numbers and collecting in vast flights. Among this family the beautiful scarlet and black “Dura-bird” (Pyromelana franciscana) and the long-tailed Whydah Bird (Steganura paradisea) are specially noticeable. The handsome Glossy Starlings—characteristic African birds—are represented by the genera Spreo, Lamprocolius, and Lamprotornis. Several species of Nightjars occur, noteworthy among which is the remarkable Standard-Wing (Macrodipteryx), bearing a large racket-shaped web at the end of an elongated wire-like feather in each wing.
Colies, or “Mouse-birds,” Kingfishers, Hornbills (chief among which is the great black-and-white Bucorax abyssinicus), Bee-eaters, Rollers and Cuckoos are well represented, as also are Larks and Wheatears. Shining little Sun-birds frequent the forests and enter the gardens in the towns.
Green parrakeets are common, and the grey parrot may be found on the Uganda boundary.
Of birds of prey there are Vultures, Eagles, Falcons, Ospreys, Harriers, Buzzards, Hawks, and Owls in great variety—among which may be mentioned the Noisy River Eagle (Haliaetus vocifer), the Secretary Bird (Serpentarius secretarius), and the handsome Bateleur Eagle (Helotarsus ecaudatus).
The rivers abound with Pelicans, Cormorants, Darters, Herons, Egrets, Bitterns, Storks, Ibises, and Spoonbills. Among these the great carrion-feeding Adjutant or Marabou (Leptoptilus crumeniferus) is conspicuous. The remarkable and very local Whale-headed Stork (Balæniceps rex) is found in the swamps of the Bahr-el-Ghazal and Bahr-el-Jebel, while the stately Saddle-billed Stork (Ephippiorhynchus senegalensis)—iridescent black and white with long brilliantly-coloured bill—is more widely met with. Flamingoes are scarce; Spur-winged and Egyptian Geese, and Whistling Teal, resident and plentiful. Their numbers are swelled by large hosts of northern-breeding ducks, which arrive in the autumn and remain till the spring. Vast numbers of Plovers, Godwits, Whimbrels, Sandpipers, and Terns also winter on the Nile. Snipe occur, but in comparatively small numbers, the area of irrigated land being very limited, and the grasses of the Nile swamps being too high and thick for them.
Three species of Sandgrouse are very abundant; the commonest (Pterocles exustus) affords the best bird shooting in the country—in the dry season they daily flight in thousands from the deserts to drink at the rivers. Doves and Guinea-fowl swarm in most parts; Francolins are more local and less plentiful. Quail are also found in parts.
A large Bustard (Eupodotis arabis) is plentiful and gives pretty rifle shooting. Three or four smaller bustards also occur.
The strikingly-beautiful Crowned Crane (Balearica pavonina) is resident and common, and in the winter immense flights of Common Cranes (Grus grus) and smaller numbers of the Demoiselle (Grus virgo) spread over the country.
The Ostrich is generally distributed, but is most abundant in Western Kordofan.
REPTILES.
The common African Crocodile (Crocodilus niloticus) abounds in the Sudan rivers. Large Monitor Lizards or “Waranas,” reaching 5 or 6 feet in length, are not uncommon: among smaller lizards are various Chameleons, Geckoes, and Skinks.
Soft-backed river Turtles (Trionyx) are plentiful. A common land Tortoise is Testudo calcarata: a common aquatic Tortoise is Sternothærus adansoni.
Of snakes the largest is Python sebæ; of poisonous species the Cobra, the Horned Cerastes, and, further south, the Puff-Adder occur: harmless species are more numerous. On the whole, snakes in the Sudan are not plentiful enough to be troublesome, and the mortality due to snake-bite seems insignificant.
Batrachians are rather poorly represented: a Toad (Bufo regularis) very like the common European species is the most abundant.
FISH.
The Nile fish have recently been very thoroughly investigated, the collection formed by Mr. Loat, under the auspices of the Egyptian Government, being the largest ever brought together from one country.
Those interested in the subject may note that the scientific results of the “fish survey” will shortly be published in the form of a Monograph, by Mr. G. A. Boulenger.
[Briefly speaking, it may be said that the rivers swarm, almost throughout, with fish; they are mostly of a coarse kind, some running to an immense size—40 to 50 lbs. being quite an ordinary weight for some species.—NOTE BY EDITOR.]
[Footnote 233: Quite recently a closely allied, but rather larger species, Damaliscus korrigum, has been shot in the deserts of Western Kordofan. It was previously believed to be entirely a West African form. Herr Matschie had, in fact, recorded it from near Lake Victoria, but leading English naturalists seemed inclined to consider him mistaken. That it ranges as far east as Long. 30° is now definitely proved.]
[Footnote 234: This species has recently, in the Khartoum Gardens, for the first time bred in captivity.]
=APPENDIX D.=
* * * * *
THE ANTIQUITIES OF THE SUDAN.
(Vide also pp. 221-228.)
The three decades following the Egyptian conquest of the Sudan in 1819 were each marked by the appearance of a large work dealing with the antiquities of the newly-opened provinces. Unfortunately the authors of these works, Cailliaud, Hoskins, and Lepsius, have found no successors of equal means and perseverance, so that our knowledge of the actual remains stands about as Lepsius left it. When Cailliaud (1820) and Hoskins (1833) visited the Sudan, nothing certain was known of the ancient relations of Egypt and Ethiopia, and the wildest philological theories were in the air. The imposing monuments which these travellers found fitted the theories that Egyptian art was the oldest art known; Ethiopia was supposed by some to be the mother of Egypt; here, then, at Meroe, Hoskins fancied that he had found the cradle, not of Egypt only but of the whole civilised world. Criticism began with Lepsius (1842): the style of these remains convinced him that they were not the archaic parents of Egyptian art but the late offspring of a mésalliance between Egypt and the luxuriant South. The progress made since his day enables us to recognise more clearly the main lines of development, though it will require years of research to fill in the details of our picture.
In the following notes the antiquities are grouped for convenience into four divisions—the Prehistoric, the Egyptian, the Meroitic, and the Christian.
1. Prehistoric.—We know now that the dynastic culture of Egypt was developed at Abydos, Memphis and elsewhere, long before it reached the Sudan, but from the very earliest days desire for the products of the south must have attracted the trader and the soldier, and so carried the culture of Egypt ever further to the south. The ivory and the skulls found in pre-dynastic Egyptian tombs, and the dwarfs and black troops referred to in the Historical Summary, are sporadic witnesses to a coming and going along the Nile Valley which must have lasted for tens of thousands of years. What and whom the early travellers found we cannot say: the country was probably partitioned among a number of petty princelets like the Meleks whom Burckhardt describes as reigning in the provinces of Dongola and Berber in the eighteenth century, and some of the old forts reported in this region and in the desert may date back to this period. To this epoch possibly belong also some of the groups of tumuli visible between the 4th and the 6th cataracts and elsewhere, but of them only one,[235] of the Bronze Age, has been hitherto excavated. A closer study of the surface will doubtless bring to light vestiges of the Stone Age, as it has already done in Egypt and Somaliland.
2. Egyptian.—The first effective occupation of the northern parts of the Sudan dates from the Middle Empire, but though it is represented by several monuments noted in the list below, it did not last for long. The kings and queens of the New Empire returned to the conquest and exploration of the south, and left much more striking memorials of their greatness. The tablets found at Tel el Amarna are full of requests from Syrian princes for gold, which was exported to them unworked, and by them smelted and wrought into ornaments and vessels. Now the bulk of this gold came from the numerous mines which still exist between the Red Sea and the Nile; in a word the Northern Sudan was the “Rand” of the ancient world. The shafts and huts of the miners, their washing-tables, grinders, and other appliances are found still in situ, and the position of some of the finest temples is now seen to be determined by their nearness to rich auriferous regions. This is, perhaps, the most important discovery made since the days of Lepsius.
Under the eighteenth and nineteenth dynasties the Northern Sudan was an Egyptian province, an appanage often of the heir-apparent, and the monuments of this date (see below) are thoroughly Egyptian in character. Under the twenty-second dynasty the conditions were reversed and Egypt became an Ethiopian province; but, as is usual, the civilised power conquered its conqueror, and although Napata now reached its zenith, the character of buildings, statuary, and inscriptions, was not native but Egyptian; this was only natural, seeing that the Ethiopians could command the best workmen in Egypt. It is not until the sixth century B.C. that we begin to see signs of a change. The inscriptions of Heru-Sa-Atef and Nastasenen clearly betray the native origin of their authors; they were written in hieroglyphics by priests who aimed in vain at reproducing the old classical idiom of Thebes. Their last editor very aptly compares them to attempts of a Dongolawi to write Koranic Arabic.
3. Meroitic.—With the conquests of Alexander and his successors and the spread of the Roman Empire, Ethiopia was brought into touch with a wider system than any it had yet seen, and this Greco-Roman period coincides with the development of a complex original style, in which the African character seems to find its first articulate expression. Exact dates for the numerous monuments in this style cannot be given; some may go back before the time of Alexander, some of the most elaborate certainly fall late in the Roman period. The architectural forms of the latter show the gradual supersession of Egyptian conventions by European designs and construction, while the rich attire of the rulers portrayed bears witness not less to their barbaric taste than to the wealth which radiated under the Pax Romana even beyond the limits of the empire. In this mingling of East and West these works should be compared with those of other schools that arose under the shadow of the Roman Empire, such as the Palmyrene school in Syria and the Greco-Roman Buddhist school in the north-west of India.
The most characteristic works of this school are to be found in the Berber province. The pyramids (Bagarawiya) and the avenue of rams and the pylon-fronted temples (Nagaa and Wadi El Sufra) point back to Egyptian prototypes, but side by side with these we see temples where the pylons have given way to columns fluted and spaced in the fashion of a Roman peristyle shrine, and one small building which has even been described as a Christian basilica!
The Meroitic Pantheon is equally mixed: we pass from the Ammon of Thebes to the Ammon of Napata, and from him to a strange Ethiopian Serapis and a still stranger local or Indian lion-headed god.
The subjects are mostly, like those in Egypt, scenes of adoration or offerings of spoils of victory, but the persons sculptured are Egyptian neither in type nor costume. The best-known of these is the fat Queen “Candace,” whose very fleshly charms are set off by masses of jewellery, heavy necklaces, armlets, bracelets, sandals, and clinging feather-like garments. Her consorts and attendants are only less richly bedizened with jewels and rare stuffs, embroidered with crosses, crescents, “and other delights.” Other panels represent water goddesses and hunting scenes with wild beasts (lions, elephants, etc.), led in captivity by men and genii. The small objects found on these sites (now mostly at Munich and Berlin) give the same impression of barbaric wealth, and the relatively numerous bells show that the Ethiopian of those days was as fond of noise as his black successor.
Unfortunately the inscriptions which accompany these buildings cannot be deciphered. As we saw above, Egyptian was a foreign language to the people of Napata in the sixth century. On the Meroitic monuments not only is the language foreign, but new phonetic values have been given to the old hieroglyphic signs, which makes even transliteration impossible until more bilingual inscriptions turn up.[236] And these hieroglyphics persist until superseded by a script based on Egyptian demotic or perhaps some Arabian alphabet, which is equally unintelligible.
4. Christian.—The Christian antiquities have fared still worse at the hands of explorers than the earlier ones; the traveller notes “ruins of a Coptic convent” and hurries on to something more congenial. Lepsius collected a few inscriptions, and these have been supplemented from time to time; a few things have been found at Soba and rough sketches published of one or two churches.
The most interesting building known to the writer is the church at Old Dongola, a building in two storeys of burnt bricks, subsequently encased in a thick shell of sun-dried bricks. The ground plan of this is believed to be unique: it looks like an adaptation to Christian ends of old Egyptian structural motives. This building and the ruin-heaps into which many other churches—still called Kanisas by the natives—have been reduced, show that all the lessons of construction learnt under the Roman Empire were not forgotten under the rule of the Christian kings. The pottery of this period was, so far as one can judge from fragments still lying on the surface, more finely levigated, better baked, and more variously decorated than in earlier or later days.
Inscriptions in three languages have been found. At Soba, and perhaps at Geteina (White Nile), Christian inscriptions occur in an unknown language, but in the Greek alphabet eked out by five additional letters; from the Dongola province and from Northern Nubia come inscriptions in Greek and in Coptic. Some of these are dated in the eighth and ninth centuries A.D., and the formulæ used in them are similar to those found in Egypt.
* * * * *
The list of ancient sites, etc., appended does not pretend to be complete. Those who wish for further information are referred to the following authorities, which may be supplemented from the bibliography; but they must remember that the study of these antiquities is still in its infancy.
[Sidenote: Authorities.]
(1.) Discoveries.—Cailliaud, “Voyage à Méroé,” Paris, 1826; Hoskins, “Travels in Ethiopia,” London, 1833; Lepsius, “Denkmäler,” Berlin, 1842, etc.
(2.) Special Memoirs.—Ferlini, “Relation Historique,” 1838; Maspero, “Études de Mythologie et d’Archéologie Egyptiennes,” III, Paris, 1898; Heinrich Schäfer, “Die Aetiopische Königsinschrift des Berliner Museums,” Leipzig, 1901.
(3.) Much valuable information may be obtained also from the large histories of Egypt by Maspero, Budge, and Petrie, and from the handbooks published by Murray, Bædeker, and Cook (“The Nile,” by Dr. Budge). Illustrations and slight descriptions of some of the antiquities have been published by J. Ward in the “Monthly Review” for August, 1902, and May, 1903, and of the gold mines in the prospectuses issued by the companies prospecting.
Space does not suffice to give details of all the antiquities: a bare list must suffice. The initials given below are as follows:—Murray’s Handbook of Egypt, 1900 (M.); Dr. Budge’s “The Nile,” 1901 (B.N.); Lepsius “Denkmäler,” 1842 (L.); Cailliaud’s “Voyage à Méroé, 1820” (C.); Rawlinson’s Egypt (Story of the Nation Series) (R.); Dr. Budge’s “A History of Egypt,” 1902 (B.E.); Hoskins, 1833; J. Ward (articles in “Monthly Review,” August, 1902, and May, 1903, with illustrations) (W.).
Antiquities on or near the Nile Banks.
About 2 miles above Halfa, on the west bank, is an ancient Egyptian site with several temples.
[Sidenote: Abu Sir.]
Five and a half miles above the same town, on the west bank, is the rock of Abu Sir. The chief historical interest of this spot (from which a fine view of the 2nd Cataract is obtained) is the variety of names inscribed on it, reaching back several hundred years.
[Sidenote: Matuka. B.C. 2760? or 2430?]
Three miles south of Abu Sir are remains of the fortress and small temple of Matuka, built by Usertsen I of the Twelfth Dynasty.
On a large island opposite are the remains of a similar fortress and on another small island to the south are the ruins of a Coptic church called Darbe (M. 983)
[Sidenote: Semna and Kumma. B.C. 2320? B.C. 1600? B.C. 2300.]
Forty-three miles south of Halfa are the fortress temples of Semna and Kumma, built by Usertsen III. Rebuilt and extended by Thothmes III of the Eighteenth Dynasty. In good preservation. Amenemhat III also marked the rise of the Nile here (B.N. 489, 490; B.E. iii, 46, 48, etc., iv, 94, vi, 187, and vide p. 222).
[Sidenote: Amara. B.C. 1000?]
At Amara are important ruins of a temple with sculptured columns (L.; B.N. 491).
At Selima Oasis, 55 miles west of Sagiet El Abd, are remains of old convents, built out of still older remains, on which there are unknown inscriptions. (Vide p. 203.)
[Sidenote: Sai. B.C. 1660-1600?]
At Sai Island, 130 miles from Halfa, are remains of a town and Coptic church, and of cemeteries, also of a temple with inscriptions of Thothmes III and Amenhotep I (Eighteenth Dynasty).
[Sidenote: Sedinga. B.C. 1800.]
At Sedinga, 6 miles further, are the ruins of a fine temple by Amenhotep III, a column and a cemetery (B.E. iv, 111).
[Sidenote: J. Dush. B.C. 1620?]
Six miles to the south is Jebel Dush, with a tomb contemporary with Thothmes III (B.N. 402).
[Sidenote: Solib. B.C. 1500.]
A mile further on is Solib, with the well-preserved remains of a magnificent temple by Amenophis III (L.; B.N. 492; B.E. iv, 59, etc.; Hoskins, etc.). Many treasures removed to Jebel Barkal.
[Sidenote: Sesebi. B.C. 1370 or 1275?]
Sesebi, opposite Dalgo, contains a ruined temple by Seti I, father of Rameses the Great. (L.; B.E. v, 9.)
In the district between Dalgo and Koya are several ancient workings for gold and copper, which account for the presence of rich temples near.
[Sidenote: Tombos.]
On the Island of Tombos, near Kerma, are granite quarries and one statue unfinished.
[Sidenote: Argo.]
On the Island of Argo (Arkaw) are ruins of a temple and of two granite statues lying on the ground (about 24 feet long, including pedestal), of Sebekhotep III, of the Thirteenth Dynasty, or else, more probably, of the Napata period.
[Sidenote: Karman.]
Near Argo, on the right bank at Karman are the ruins of a large town, and two large mud-brick tombs (B.N. 493, and L.), called Dafufa and Karman.
Six or seven miles south of New Dongola, on the right bank at a place named Kawa, is a delicate little Egyptian temple, date unknown, in good preservation. (Discovered and partially excavated by Colonel Hon. J. Colborne, 1885.)
Khandak marks the site of an ancient Egyptian town of which traces may be seen in the citadel.
South of Khandak are traces of Christian or older sites at Firgi and Khalewa on the west bank (Greek inscriptions have come from the latter), and on the east bank at Amentogo, Arab Hag (inscription from obelisk set up in Napata (?) by Piankhi) and a few miles east of Meganda, the last two in the Latte.
[Sidenote: Old Dongola.]
Old Dongola, now almost deserted, was the capital of the Christian kingdom of Dongola in the sixth century.
The upper floor of the fine church there is now used as a mosque. On a ridge between the church and the river are remains of ancient fortification. An obelisk of Piankhi, now at Cairo, the fellow to that at Arab Hag, was found here, but had been probably carried from Jebel Barkal. Some Christian inscriptions have been found here (see “Journal of Theological Studies,” IV, p. 583).
[Sidenote: Kurru, Zuma, Tangasi.]
At Kurru and Zuma (east bank), and Tangasi, 7 to 10 miles from Merowe, are remains of large groups of pyramids (B.N. 496), a few of stone, others of mud-brick from which the stone casing has been removed.
On Gimeti Island are traces of a church.
[Sidenote: Merowe. B.C. 900 to B.C. 200.]
Merowe (north bank) and Abu Dom Sanam (south bank) mark the site of Napata (Nept or Nepita). The old city appears to have been on the south bank, and of considerable size (vide p. 222). A few miles from the river on this bank, in low hills, are the remains of a number of rock-hewn tombs, and 3 or 4 miles up-stream from Abu Dom, on the north bank, lie the pyramids and ruins of the temples of Napata.
[Sidenote: Jebel Barkal.]
Jebel Barkal, 302 feet high, the “Holy Mountain” of the inscriptions, can be seen for many miles round; on the plain by the side of the hill are ruins of eight or nine pyramids, and on the rising ground are eight more, varying from 20 to 60 feet in height.
[Sidenote: Circa B.C. 700. Nuri.]
The principal temples are those of Taharka and Piankhi, close to Jebel Barkal. At Nuri, 7½ miles from Merowe, on the south bank, are the remains of 35 pyramids, solidly built, and probably of the Middle (?) Empire. At Wadi Ghazal are the remains of a fine Christian monastery. (B.N. 496-503; Cailliaud; Lepsius.)
[Sidenote: Belal.]
A few miles beyond Belal (foot of the 4th Cataract) and on the south bank are the remains of a Coptic church and fortified monastery.
Opposite Hamdab Island, 6 miles further on, are the ruins of a pyramid.
[Sidenote: Berber.]
No further remains have been discovered for the next 250 miles or more. There is evidence that Berber was in the ancient days a starting point, as now, for caravans for Suakin, but there are no ancient remains, as far as is known.
[Sidenote: Island of Meroe and Bagarawiya. B.C. 400 to A.D. 250.]
On crossing the Atbara the “Island of Meroe” is entered, and at Bagarawiya, some 45 miles south of the Atbara, three important groups of pyramids, about 100 in all, are reached. These, also called the pyramids of Assur, lie about 3 miles from the river, and are the tombs of kings and princes of the old capital, which lay somewhere near Shendi. An important find of jewellery of the Roman period was made here by Signor Ferlini, an Italian doctor, in 1834. (B.N. 509-513; L.; Cailliaud; Ferlini; W.) Since then the tops of many pyramids have been damaged in similar searches.
About 29 miles south of Shendi, on the east bank, is the entrance to the Wadi Ban Nagaa, and near it is a village of that name. Three miles down the river are the ruins of a small ancient Nubian temple.
[Sidenote: Nagaa.]
Twenty-three miles south-east from the railway station of Wadi Ban Nagaa, and situated in a low waterless desert, are the extensive remains of an ancient town. The walls of six temples are still standing, at least in part, and the foundations of several others can be traced. Two of them are connected together by an avenue of rams. One of the temples is almost purely Roman in style, and belongs, perhaps, to the third century A.D.; others are transitional; these are in comparatively excellent preservation. (Description by Rev. L. Gwynne; B.N. 514, 515; Cailliaud [elaborate]; and W.). They were also visited by Wurt (1811), Demetrio (1822), Holroyd (1837), and Lepsius.
[Sidenote: El Sufra.]
Twelve miles north-east of Nagaa are the ruins of El Sufra, also called El Masurat, a group of buildings within walls, of the Roman period, with a Meroitic inscription (C.; L.; and Hoskins, and B.N. pp. 515-516). One and a-half miles off are some Christian temples (?) (B.N. p. 515). A road track leads south-east from Shendi viâ Nagaa temples to Soba, and there are, it is reported, old temples on the way.
[Sidenote: Khartoum.]
There are no visible ruins of ancient temples at Khartoum, though it is known that it was the site of a large town (vide p. 228). A colossal Christian (?) stone lamb has been brought here from Soba (W.).
[Sidenote: Soba.]
At Soba, believed to be the old capital of the Christian Kingdom of Alwa, built on the old Ethiopic site of “Sobas,” 13 miles from Khartoum and on the east bank of the Blue Nile, are some remains of granite pillars and of a Christian church, including a decorated base with a large cross carved on it (W.). Little is known about this. There is said to have been a bridge here over the Blue Nile.
Miscellaneous.
[Sidenote: J. Geili.]
At Jebel Geili, 92 miles east from Khartoum, there is a carving in Meroitic style on a huge granite block at the south-eastern end of the hill, and on a neighbouring rock higher up the hill are the carved outlines of three horses (dates unknown).
[Sidenote: Koliteb.]
At Koliteb, 113 miles from Tokar, on one of the Kassala roads, there are ancient and rude carvings of men and camels on the rocks (Junker).
[Sidenote: Mamân.]
At Jebel Mamân, 201 miles from Suakin, on the “Ermenab” route to Kassala, there are some curious old Christian stone ruins and tombs (Schweinfurth; Z.A.E., 1865, p. 398).
[Sidenote: Sennar.]
Little or nothing of the old Sennar Kingdom is left.
At Geteina, on the White Nile, some inscribed bricks and pottery of the Christian period have been found. These are now preserved at Khartoum in the Gordon College Museum.
[Sidenote: El Ein.]
Vide p. 211.
[Sidenote: W. Mogaddam.]
Vide Vol. II, route Gabra—Korti.
[Sidenote: W. El Fura.]
Just above the wells of El Fura are the remains of a large rectangular fort (about 60 by 50 yards), with massive stone walls some six feet high and eight to ten feet thick, with curious square projections, perhaps for flanking defence. It may belong to the same period as the great stone fortifications at Old Dongola and Khandak, but the masonry presents one curious feature not observed there, namely, the frequent use of stones with the long dimensions vertically placed. It would serve to command the wells on a road from Merowe to Napata.
[Sidenote: Tombs, Atbai.]
North of the Berber-Suakin road, Lieutenant Newcombe, R.E., reports some curious tombs. Two are near the Wadi Amur (E. Long. 36° 15″, N. Lat. 19° 15″), and one is close to the watershed of Khor Garrar (E. Long. 36° 40″, N. Lat. 20°). The ground plan of these tombs is octagonal; they were roofed apparently by a dome supported on a hexagonal (?) drum, and lit by plain rectangular windows. It is impossible to say whether they belong to the late Christian or the early Mohammedan period. The rounded battlement which crowns the corners of the eight walls is a common feature on Sheikhs’ tombs.
It only remains to point out that the surface of Sudan antiquities has barely been touched. It is hoped that as money becomes available more of the ancient history of the Sudan may be brought to light, and more particularly is it hoped that the meaning of the Nubian and Meroitic hieroglyph inscriptions may shortly be discovered.
The whole matter is being gradually taken up by the Sudan Government, but want of funds hampers the work.
The distinguished Egyptologist, Dr. Wallis Budge, of the British Museum, has already paid several visits to the country.
[Footnote 235: The contents of this are now preserved in the Gordon College Museum at Khartoum.]
[Footnote 236: Two cartouches on an altar preserved in Berlin enable us to recognise eight signs.]
=APPENDIX E.=
* * * * *
ETHNOLOGY OF THE SUDAN.
The wealth of the Nile Valley has at all times tempted invasion; the land presents no serious physical obstacles, and the people who live in the countries bordering it have always been unsettled and migratory. We expect, therefore, to find here a perfect babel of tongues and races. To mention invasions from the East alone and within the historic period, Africa has been overrun by the dynastic Egyptian, the Hyksos, the Abyssinians and the Arabs, and from the early cemeteries of Abydos archæologists have collected skulls which appear to show that from the time of the Stone Age four races at least have contributed to the population of Egypt. These races Kollmann[237] identifies as Punts, who were, perhaps, of Semitic origin, Nubians, Libyans, and Negroes, the last including several Pygmies and, to judge from their grave-offerings, some men of wealth and consideration. In the Sudan no detailed researches have been made in ancient burial-places, but we may confidently expect some day to read in the northern half the same story as in Egypt.
Invasion, moreover, is not the only disturbing element. The natives of the Sudan, even when they have adopted a more or less settled life, are great travellers: traffic in human flesh and conquest for the sake of human flesh have nowhere been pursued so long and so thoroughly. The native changes his abode without hesitation, and his love of strange women is passing Solomon’s. A hundred years ago Brown found Darfur full of Dongolawi traders. Fifty years ago the same race had turned their eyes to Kordofan and the Bahr El Ghazal, and wherever they go they intermarry with the women of the land. The Takruris have similarly in a peaceable way shifted their abode from Darfur to the province of Kassala within quite recent days.
Yet again, in the southern half we have seen within the last few centuries a succession of loosely-knit empires (Fungs, Shilluks, etc.) which carry the name and often the language of a single tribe over a wide area and then melt away, leaving behind only confusion to the ethnologist. What we know to have existed for the last thousand years, we can premise for the last fifty (?) thousand. So intricately mixed indeed is this southern half that the Nileland has been aptly described as the Negro Potpourri.
But there are mitigating circumstances which we must also take into account, otherwise the ethnologist would indeed be, of all men, the most hopeless.
In the first place, invaders do not exterminate and, by what seems to be almost a law, the old Somatic types tend continually to reassert themselves; a new invasion, that is, changes for a time the numerical proportion of different types, but as the newcomers are absorbed the old order returns, and the preponderating elements in the population become increasingly evident. It is a commonplace in Egypt that a Turk of the third generation is indistinguishable from a native.
In the second place, invasions and migrations have gone on from time immemorial, but they have always come from the same regions. Kollmann, as we saw, makes a four-fold division of the prehistoric inhabitants of Abydos; this corresponds to our four-fold division into Semites, Nubians, Libyans, and Negroes. The successive inroads into our area have meant, therefore, not the introduction of new constituents but the stiffening of an element already present by a fresh influx of kindred blood.
These two facts simplify the problem: they do not enable us to say that so-and-so is an Arab, indeed they make it impossible to say so with scientific certainty, but they will enable us ultimately to say which original stock has contributed most to the population of any given district. “Ultimately” because at present the data which alone will permit us to delimit the frontiers of the various peoples are wanting.[238] Along the river, especially, one stock shades into another with such delicate gradations that no two observers seem to agree as to the point of division, and the theories of the people themselves as to their own origin and that of their neighbours—theories which seldom agree—have little foundation in fact, albeit to some they may prove of greater interest and political importance than the future classifications of the learned.
We must at present renounce all pretensions to scientific exactitude and confine ourselves to more or less popular distinctions; accordingly, eliminating from our survey all recent new-comers of European or Asiatic extraction, we shall divide the present inhabitants of the Sudan broadly into four groups—the Negro, the Nuba, the Bega, the Arab.
[Sidenote: (i) Negroes.]
The ancient Egyptians referred to the South—it is difficult to say where it began—as the land of the black man, just like their successors, who named it Nigritia or Belad el Sudan; and they knew, as we know, that there were pygmy blacks as well as big fighting blacks. Whether the pygmies, relics of whom have been found all over the world, were evolved first in Africa or came in as immigrants, and whether the big blacks were developed by selection from them here or elsewhere we cannot here discuss. Suffice it to say that from before the dawn of history the two have always been in Africa, and that the Negroes of the Nile land are to-day more hopelessly subdivided than the Negroes of any other part. The pygmies have been now driven into the forests of Central Africa, and the big Negroes are now found in the Sudan only on the Upper reaches of the White and Blue Niles and in the hill countries to the west; north of this they occur merely as immigrants, soldiers, slaves, etc., amounting, though, in some parts to almost 50 per cent. of the population. They vary enormously in size, colour, language, institutions, and religion, so that in spite of the great work of such explorers as Schweinfurth, Emin, and Junker, we are still far from unravelling the intricate web of their interrelations. A recent writer, who has given a popular account of the researches of travellers before the Mahdia, disclaims as impossible any attempt at scientific classification, and we can only follow him in grouping the blacks of the White Nile and its tributaries according to the picturesque impression which they made upon their visitors. In this book (“Die Heiden Neger des Aegyptischen Sudan,” Berlin, 1893), Frobenius divides the blacks within our present frontiers into four groups:—
I. The Swamp Negroes—Shilluk, Shuli, Bari, Jur, Nuer, Dinka or Jange, Anuak, etc.
II. The Iron-working Negroes—Bongo, Mittu, Golo, Sheri, Madi, Kreich, etc.
III. The A-Zande or Nyam Nyam.
IV. The Latuka.
For further information about these people we must refer the reader to other chapters in this compendium, and to the authors mentioned above.
It only remains to point out that the blacks of Kordofan and the Blue Nile, offer practically virgin fields to the ethnologist.
[Sidenote: (ii) Nubas.]
Under this head we include (a) the Barabra, who are found between the 1st and 4th cataracts, and are subdivided into natives of Dongola, Mahas, Sukkot, Halfa, each with a different dialect; (b) the Nubas of Kordofan, with their sub-tribes. To these some philologists add, on linguistic grounds, a number of tribes usually described as negro or negroid.[239]
Geographically, and perhaps physically also, these Nubians appear as a link between Egypt and Negro land. They are darker and smaller than the Egyptian, but still brown and not black,[240] although they often have, like so many Egyptians, the woolly hair of the Negro. It is probable that they represent the ancient Kushites, and the latest student of the old Ethiopian inscriptions has sought to prove that the Nubians and not the Begas were the rulers of ancient Napata.[241] They are enterprising people, apt linguists and great travellers, very ready to take on a veneer of European culture, the last trait being an old one caricatured by the wall-painters of ancient Thebes. It is the more strange that they should have preserved their own dialects, especially as they have been Muslims for some centuries.
It was on the ground of their language that Lepsius[242] related the Nilotic Nubians with the Nubawis of Kordofan. The connection corresponds with traditions current in Dongola, where the traveller will hear again and again that, although the particular man he is interrogating is, of course, pure Arab from the Hejaz, yet most of the people round are Nubians like the Nubawis of Kordofan. Supposing this relationship to be proved, it would be still uncertain whether the Kordofan people are a colony from the Nilotes or vice versâ. But it is also possible that the Nubawis of Kordofan adopted a Nuba language in some by-gone age when there was a powerful Christian or pre-Christian Nubian kingdom on the Nile. If we are to believe Hartmann[243]—a very good observer—the majority of the Shaigia “Arabi” and many of the Jaalin really belong to the same stock.
[Sidenote: (iii) Begas.]
This name is derived from medieval Arab historians and has been identified with the Bugatæ and Buka of earlier days. It is applied to the tribes living in the eastern desert who speak various languages belonging to the so-called Hamitic group of languages. The principal tribes are Ababda, Bisharin, Amarar, Hadendoa, Halenga, Beni Amer, Habab.
In type they are far more “Caucasian” than those we have previously mentioned, and they occupy the same position and present the same characteristics as many turbulent pastoral tribes mentioned by Egyptian scribes and classical writers.[242] As Hamites, one school of anthropologists represented by the Italian Sergi, regards them as an off-shoot of the great Euro-African stock which populated North Africa and Europe: others bring them from Asia. “Non nostri est tantas componere lites.” Nor do we like to hazard an opinion as to whether they or the Nubians were the creators of ancient Meroe. The termination ab which is so common throughout the Berber Province proves that people of the Bega stock once held this district, and their immediate descendants are probably to be looked for among the riverain “Arabs” rather than the desert Begas, for no civilized people would exchange a settled life for a nomad life, least of all so warlike a race as the Begas.
According to W. Max Müller (“Aethiopien,” Berlin, 1904, p. 19), we have in the legend quoted on p. 224, a distorted version of one Hamitic settlement in this very area. The word Sembridae or Semberritae is a hybrid name formed by a North Hamitic people out of a Semitic root, and means, not “Deserters,” but “Nomads,” “Wanderers.” The legend above-mentioned will therefore be the echo of an early Hamitic invasion of a district then peopled by Nubas or Negroes, and of the adoption of a sedentary life by these invading “Wanderers,” whose success may explain the shifting of the capital from Napata to Meroe (p. 225).
[Sidenote: (iv) Arabs.]
The first three stocks have been in the country for as long as our records go. The Arabs are comparative newcomers; it is improbable that they came in any numbers until after the fall of the Christian kingdoms of Dongola and Alwa (Soba). The traditions of some tribes are against this, but historians only mention raids, and the traditions are not to be set against the historians’ testimony. The extension of these raids, which led to the downfall of Christianity and a consequent increase of Arab immigration, was probably due to pressure caused on tribes elsewhere by the conquests of Spain and Portugal on the one side and Turkey on the other. This would give the Arabs an occupation of from four to six centuries, though a slow infiltration from Arabia into the Sudan must have gone on from the beginning.
Now, at any rate, the Arab dominates the northern half of the Sudan, that is, from Egypt to Kordofan. He has nowhere exterminated the original inhabitants; he has in many cases not yet succeeded in forcing even his language upon them; he has, unlike the Arabs in Arabia, intermarried freely with them; but his conquest has been so far complete that his religious ideals and tribal organisation have replaced the older faith and institutions wherever he has cared to carry them. This fact upsets our perspective. The people call themselves Arabs and we accept the name, but it would certainly be a mistake to regard them as Arabians or to recognise as genuine their long pedigrees “of unsullied (?) Arab descent” “going back to early Mohammedan times” (Keane). The present writer believes that the materials newly published by Naum Bey Shoucair (“History of the Sudan,” Cairo, 1904—in Arabic), enable him to trace two distinct steps in the Arabization of the Central Sudan.
Up to 1500 A.D., the Christians reigned on the Blue Nile; there are no Gubbas, no mention of Fikis, earlier than this, as would certainly have been the case if many Arabs had been here. About this time the Fungs, a powerful black tribe under Amara Dunkas, became Muslims and, assisted by some Arab immigrants, overthrew the kingdom of Soba. Hardly had they done so when they were themselves menaced by Sultan Selim, the Turkish conquerer of Egypt and Suakin; it was their policy then to represent themselves as orthodox Muslims connected with the most venerated Arab tribes, and a certain Sheikh El Samarakandi, who had wandered to the court of Dunkas, provided the necessary pedigrees, which were duly sent to Selim and by him much admired (Naum II, pp. 73, 74). But the Sheikh did his work clumsily, if it may be judged from a Jaali pedigree which purports to be extracted from his work, for he left at the crucial point several non-Arabic names, and few, if any, Sudanese pedigrees are accepted by Muslim genealogists elsewhere.
At this point the Arabization of Central Sudan seems to have stood almost still for three centuries. Gubbas were built and Fikis became powerful, but the tribal organization, although indigenous among the Begas, did not supplant the very different political division of the land into small kingdoms tributary to Sennar. The emblems of kingly power, a throne called the K-K-R and a two-horned cap (Naum II, pp. 100, 101), are also clearly African, not Arab. Burkhardt, again, who knew the Arabs in Syria and Arabia, is never tired of contrasting their manners and morals with those of the Sudanese Arabs.
This period was closed by the Egyptian conquest of Mohammed Ali, which continued the process begun in the time of Selim, and finally obliterated several of the most characteristic survivals from pre-Islamic days. Indeed, all the events of the last century, including the great upheaval in which it culminated, had the same tendency. Having lost their native kingdoms, the people have been forced to adopt the Arab tribal system, and, unlike the Berbers in Algiers, have identified themselves enthusiastically with all things Arab. The more striking is it that they should have still kept such African customs as the Akh-el-banat, the scarring of the cheeks, female excision,[244] all alien from the true Arab of Arabia.
If this reading of history be accepted, the people of the Central Sudan will be described as a mixed race recently forced into an Arab mould and in varying degrees modified by Arab blood. And we may prophesy that future researches will prove the other elements in this race to be akin to the other races on its borders, to the Nubians and Begas on the north, to the Negroes, Gallas, Abyssinians, etc., on the south and south-east.
In the above sketch there are so many necessary gaps, and so many controverted points of necessity passed over in silence, that it seems fair to the reader to give a brief statement of a different theory recently put forward by Sir H. H. Johnston on this subject. We therefore append a résumé of his views compiled by Captain Morant from “The Nile Quest”:—
In pre-historic times the land on each side of the Red Sea is said to have joined in the south as well as in the north. By these necks of land man came to Africa from Asia in the form of dwarfs of a very low negroid type, resembling the now much-advanced pigmy of the Congo or the bushman of South Africa. Thus perhaps, say, 10,000 years ago, the Nile basin south of N. latitude 15° was peopled by a negroid species from the east. It seems also not improbable that Egypt proper and Arabia were within the domains of this negroid race.
These indigenous pigmies appear to have been at an early date ousted (say 9,000 years ago) by races of Caucasian stock resembling the Dravidians of India, of aquiline type, possibly of nearly pure Caucasian “Khafra” origin, and probably emanating from Syria, Cyprus, or Libya.
In Gallaland, Somaliland, and Abyssinia a handsome race of Caucasian ancestry, mingled no doubt with proto-negroes and Dravidians, formed originally in Southern Arabia, sprang up. The lips of this people, destined to become the basis of a world-renowned and historic type, were full and their noses straight and finely shaped, whilst their skin was dark and their hair had a tendency to curl, and like the modern Somali, Galla, or Danakil, the men grew thin and wedge-shaped beards.
It was by emigrants of this new Hamitic race to the Lower Nile Basin that the stock of the ruling type of ancient Egyptians was formed. In the latter, nevertheless, an appreciable amount of Negro blood from the early Negro population must doubtless have been absorbed.
So degraded and transformed, however, has been the ancient Egyptian type by the infusion of the blood of their many successive rulers, that though facial resemblances may remain, their famous characteristics have vanished, and the Egyptian of to-day is the descendant of Slavs and Turks, Arabs, Armenians, and Circassians.
But it was not only to Egypt that this Hamitic race extended, but also, though more faint-heartedly, towards the negroid districts to the south-west to Uganda, Zululand, and even it is thought to the Atlantic. In Uganda their descendants are now distinctly traceable.
To recapitulate:—The country of Ethiopia, which included not only the highlands of Abyssinia but also the country north, to Berber or even Dongola, was probably originally populated by a very low type of pigmy or bushman, then perhaps partially by a race of big black negroes, such as Shilluk, Dinka, Nuer, and Bari, which in turn gave way to the Hamitic race already described. The ruling class of Ethiopia, however (the present “Abyssinian” in contradistinction to the “Galla or Somali”), became of Semitic origin through the Sabæan Arab conquest of Abyssinia some 3,000 to 4,000 years ago.
The break up of the Israelitish Empire by the Abyssinians and subsequent scattering of the Jews, many of whom settled in Abyssinia, introduced a further admixture of Semitic blood.
In comparing this ancient history, much of which is little more than guesswork, with the state of affairs at the present day, we find the descendants of the original pigmies, but in a more advanced state, having been ousted from place to place at length survive in hiding, as it were, in the forests of the most central of Central Africa. The big black negro tribes have withdrawn to and are content to remain in the swampy fever-stricken districts of which no higher human race has ever yet desired to deprive them. The Ethiopians have retired before the Arab invaders to their hills, whilst the Arabs continue to dominate all the country they cared to conquer.
The Hadendoa, Ababda, Bisharin, Beni Amer, etc., Arabs who speak a “rotana” somewhat resembling the Somali language, are, undoubtedly, not true Arabs, but are probably descended from the Hamitic race above described which also was the origin of the Somali and Galla races.
[Footnote 237: Die Gräber von Abydos. Correspondenzblatt der Deutschen anthropologischen Gesellschaft, 1902, pp. 119 foll.]
[Footnote 238: Only one ethnologist of the first rank—R. Hartmann—has spent any considerable time in the Sudan, and this was forty years ago. Except for his work we have to depend on (1) reports of officials and travellers: these are often very valuable, but the different criteria of race, language, etc., used by these writers make it very difficult to use them with any confidence; (2) the observations of “arm-chair savants” who base great theories upon stray skulls, fragmentary vocabularies, chance studies of natives touring about Europe “on show,” etc. This is not the place for a nice criticism of the respective values of these works.]
[Footnote 239: E.g., Cust (Modern languages of Africa, London, 1883, I, p. 142) includes as “Nubas-Berta, Fung, Hameg, Golo, Sheri Monbutto, Nyam-Nyam, and others.”]
[Footnote 240: The Nubas of Kordofan, although certainly not negroes, are black.—G.]
[Footnote 241: Heinrich Schäfer, “Die Aethiopische Königsinschrift des Berliner Museums,” Leipzig, 1901.]
[Footnote 242: “Nubische Grammatik,” Berlin, 1880, p. lxxvii.]
[Footnote 243: Skizze der Nilländer, Berlin, 1860, p. 258.]
[Footnote 244: Mentioned in Strabo and Makrizi. To these African customs in vogue among the Sudanese “Arabs” may be added the Dilka and the Tadkhin. The former is their method of cleaning themselves: instead of washing they prefer, like the ancient Greeks, first to grease themselves over and then scrape the skin with a stone or other scraper. For the Tadkhin, see Baker, “Nile Tributaries of Abyssinia,” p. 81.]
=APPENDIX F.=
* * * * *
LIST OF TRIBES AND SHEIKHS. (FOR TRIBES IN THE BAHR EL GHAZAL PROVINCE, vide CHAP. VII.)
---------------+---------------+---------------+--------------------- Tribe. | Head Sheikh. | Habitat. | Remarks. ---------------+---------------+---------------+--------------------- BERBER PROVINCE. Population 83,000 (1904). | | | Ababda |Abdel Azim Bey |Abu Hamed, Ban |Branch of the Ababda (Bilhush) |Wad Khalifa and|Nagaa, and |in Egyptian |Mohammed Nura. |Segadi |territory. Poor and | | |unimportant. | | | Arteiga |Abu Fatma Wad |Adarama |Nomads. Unimportant |Omar | |tribe. | | | Bisharin, Um |No Nazir |Atbai |Sub-divided into Ali | | |Aliab, Shantirab, | | |Amrab, and | | |Hamadorab. Nomad | | |Arabs, owners of | | |camels, sheep, and | | |goats; do a little | | |cultivation. | | | „ Um Nagi |Karar Ahmed |R. Atbara, |Sub-divided into | |between Adarama|Hanr, Nafab, | |and its mouth. |Mansurab, Hamdab, | |Also in the |Ariab, (Negemab, | |Southern Atbai.|Kurbab, and | | |Bilanib). Nomads as | | |above. | | | Fadnia (east) |Ahmed El Haj |Um Hatab |Nomads. Owners of |Taher | |camels, cattle, and | | |sheep, etc. | | | „ (west) |Abbas Shedid |Goz Naim |Mostly sedentary and | | |cultivators with | | |sagias. | | | | | |This tribe claims | | |descent from Imam | | |Ali, cousin of the | | |Prophet, and | | |therefore belong to | | |the Alluia. They now | | |consider themselves | | |Jaalin. | | | Hāmak |Abdalla Wad El |Near Berber |Very few. Nomads; |Aila | |originally belonging | | |to the Bisharin. | | | Hassania |Omar Idris El |Upper part of |A large and |Fazari |basin of Wadi |important nomad | |Bayuda, and |tribe. Pay £250 | |whole of basin |tribute (1903). | |of Wadi Abu |Owners of a few | |Dom. J. Gilif |camels and cattle, | |and J. Jakdul, |but chiefly owners | |Abu Tleh, and |of sheep and goats. | |at times west |Small cultivators on | |bank of Nile, |rainland. Claim to | |Metemma to |be descended from | |Berber. |Zubeir Ibn El Awam | | |(Zubeir’s mother was | | |aunt of the Prophet) | | |and therefore from | | |the Beni Hashim | | |tribe. | | | Jaalin |Hamad Suleiman |Debbaghat—El |Nomads and |Osman (nomads) |Hawad—Kabushia,|sedentary. Formerly | |etc. Both banks|a large and powerful | |of the Nile |tribe; now much | |from Metemma to|reduced in wealth | |the junction of|and numbers by the | |the Atbara. |Dervishes. | | | |Ibrahim Wad | |Cultivators by |Ferah | |sagias. Owners of |(sedentary) | |sheep and goats. The | | |Jaalin say they are | | |descended from | | |Abbas, uncle of the | | |Prophet, and | | |therefore belong to | | |the Abbasia tribe. | | | Khawawir |Gar El Nabi |Abu Safār |Nomads. Owners of |Kador | |camels, sheep and | | |goats. | | | Kimilab |Suleiman Hamad |Shigla and El |This tribe was one |Salem |Nebis |of the first to | | |settle on the | | |Atbara, and fought | | |the Bisharin who | | |arrived later from | | |the Atbai. They have | | |now lost their | | |pristine power and | | |importance. | | | Monasir |Osman Suleiman |Dar Monasir; |Mostly sedentary |Wad Gamr |left bank of |Arabs. Poor tribe | |Nile, south and|living in a poor | |south-west of |country. | |Abu Hamed at | | |Sani. | | | | Nefeidab |Ali Wad Sebib |Atbara |Of tribes now on | | |Atbara the Nefeidab |Mohammed Abu | |and Abdel Kerimab |Abda. | |were the first to | | |settle there. | | |Formerly owned right | | |bank from Goz Regeb- | | |El Kian. Now very | | |few. | | | Rasheida |Abdalla Mubarak|Atbara and Gash|Nomads. Came from | | |Arabia in 1846. The | | |Dervish Emir Abu | | |Girga, during the | | |Mahdia, is said to | | |have killed 75 men | | |of this tribe and | | |captured 1,700 of | | |their camels. They | | |then took refuge at | | |Massaua and returned | | |to the Sudan after | | |the fall of | | |Omdurman. Part of | | |this tribe live near | | |Agik in Suakin | | |Province. | | | Robatab |Habiballa Abdel|Both banks of |Sedentary. |Majid |the Nile from |Cultivators. Poor. | |about the 5th | | |Cataract to a | | |little below | | |Abu Hamed. | | | | Shaigia, Onia |Abdel Rahman |Goz El Basabir.|Chiefly nomads. (east) |Zayad |Also east bank |Owners of camels, | |south of |sheep, and goats. | |Metemma. | | | | „ Onia (west)|Naim El Fiki |Nasri Island | |Mohammed Kheir |and west bank. | | | | „ Sauarab |Nasr El Meki |Wad Ban Naga |Nomads. Major part | | |of this tribe lives | | |in Dongola Province. | | |Not a large tribe. ---------------+---------------+---------------+--------------------- DONGOLA PROVINCE.[245] Population 127,000 (1904).
Gararish |El Ata Abdalla |Right bank Nile|Nomads. Small and | |between Kerma |unimportant tribe. | |and Debba. |Owners of camels, | | |sheep, and goats. | | |Pay £E47 tribute. | | | Hawawir |Hassan Khalifa |Bayuda Desert |Nomads. Large tribe | |between Korti, |owning camels, | |Debba, and |sheep, and goats. | |Gabra. |Pay £E480 tribute | | |(1903). Head Sheikh | | |lives at Korti. | | | Kababish, |Fadi El Mula |Wadi El Gab and|Nomads. Owners of Omatto |Wad Rekha |south to Ein |camels, sheep, and | |Hamed and |goats. Pay £E235 | |Gabra. |tribute. | | | „ Dar Hamed |Isawi Salem |Wadi El Gab and|Nomads. Owners of | |south to Ein |camels, sheep, and | |Hamed and |goats. Pay £E25 | |Gabra. |tribute. Head Sheikh | | |lives at Dongola. | | | Shaigia |Ibrahim Wad El |Debba to Merowe|Nomads. Not an (Sauarab) |Kheir |and Bir Bayuda |important tribe; it | | |is under Sheikh | | |Hassan Khalifa of | | |the Hawawir. ---------------+---------------+---------------+--------------------- GEZIRA (BLUE NILE) PROVINCE.[246] Population 132,000 (1904)
Agaliin[247] |Mohammed El |Right bank |Sedentary. Not a |Fiki Ahmed |White Nile, |large tribe but | |Gezira Um Garf,|moderately wealthy. | |between Kalakla|Owners of cattle and | |and Um Arda. In|sheep; cultivators. | |rains at | | |Fatjuba and El | | |Arak. | | | | Ahamda |Mohammed |Eastern part of|Sedentary. Rich in |Kheiralla Ali |Kamlin |cattle. Number about |Abu Zaman. |district. |250 males. | |Mesellemia |Comfortably off. | |district. | | | | Alkamab |Abdel Bagi |Mesellemia |Sedentary. Fairly |Ghabashi |district |well off. | | | Arakiin |Yusef Fadl El |El Kreimet |Sedentary. This |Mula |(Managil) |section is neither | | |numerous nor | | |wealthy. | | | |Ibrahim Ahmed |Maatuk (Kawa) |Sedentary. Numerous |El Natifa[247] | |and well off; | | |chiefly cultivators. | | | Aramab[247] |Idris El Kinen |Scattered on |Sedentary. Large |and Mohammed |right bank |tribe and very |Abu El Hassan. |White Nile |wealthy. During | |between J. |Mahdia and up to | |Breima and |1902 Mohammed Abu El | |Geteina. In |Hassan was Nazir. It | |rains inland at|is now split into | |Mikheirif El |two sections. | |Kheiran, Kitra,| | |and Abdel | | |Magid. | | | | Arawab[247] |Magbul Ahmed |Scattered on |Sedentary. A large |Jar El Nebi |right and left |and very wealthy | |banks of White |tribe; chiefly | |Nile from J. |cultivators. | |Auli to El | | |Mohammedia and | | |inland at | | |Garada, | | |Hashaba, | | |Malaga. | | | | Awamra[247] |Ahmed Idris El |Interior of |Sedentary. Large and |Fadl |Gezira, east of|moderately wealthy | |J. Auli, and on|tribe. | |left bank of | | |White Nile near| | |Um Rummat. | | | | Batahin |Ali Abudi |Um Daka |Sedentary. Few and | |(Managil) |poor. | | | |Mohammed Zein |Mesellemia |Nomads. Poor; have a |Shakhib |district |few camels. | | | |Mohammed Talha |Abu Deleig |Nomads. Large tribe, | |district |rich in cattle, also | | |owners of camels. | | | Bija[247] |Abdel Gader |Right bank of |Sedentary. A section |Ibrahim |White Nile, |of the Agaliin; few, | |Gezira Um Garf,|but well off. | |and inland at | | |Wazra. | | | | Dabassiin |Rahmatalla |Gab El Gedad, |Sedentary. About 260 |Kheir El Sid |El Dabiba, etc.|males in tribe. | | |Cultivators. | | | Danagila |Ahmed El Niama |Mesellemia |Sedentary. Small | |district |tribe, but well off. | | | |Mohammed Osman |Geteina |Sedentary. Small |Abdel | |tribe, but well off. |Rahman[247] | | | | | Dar |Ahmed Mohammed |Scattered on |Nomads. Divided into Mahareb[247] |Abu Afsh |right and left |many branches; all | |banks of White |fairly well off. | |Nile from Hagar| | |El Asalai to | | |Jebelein. | | | | Diwa[247] |Ali Babikr |Aba Island |Sedentary. Very | |(Kawa) |small tribe. | | | Eseilat |Mohammed El Haj|Eseilat |Sedentary Arabs. |Saad |(Kamlin) |About 360 males. | | |Cultivators. | | | Fardiin |Ahmed El Taif |Managil and Um |Sedentary. Very | |Talha |small tribe, but | | |wealthy. | | | Fung |Mohammed El Rih|Dar Nail, Wad |Sedentary. Very |Guma |Odun (Managil) |small tribe, but | | |wealthy. | | | Gemmuiya[247] |Nasr Ibrahim El|Left bank of |Sedentary. Large |Mek |White Nile, |tribe and well off. | |between |Cattle and sheep | |Omdurman and |owners. | |Jebel Mandara. | | | | Halawin |Abdalla Wad |Mesellemia |Sedentary. Excellent |Musaid | |cultivators. | | | Hassanab[247] |Abdalla |Arak and |Sedentary. Very poor |Suleiman |Gezira, Um Garf|cultivators. | |(Geteina) | | | | Hassania |Ali Wad Yusef |Mahriba |Sedentary. Small | |(Kamlin) |section. | | | |Idris Habbani, |Scattered on |Sedentary. Related |Musellim |right and left |to the Berber |Magbul, and Ali|bank of White |Hassania. A very |Musa El |Nile from |large and very |Bida.[247] |Geteina to |wealthy tribe. Idris | |Dueim; also |was Sheikh of whole | |inland near |tribe during Mahdia, | |eastern |but it is now | |boundary of |divided into three | |Geteina |sections. Owners of | |district. |cattle, sheep, and | | |goats. | | | Hussanatt[247] |Ali Awadalla |Umat Shaar, |Sedentary. Large and | |Sharafat, J. |wealthy tribe. | |Maturi (Kawa). |Owners of cattle, | | |goats, and few | | |camels. | | | |Ahmed Sogheirun|Scattered on |Sedentary. Large and | |right and left |wealthy tribe. | |banks of White |Owners of cattle, | |Nile between |goats, and few | |Wad Belal and |camels. | |Geteina. | | | | Kawahla |Imam Ali |Abud, El Walia,|Nomad and sedentary. |Ibrahim El |and Kadibat |Largest and |Bedawi |(Managil). |wealthiest tribe in | | |Managil district. | | |Owners of camels and | | |cattle. Good | | |lighting men. | | | Lahawin[247] |Saleh Yagub El |Um Hagar, Wad |Sedentary. Not well |Imam |Badri (Kawa) |off. | | | Mesellemia |Mohammed Gamal |Um Shedida |Sedentary. |El Din[247] |(Kawa) | | | | |Awad El Bari |Wad El Meslami |Sedentary. Few and |Mohammed |(Managil) |poor. | | | |Abbas Mohammed |East of Kamlin |Nomad and sedentary. |Badr (Sheikh El|district |Rich in cattle. |Obeid). | |Number about 500 | | |males. | | | Mogharba |Mohammed Osman |El Abdanab, Wad|Sedentary. Few and | |El Zein |well off. | |(Managil) | | | | |Mubarak El |Um Sunta (Kawa)|Sedentary. Few and |Gezuli[247] | |well off. | | | Mohammedia[247]|Abdalla Idris |Scattered on |Sedentary. Large and |El Kereil |right and left |wealthy tribe. | |banks of White |Owners of camels, | |Nile between |cattle, and sheep. | |Hellet Wad El | | |Kereil and J. | | |Breima. In | | |rains inland at| | |Um Sidra. | | | | Nefeidia |El Melik Rahma |Abu Siwa |Nomad and sedentary. | |(Managil) |Large and wealthy | | |tribe. | | | Nurab[247] |Saleh Wad El |Shawal (Kawa) |Sedentary. |Imam | | | | | Rufaa |Shai El Nur Tai|El Azazi and |Sedentary. Few, but |El Din |Shukheir |well off. | |(Managil) | | | | Shaigia |Ahmed Wad El |Wad Kunjari |Sedentary. Few, but |Awad |(Managil) |rich. | | | |El Gazuli |Tura El Khadra |Sedentary. Few, and |Omar[247] |(Geteina) |very poor. | | | Shenabla |Musaid Mohammed|Mesellemia |Sedentary. | |district | | | | Shukria |Abdalla Awad El|Rufaa district |Nomads and |Kerim Abu Sin. | |sedentary. Numerous, | | |but now poor tribe. | | | „ Gadurab |El Zubeir El |Eastern part of|Nomads and |Nur |Kamlin district|sedentary. Rich in | | |cattle. Number about | | |230 men. ---------------+---------------+---------------+--------------------- KASSALA PROVINCE. Population 74,700 (1904).
Beni Amer |Mohammed Osman |Debeloeid |Nomads. This is only |(Wakil Yagub | |a small branch of |Mohammed). | |the large tribe | | |living in Eritrea. | | |Pay £E150 tribute. | | | Debania |Awad El Kerim |Gedaref, Asar, |Sedentary Arabs. The |Wad Zaid (Wakil|Shasheina, Abu |Debania tribe are |Mustafa Bakr |Gelud, Sofi, |now very poor and |Wad El Sultan).|etc. |reduced in numbers. | | |Sheikh Awad Wad Zaid | | |is also head of all | | |the Forawis and | | |blacks under Mustafa | | |Bakr. | | | Hadendoa |Sheikh Idris |Kassala |The Hadendoa under |Gadi | |the Governor of |(Nazir)[249] | |Kassala pay £E480 | | |tribute (1904). „ El Berinab |Minni and Onur |Adarghayai. |Their principal |Ali, Mohammed | |grazing grounds are |Ahmed Abbas. | |the right bank of | | |the Atbara and the „ „ |Ahmed Belal |Maman. |Gash, north of | | |Kassala. Both these „ Gemilab |Omar Lalai |Maman. |districts, however, (Taulil) | | |are subject to | | |invasions of the „ Haikolab |Mohammed El Hag|Tebilol. |Suakin Arabs. Filik, | | |on the Gash, used to „ „ (Odi) |Ahmed Wakili |Odi. |be and is now to a | | |lesser extent a „ Kalulei |Ali El Hadab |Atbara. |great centre of the | | |Hadendoa tribe. The „ Gism El Gash|Mustafa Hamed |Temitatei. |Hadendoa are nomads | | |and own large „ Shebodinab |Hammad Musa |Tendera. |numbers of camels (Kokreb.) | | |sheep, and goats, | | |also cattle. They do „ Shebodinab |Hamed Isa |Atbara north of|a little (El Bahr.) | |Goz Regeb. |cultivating. They | | |speak a Rotana | | |similar to that of | | |the Beni Amer and | | |Bisharin, etc., | | |which is said to be | | |allied to that | | |spoken by the | | |Somalis. They | | |usually carry very | | |neatly made spears | | |with shafts about 5 | | |feet long bound at | | |intervals with | | |silver or brass | | |wire, also circular | | |shields about 2 feet | | |6 inches in | | |circumference made | | |of hippo, buffalo, | | |or giraffe hide. | | |Like the Bisharin, | | |Beni Amer, Kababish, | | |etc., they wear | | |their hair in the | | |well-known “fuzzy- | | |wuzzy” style. The | | |Wililiab are the | | |leading family of | | |the Hadendoa tribe. | | | Halenga |Jaafar Ali |Kassala |Sedentary Arabs. | | |Cultivators. | | | Hamran Arabs |Omar Burbur |Setit |Sedentary Arabs. | | |Very few and poor, | | |but nearly all own | | |horses. Omar Burbur | | |is under Awad El | | |Kerim Wad Zaid. | | | Shukria, Butana|Ali Awad El |Butana, Rera, |Nomads. Cultivators Section |Kerim Abu Sin, |El Sofeiya, Um |and graziers. |called also |Rueishid, |Formerly owned many |“Ali El Had.” |Gileita, etc. |camels, now possess | | |very few. Some of | | |the Lahawin, | | |Kawahla, and Batahin | | |live in the Butana | | |under “Ali El Had.” | | |Pay £E450 tribute. | | | „ Atbara |Amara Mohammed |River Atbara |The Lahawin (a White Section |Hammad Abu Sin.|between K. |Nile camel-owning | |Kutut and Ramet|tribe), some of the | |Gaied. |Awaida, Kawahla, and | | |Mogharba, also live | | |on the Atbara under | | |Amara Abu Sin. Pay | | |£E325 tribute. | | | „ Gedaref |Hammad Abu Sin |Gedaref, Wad |Sedentary. Chiefly Section | |Kabu, Beila, |cultivators. There | |Rahad, Galaat |are more than 220 | |Arang, etc. |villages in the | | |Gedaref district. | | | Takarir |Sheraf Mohammed|Gallabat and |Shiekh Sheraf is |Abdalla |district |head of all the | | |Gallabat district, | | |the people of which | | |are chiefly | | |Takruris, Forawis, | | |Kunjara, etc. ---------------+---------------+---------------+--------------------- KHARTOUM PROVINCE.[248] Population 81,000 (1904).
Ahamda |Mohammed El Ata|Geili |Sedentary. Small | | |tribe. Vide Blue | | |Nile Province. | | | Batahin |Mohammed Talha |Geili-Elwan |Sedentary. (Ashama) |Abdel Bagi | |Cultivators. Camel | | |and sheep owners. | | |Vide Gezira | | |Province. | | | Butukab |Mohammed Talha |Geili-Elwan |Sedentary. |Abdel Bagi | |Cultivators. Camel | | |and sheep owners. | | |Vide Gezira | | |Province. | | | Ereikat |Jadalla Isa |Omdurman and |Belong to Darfur. | |Khartoum |Like the Taaisha and | | |Habbania are now | | |poor and earn their | | |living as best they | | |can in Khartoum and | | |Omdurman, or | | |cultivate in Gezira. | | | Geriat |Mohammed Kirsha|Gaerin—Wadi |Nomads. Small tribe. | |Mogaddam | | | | Habbania |Mahmud Abu Saad|Omdurman and |Belong to Darfur. | |Khartoum |Many are employed by | | |Works Department, | | |etc., at Khartoum. | | | Hassanab |Hassan Meki |Wad Hassuna |Vide Gezira. | | | Hassania |Awad El Kerim |Wad Hassuna, |Majority belong to |Suleiman Kasir |Wadi Tibna, |White Nile Province. | |West Bishara, | | |and north of | | |Gabra. | | | | Mashaikha |El Taib Abdel |Um Dom, Karkoj,| |Salam |etc. | | | | Mogharba |Hassan Hamad El|Wad Ramla |Vide Gezira (nomad) |Deisis |district |Province. | | | „ (sedentary)|El Taib Abdel |Melaha, etc. | |Salam | | | | | Taaisha |Mahmud Abu Saad|Omdurman, |Belong to Darfur. |(of Habbania) |Khartoum, and |Vide also Ereikat. | |scattered in | | |Gezira. | | | | Zeiadia |Jadalla Isa |Omdurman, |Belong to Darfur. | |Khartoum, and |Vide also Ereikat. | |scattered in | | |Gezira. | ---------------+---------------+---------------+--------------------- KORDOFAN PROVINCE. Population 550,000 (1904).
Agrab Nahud |Mustafa Ibrahim|Nahud |Sedentary. |Abu Renat | | | | | Ahamda[250] |Abdel Rahim |Dar El Ahamda |Very poor. Sedentary |Taha | |Arabs. | | | Aulad Hameid |Didan El |South of Dar El|Baggara. Nomads. |Dervish |Ahamda |Poor and now | | |unimportant. Pay | | |£E60 tribute. | | | Bederia |Abdel Samad Abu|Birket Sungikai|Large sedentary |Safia |and Abu Haraz |tribe. Pay £E400 | | |tribute (1903). Good |Ebeid El Hag |El Obeid. |fighting men. | | | Beni Jerar[250]|Ahmed Mohammed |Helba and Homra|Nomads. Large tribe. |Nubawi | |Pay about £E130 | | |tribute. Camel and | | |sheep owners. Good | | |fighters. | | | Feraha |Omar Wad Gash |Khor Kheiran |Unimportant tribe. | | | Ghodiat |Ibrahim Baggara|Rahad |Unimportant tribe. | | | Gimma[250] |Ahmed El Bedawi|Gedid |Sedentary Arabs. |Asaker | |Important tribe. | | |Good horsemen. | | |Cultivators and gum | | |collectors. | | | Gowama |Yasin Yusef |Between El |Large sedentary Arab | |Obeid and Dueim|tribe. Cultivators | | |and collectors of |Adam Maznuk |Rahad. |gum, and owners of | | |sheep, goats, etc. „ (Nahud) |Bokhari Ali |Nahud. | | | | Habbania |El Tom Audun |Sherkeila and |Sedentary Baggara | |Ageila |Arabs. Not numerous. | | |Branch of the | | |Habbania of Darfur. | | | Hamar, Asaker |Ismail Mohammed|Nahud to Foga |Large and important |El Sheikh | |Arab tribe. Camel | | |owners and „ Degegin |Hamid Bey | |cultivators. Pay |Fatin. | |£E1,200 tribute | | |(1903). Partly „ Gherasia |Abdel Rahim Bey| |sedentary and partly |Abu Dagal. | |nomad. Good fighting | | |men. | | | Hawazma, Abdel | | |A large and powerful Ali | | |Baggara nomad Arab | | |tribe, scattered „ Dar Beti |Hamed Asosa |Sungikai, Nila,|over the plains | |and Dilling. |amongst the Nuba | | |hills. Own many „ Walad | | |horses, cattle, Ghabush. | | |sheep, etc. Pay | | |about £E800 tribute „ Dar Gawad |Gad El Kerim. | |(1903). | | | „ Khalifa |Nur Hanur |J. Kadero to J.| | |Gedir. | | | | |Toto Mahub. | | | | | |Bedawi Gadum. | | | | | |Hamad Abu | | |Shilluk. | | | | | „ Rowauga |Soma Lua |J. El Joghub | | |and south. | | | | |Mohammed | | |Bahlul. | | | | | |Shein Tobein. | | | | | Homr |Ali Gula | |Large and |(Nazir) | |comparatively rich | | |Baggara tribe, „ Ageira Walad|Mohammed Khadam|Muglad. |owning cattle and Omram | | |horses. At present | | |(1903) pay £E450 „ Ageira Walad|Masaud Iris |Muglad to Bahr |tribute. Kamil | |El Arab. | | | | „ Felaita |El Hag Wad |Keilak and | |Yagub |Abiad Lakes. | | | | Kababish |Ali Tom |Kagmar and |Large nomad Arab | |north |tribe owning camels, | | |sheep, etc. Pay | | |£E850 tribute. | | |Another branch lives | | |in Dongola Province. | | | Kaja (Serrug) |Ibrahim Gurud |Kaja |Sedentary tribe. | | |Poor; robbers. | | | Kawahla |Abdalla Wad |North-west of |Large nomad Arab |Gadalla |Bara |tribe, owning many | | |camels. Pay £E1,000 |Badai Bakr |Dar Nuba. |tribute (1903). | | | Maagla |Beshir Dau El |El Gleit. | |Beit | | | | | Maalia |Abdalla Hanatir|El Mazrub |The bulk of this | | |tribe belongs to | | |Darfur. Pay £E60 | | |tribute. | | | Maganin |Mohammed Ali El|Dar Hamid |Sedentary Arabs, |Akheida | |living in Dar Hamid. | | |Pay £E150 tribute. | | | Messeria |Mohammed El |Dar Messeria |} |Fagir El Gaburi|(east and |} |(Nazir). |south-east of |} | |El Eddaiya). |} | | |} | | |} | | |} „ Un Selim. | | |} | | |} „ El Ghazaya |Bigada Abu |Dar Messeria |} |Edena |(east and |} | |south-east of |} | |El Eddaiya). |} | | |} „ El Derai |Nasr Mahil |Dar Messeria |} | |(east and |} | |south-east of |} | |El Eddaiya). |} | | |} „ El Enenat |Zakharia Adam |Dar Messeria |} A large and | |(east and |} powerful Baggara | |south-east of |} tribe, owning large | |El Eddaiya). |} numbers of cattle | | |} and horses. Pay „ Aulad Abu |Omar Ahmed |Dar Messeria |} £E800 tribute. Naaman | |(east and |} | |south-east of |} | |El Eddaiya). |} | | |} „ El Terg |Ahmed Nurein |Dar Messeria |} | |(east and |} | |south-east of |} | |El Eddaiya). |} | | |} „ Aulad Haibun|Gebero Khalil |Dar Messeria |} | |(east and |} | |south-east of |} | |El Eddaiya). |} | | | Shanabla |Manhil |Between Um Dam |Nomads. Camel and |Kheiralla |and Dueim |sheep owners. Pay | | |£E400 tribute. | | | Shankhab[250] |Gubara Wad |Left bank of |More or less |Geifun |White Nile |nomadic. Own cattle | |between Kawa |and sheep. Cultivate | |and Goz Abu |and collect gum. | |Guma. | ---------------+---------------+---------------+---------------------
SOME NUBA MOUNTAINS AND THEIR MEKS.
---------------+---------------+------------------------------- Mountain. | Mek. | Remarks. ---------------+---------------+------------------------------- Daier |Abu Zeida, etc.|All these Meks own to a | |varying number of rifles, with Dilling |Isa El Deif. |which they have been wont to | |fight each other, and which Eliri |Rizgalla Eluan |have hitherto been |(Hawazma |indispensable for defence |Mowallad). |against the raids of the | |Baggara Arabs of the |Abdalla Kaka |surrounding plains. |(Kawahla | |Mowallad). | | | Garada |El Fiki Fadl | |Zubeir. | | | Gedir |Bosh Dau El | |Beit. | | | Gulfan |El Ebeid El |Experience so far shows that |Nima. |neighbouring mountains will | |not support each other in El Joghub |Rahal Andal. |combined opposition to the | |Government, but that rather Kadero |Gader Bey |almost any mountain is |Ibrahim. |prepared to assist in the | |attack of any other. Kawalib |Nasr Wad El | |Maksur. | | | Kowarma |Orlandi and | |Kafi. | | | Krongo |Kobang. | | | Miri |Hamed Abu |The Nuba mountains pay about |Sikin. |£E1,000 per annum tribute | |(1903). Niyima |Sultan Arauga. | | | Rashad |Mohammed | |Zeibak. | | | Saburi |Kafi Hamed. | | | Sema |Gura Harun. | | | Shat |Daldum Taib. | | | Shuwei |Nasr Hamed. | | | Tagale |Geili Adam. | | | Tagoi |Mohammed Gedeil|At enmity with Mek Zeibak of | |Rashad. | | Talodi |Sherif Am Omo | |(Homr | |Mowallad). | | | Teisr |Toto Kilia. | | | Tira El Akhdar |Ti Wad Ardila. | | | Tira Mandi |Newi Omba. | ---------------+---------------+-------------------------------
LIST OF TRIBES AND SHEIKHS (continued).
-------------+-------------+---------------+-------------------------- Tribe. |Head Sheikh. | Habitat. | Remarks. -------------+-------------+---------------+-------------------------- SENNAR PROVINCE.[251] (Population 117,000 (1904).
Agaliin |Mohammed |Right bank of |Partly nomads and partly |Ahmed Abu |Blue Nile |sedentary. Poor and not |Duma |between Karkoj,|numerous. Nomad portion | |Badus, and Khor|graziers and breeders of | |Agaliin (K. |camels, sheep, etc., and | |Undul). |a few cattle. | | | | | |Sedentary, cultivators. | | |Weapons: spears and | | |swords. | | | Arakiin |Mohammed Wad |Wad Medani and |Sedentary. Cultivators |El Tom |Arakiin Khor, |and breeders of sheep and | |in the Medani |goats. Poor and not | |district. |numerous; indifferent | | |fighters. | | | Burun |Idris Wad |Jebel Gule, |A black race somewhat |Regab |Surkum, and |resembling the Nuers, but | |south |not warlike like them. | | |Spears and bows and | | |arrows. | | | Dar Ageil | „ „ „ |Northern |Nomads. Breeders of | |portion, Dar |cattle, sheep, and | |Fung |horses. Small tribe. | | | Fung | „ „ „ |Jebel Gule, |Sedentary. Cultivators on | |etc. |small scale. Poor and not | | |very numerous. Good Hameg | „ „ „ |J. Gerebin, |fighters, about 150 | |Roro, and |rifles, also swords and | |south. |spears. Breeders of | | |sheep, goats, and a few | | |cattle. | | | „ |Ahmed Abu |Roseires and |Sedentary. Cultivators |Shotal |vicinity, both |and breeders of sheep, | |banks of Blue |and goats. Neither | |Nile. |wealthy nor numerous. | | |Good fighters. Spears and | | |swords. | | | Ingassana |Mohammed |J. Tabi and |Blacks. Armed with |Ahmed El |district. |sickle-shaped swords. |Fungiawi | | | | | Jaalin |Saad El |Wad Medani, |Sedentary. Cultivators |Shafii, |Senga, Karkoj |and breeders of cattle, |Medani Ahmed,| |sheep, and goats. Wealthy |Mohammed | |and numerous. Good |Mahmud | |fighters. Spears and |Agamia, Omar | |swords. |Mohammed. | | | | | Jebelawiin |Regab Hussein|Fazogli and |Sedentary. Cultivators | |Khor Tumat |and breeders of sheep and | | |goats. Fairly wealthy. | | |Not numerous; fair | | |fighters. 150 rifles, | | |some spears and swords. | | | Kawahla |Yusef |Wad Medani on |Nomads. Poor, and are |Mohammed Wad |east bank of |small section of the big |Ais |Blue Nile; also|tribe in Kordofan; | |near Sennar. |breeders of camels, | | |sheep, and goats. Fair | | |fighters. Nomads are | | |graziers. Spears and | | |swords. | | | |Abdalla Shah |Wad Medani and |Sedentary. Cultivators |El Din |Kawahla Khot in|and breeders of sheep and | |Medani |goats. Poor and not | |district. |numerous. Indifferent | | |fighters. | | | Kenana, Abu |Hamed Abdalla|Wad Medani, |Nomads. Small tribe. Rihan |Wad Gales |between Rahad |During the rains these | |and Blue Nile. |nomads move into Kassala | |In rains move |Province. Wealthy. | |to El Butana. |Breeders of camels, | | |cattle, and sheep, etc. | | |Graziers, good fighters. | | |Spears and swords. Pay | | |£E270 tribute (1903). | | | „ Kawatil |Vacant |Senga district,|Partly sedentary (Abu | |in the Kenana |Rihan), but own more | |Khot; during |cattle and less camels. A | |winter and |few horses; these are on | |spring move as |the increase. During the | |far south as |rains the nomad section | |Roseires; in |moves to Segadi. Pay | |rains partly to|£E160 tribute. | |Segadi. | | | | „ El |Abd El Nabi |East bank of |Nomads. A few horses. Pay Siragia |Doheish |Blue Nile. Move|£E230 tribute (1903). | |to El Butana | | |during rains. | | | | El Khawalda |Mohammed Wad |Wad Medani and |Sedentary. Cultivators |El Dau |Khawalda Khot, |and breeders of sheep and | |in Wad Medani |goats. Indifferent | |district. |fighters. Numerous and | | |wealthy. A few spears and | | |swords. | | | Rufaa El Hoi |Vacant |Left bank of |Mostly nomads. Some | |Blue Nile, |sedentary. (Same as | |between |Agaliin.) Pay about £E100 | |Gesheish and El|tribute. | |Disa. | | | | Rufaa El |El Agab Abu |R. Dinder |Partly nomads, partly Sharg |Gin | |sedentary. Wealthy and | | |numerous. The nomad | | |portion are breeders and | | |graziers of camels, | | |sheep, and goats. The | | |sedentary portion are | | |cultivators with few | | |cattle. Spears and | | |swords; fair fighters. | | |During the rains a | | |certain number move into | | |Kassala Province. Pay | | |£E200 tribute. -------------+-------------+---------------+-------------------------- SUAKIN PROVINCE.[252] Population 60,000 (1904); without Nomads, 14,000.
Amarar, |None |Dissibil and |The Amarar are a large Fadlab |appointed |Akarbei |and comparatively wealthy | | |nomad tribe about whom, | | |however, little is known | | |at present. Their tribute | | |was assessed at £E1,100 | | |(1903). Hamed Bey was | | |formerly Nazir, but is | | |now so no longer. He is | | |in receipt of monthly | | |pension (£4) for his past | | |loyalty to Government. | | |There is at present | | |(1904) no Nazir of this | | |tribe. | | | „ Abdel |Onur Ali |Wadi Amur and | Rahmanab |Lebab |Agent. | | | | „ Kilab and|Mohammed |Hadai and Wadi |Another branch “Minniab” Aliab |Dobalob |Amur |live on Atbara under Musa | | |Adlan. | | | „ Kurbab |Mohammed Ali |Selalat and K. | (Hawan) |Hamed |Haieit. | | | | „ „ |Hassan Bufori|J. Girba and K.| (Wagadab) | |Asser. | | | | „ Nurab |Abu Fatma |Abdalla Rai, |Ali Adam, formerly |Hassab |Tokar |Sheikh, is in receipt of | | |monthly pension (£2) for | | |past good services. | | | „ Musaiab |Ahmed Bakash |Ariab, Amur, | | |etc. | | | | „ Sandarait|Mohammed |Sotriba and |Gwali Or was the last |Gwali Or |Bawati |Amarar Sheikh to | | |acknowledge Government. | | | Arteiga |Badani Rashid|Tokar |Cultivate near Tokar. | | | Ashraf |O’Sheikh |Ambakta, | |Walad Koi |Tantik, and | | |Tokar. | | | | Beni Amer |Mohammed |Khor Haieit, |Mohammed Osman lives at |Osman Hamed |Karora, Agik, |Kassala—Saleh Idris is |(Nazir) |and Tokar |his Wakil at Suakin. The | | |Suakin Beni Amer pay £350 | | |tribute (1903). | | | Habab |Mahmud |Adwan and Tokar|Came from Eritrea where |Kantibai | |greater part of tribe is | | |still. | | | Hadendoa |Said El |Sinkat |The Hadendoa are a (Amerab) |Hassan | |powerful nomad tribe |(Nazir)[253] | |owning many camels, sheep | | |and goats, and few | | |cattle. They live, | | |roughly speaking, between | | |Suakin, Goz Regeb, and | | |Kassala. Like the | | |Bisharin, Beni Amer, | | |etc., they speak a Rotana | | |said to be allied to that | | |of the Somalis. Vide | | |also Kassala. The Suakin | | |Hadendoa pay £E600 | | |tribute (1903). | | | „ |Mohammed Adam|Hadarbab and | (Bishariab) |Halgo |Tebilol. | | | | „ (Garieb) |Ismail Abu |Sidate, Dirbob,| |Aisha |and K. Abent. | | | | „ (Gemilab)|Abu Bakr |Warriba, |A large sub-tribe, |Ahmed El Amin|Dageint, Shaba,|divided into two main | |K. Osir, and |branches “Hararwab” and | |Siterab. |“Taulil,” former belong | | |to Suakin, latter to | | |Kassala. Hararwab section | | |pay £120 tribute (1903). | | | „ (Hamdab) |Abdel Gader |Wadi Amur, K. |Cultivate a good deal of |Hamed Dau |Arab, Kokreb, |dura. Pay £150 tribute | |and Hareitri. |(1903). | | | „ (Samarar |El Amin |Warateb. | — Abdel — |Mohammed | | Aar). |Hamagab | | | | | „ (Samarar |Musa Mohammed|Khor Baraka |Part graze on Gash in — Farag — |Ali | |autumn, part cultivate aliab). | | |near Tokar. | | | „ (Sharaab)|Omar Tita |Erkowit |Visit the Gash for | | |grazing in the autumn. | | | Kemilab |Mohammed |Tokar and Durur|Most go to Gash for |Abdel Gader | |grazing in autumn, rest | | |cultivate near Tokar. | | | Shaiab |Mohammed Musa|Tokar and K. |Cultivate near Tokar. Pay |Adam |Langeb |£E150 tribute. | | | Rasheida |Marshud Saleh|Atbara |In 1900 Marshud’s father, | | |formerly Sheikh of this | | |tribe, was imprisoned for | | |slave-dealing and was | | |subsequently expelled | | |from the Sudan. Vide | | |also tribes of Berber | | |Province. -------------+-------------+---------------+-------------------------- UPPER NILE PROVINCE.[254] Population 150,000 (?).
Agiba |Nadgweir |R. Gnatila and |Visited for first time in | |Agwei (Upper |September, 1904. | |Pibor). | | | | Aliab |Anok |Left bank of |Said to be a distinct | |Bahr El Jebel |tribe, neither Baris nor | |from a little |Dinkas, but with | |north of 5° 30′|characteristics of both. | |to a little |Rich in cattle and grain. | |north of Bor. |Visited for first time in | | |April, 1904. | | | Anuak[255] |Aiwil Agwot |Fatiwangyang; |A poor feeble tribe much (Sobat) | |right bank of |down-trodden by the | |Sobat |Nuers. Most of the Anuaks | | |are under Abyssinia. The „ (Pibor) |Okani or |Shian Okan |Sudan Anuaks appear to |Okwai | |have lost their | | |individuality and to have | | |become more or less | | |absorbed by the Nuers. | | | „ (Baro) |Geilo[255] |Itang |These Anuaks are friendly | | |and industrious. | | | Bari |Lowala (right|Both banks of |Friendly but poor. |bank), Leggi |Bahr El Jebel |Government not yet much |(right bank).|from north |in touch with any except | |latitude 6°, to|those near Mongalla. |Lado (right |Gondokoro and |Cultivate a good deal of |bank), Lado |south. |dura. |Kanga (right | | |bank). | | | | | |Mudi (left | | |bank). | | | | | Beri or Beir |Lom |About 60 miles |Government has not yet (north) | |inland from Bor|visited this branch of | |(?) |the tribe (1904). Dinkas | | |of Bor much afraid of | | |Lom. | | | „ (south) |Alikori |J. Lafol, 47 |Friendly to Government. | |miles east- |Visited by Captain W. N. | |south-east from|Borton, May, 1904. | |Mongalla. | | | | Dinka (White | | |The Dinkas are cattle- Nile) | | |owners principally, but | | |cultivate as a rule „ Bowom |Yol Wad Kur |Right bank of |little more than is | |White Nile at |sufficient for their own | |and near Renk. |needs. They have no head | | |Sheikh, but each section „ Akon |Bakhit Niok |Right bank of |is independent. Their | |White Nile from|characteristics and | |1 mile to 10 |language vary | |miles south of |considerably, according | |Renk. |to the locality they | | |inhabit. The only „ Giel |Salem Banga |Right bank of |sections with which the | |White Nile from|Government is now (1904) | |Elwat to Meshra|really in touch are those | |Zeraf-Awitong. |living on the White Nile. | | |A census of these „ Ageir |Akol Wad Shol|Right bank of |sections was made in | |White Nile from|February, 1903, and their | |Meshra Zeraf to|number was then estimated | |Khor Adar. |at 7,300 men, women, and | | |children, possessing „ Beia |Anyan Wad Yor|Right bank of |8,000 cattle, 16,000 |Din |White Nile up |sheep, and 13,000 goats, | |Khor Adar. |on which their taxes are | | |assessed at about £800. „ Niel |Wol Wad Lual |Right bank of | | |White Nile up | | |Khor Adar and | | |near Kodok. | | | | „ Dunjol |Aiyung Wad |Right bank of |The Dinkas of the Sobat (Sobat) |Agwot |White Nile |and Bahr El Jebel are now | |opposite Kodok.|(1904) being taken in | | |hand, and the | | |headquarters of the | | |Inspector for this | | |district is at Abwong. | | | „ Gnok Deng|Maiang |Gokjak to Wang |} | |Nait. Right and|} | |left banks. |} Pay £E450 taxes, 1904. | | |} These two sections own „ Rueng |Kur Mantoj |From Khor Filus|} about 7,000 cattle and | |across to J. |} 7,500 sheep. | |Zeraf and |} | |behind K. Atar.|} | | | „ Left bank|Bilkwai |Left bank of |During Mahdia lived near White Nile, | |White Nile near|Jebel Iliri. near Lake No | |Lake No. | | | | „ (Bahr El |Twi or Twich |Right bank of |The chief with whom Mr. Zeraf) | |Bahr El Zeraf |Grogan had some | |nearly opposite|difficulty. Appear to be | |to Shambe. |not unfriendly to | | |Government, but are not | | |on good terms with the | | |Dinkas at Bor. | | | „ (Bahr El |Byor and Kur |Bor and |Much afraid of Sheikh Lom Jebel) | |neighbourhood |of the Beri tribe. Very | | |friendly to Government. | | | Nuer |Kwandai |At Torkoyt on |Said to be friendly to | |the right bank |Government. Frequently | |of Sobat |visits Nasser Post. | |opposite |Reported to have left | |Nasser. Fishing|Torgoyt opposite Nasser, | |quarters on |May, 1904, and to have | |Pibor in |moved into the Anuak | |January and |country further west. | |February. | | | | |Gang |Tawfot, east of|Said to be unfriendly to | |Nasser, right |Government (1904). Nyal, | |bank of Sobat, |Sheikh of Ajungmir on | |and fishing |Baro, who is under Gang | |quarters on |appears, however, quite | |River Mokwai |friendly. | |and Pibor in | | |January and | | |February. | | | | |Jok |Koratong, |Friendly to Government. | |fishing |Jok is a son of the late | |quarters lower |Sheikh Yohe. | |down on Pibor | | |at Bil, etc. | | | | |Denkur |Keik-Khor Filus|Sheikh of Lau section. | | |Powerful and said to be | | |still opposed to the | | |Government. Other Nuer | | |chiefs on K. Filus are | | |Kwoin Gol (Nerol), Lemtut | | |Thiang (Wunleng), and | | |Adol, the two former are | | |said to be in favour of | | |the Government, whilst | | |the latter adheres to | | |Denkur. | | | |Fadur |Between Bahr El|Sheikh of Lak district. | |Zeraf and Bahr |Believed to be friendly. | |El Jebel. | | | | |Toi Wad Thief|Kuek, right |Friendly to Government; | |bank of Bahr El|visited Khartoum January, | |Zeraf |1904. Sheikh of Thiang | | |district. | | | |Diu |Faki, right |Said to be powerful and | |bank of Bahr El|unfriendly to Government. | |Zeraf, near | | |Ajiung. | | | | | | |The Nuers are very large | | |cattle owners. Government | | |is at present little in | | |touch with them as they | | |appear unable to | | |eradicate from their | | |minds the memories of the | | |slave raids in the time | | |of the old Government. | | |They are expert hunters | | |of elephants with spears, | | |and great fishermen. They | | |appear to be more | | |powerful than the other | | |tribes adjoining them, | | |but seem to have little | | |combination. The Nuer | | |tribal mark consists of | | |six horizontal lines | | |across the forehead. | | | |Nyal |Island formed |Sheikh of Gaweir section. | |by Bahr El |Visited Khartoum May, | |Jebel and Bahr |1904. | |El Zeraf. | | | | Shilluk |Fadiet Wad |Mostly on left |The Shilluks are governed |Kwad Keir |bank of White |by a Mek or king elected | |Nile from Kaka |according to tribal | |to Lake No. A |custom, subject to the | |few live |approval of the Governor | |further north, |General. The Mek has | |and there is a |judicial powers based on | |section living |tribal customs, but all | |on both sides |decisions are subject to | |of the Sobat |the right of appeal to | |near its mouth,|the Governor at Kodok. | |also on Khor |Their number was | |Atar. |estimated (1903) at | | |10,300 males, and 29,000 | | |women and children. In | | |1903 their cattle was | | |estimated at 12,200 and | | |their sheep and goats at | | |63,000. They also do a | | |good deal of cultivation, | | |and in years of good | | |harvest their grain is an | | |important factor in the | | |food supply of Omdurman | | |and Khartoum. | | | Arabs, Gowama|Abu El Gasim |Fama |Small branch of Gowama | | |from Taiara. | | | „ Hawazma |Abdel Wahab |Fama and J. |Branch of the Kordofan | |Iliri |Hawazma. | | | „ Kenana |Faki Hamed |Atara, north- |Few and poor. Wear their | |west of Kodok |hair brushed back in long | | |curls or plaits. | | | „ Selim |El Hag |Left bank of |Baggara Arabs, who, |Suleiman |White Nile from|however, own few cattle, | |Jebelein to |but many sheep and goats. | |near Kaka. |Do little cultivating. | | |Tribute, £200. | |Right bank from| | |Jebelein to | | |near Renk. | -------------+-------------+---------------+--------------------------
LIST OF TRIBES IN DARFUR ARRANGED ACCORDING TO THEIR FORMER PROVINCES.[256]
---------------+---------------+---------------+-------------------- Name of Tribe.| Head Sheikh. | Residence. | Remarks. ---------------+---------------+---------------+-------------------- I. Fasher Province.
Baza |El Fiki |Fasher and |Sedentary. Small |Mohammed |surroundings |tribe. | | | Beni Fadl |Mohammed Nasr |Burush to J. El|Sedentary Arabs. |El Din |Hella |Cultivators and | | |small owners of | | |cattle and sheep. | | | Berti |Adam Tamim |From Melit to |Large tribe. | |J. El Hella and|Sedentary. | |Tagabo |Originally slaves. | | |Cultivators. | | | Beshir |Saleh Daud |Near Fasher |Arabs. Cultivators. | | | Fellata |Bakr Geigar |Masarra |Sedentary black | | |tribe. Cultivators. | | | Fors, Kunjara | ? | | | | | „ Masabat | ? | | | | | „ Tungur |Ahmed Rashid |Kutum, and east|Fors. Related to | |of J. Marra, to|Royal Family. | |J. Haraz. | | | | Tarjam |Salem |Near Fasher |Fors. Cultivators. | | | Gimma |Under Sheikh of|Ergud |Arabs. Small tribe. |Berti | |Cultivators. | | | Gimr |Ahmed Beida, |West of |Cultivating Arabs. |Sultan Dar |Kebkebia |Considered very |Gimr. | |aristocratically | | |bred. | | | Hawara |Hasabo |Around Fasher |Originally Egyptian | | |Arabs. Very few. | | |Traders and owners | | |of cattle. | | | Jileidat | ? |J. Oba, near J.|Arabs. Cultivators. | |El Hella | | | | Kaja | ? |Kaja Serrug |A large black tribe. | | |Cultivators. | | | Kurubat |Fiki Fakhr El |Fasher |Arabs. Traders. |Din | | | | | Meidob | ? |Near El Fasher |Black sedentary | | |tribe. Poor. | | |Cultivators. Owners | | |of sheep and | | |donkeys. | | | Mima |Ahmed Bakr |J. Fafa; 2 days|Small sedentary | |south of El |tribe. Originally | |Fasher |from Borgu. | | |Cultivators. | | | Tireifia |Ahmed Karar |Fasher. |Sedentary Arabs. | |Formerly living|Originally from | |at Kobe |Dongola. Traders and | | |owners of cattle. | | | Takarir |No Sheikh |El Fasher, and |Black tribe. Few. | |scattered about|Traders. | |Darfur | | | | Wahia |Dau El Beit |Around Fasher |Originally from the | | |oases. Traders and | | |cultivators. Very | | |few. | | | Zaghawa |Mustafa Wad |Dar El Zaghawa,|Black Arabs. Large |Bakr |1 day north of |tribe. Mostly | |Fasher, and |sedentary. | |west to north |Cultivators and | |of Wadai. |breeders of camels | | |and cattle. | | | Zeiadia |Hemedo (Jadalla|Melit |Arabs. Cultivators. |Isa, now at | |Formerly rich and |Omdurman). | |breeders of best | | |horses in Darfur. | | |Now small tribe, | | |poor. ---------------+---------------+---------------+-------------------- II. Dara Province.
Beigo |Abu Bakr Naga |South of Dara |Blacks. Originally |(now with Ali | |from Faroge in B. El |Dinar at | |Ghazal. Cultivators. |Fasher). | |Sedentary. | | | Beni Helba |Abdel Rahman |South-west of |Baggara Arabs. |Habbo |Dara in Wadi |Nomads and | |Azum |sedentary. | | |Cultivators, and | | |formerly owners of | | |large numbers of | | |horses, cattle, | | |sheep, and donkeys. | | |Now poor. | | | Birgid | ? |South of Dara |Blacks; not slaves. | | |Cultivators. | | |Sedentary. | | | Bornu | ? |Menawashi |Black tribe. Traders | | |and small cattle | | |owners. | | | Dajo |Suleiman |Near Dara |A black tribe, poor. | | |Cultivators. | | | Habbania |Bahri Wad Osman|Kalaka |Large sedentary |(Mohammed Abu | |Baggara Arab tribe. |Saad, | |Cultivators and |Omdurman). | |traders (Sheikh | | |Mohammed Abu Saad, | | |Omdurman). | | | Maalia, Maaglia|Belal Wad Ahmed|Between Shakka |Arabs. Mostly |Dau Dau |and Taweisha |sedentary. „ Um Kreim | | |Cultivating dukhn | | |and water-melons. | | | Rizeigat, Um |Musa Madibbo |Abu Gabra and |Large nomad Baggara Ahmed. | |Shakka. |tribe. Formerly most | |(Bounded on |powerful tribe in Rizeigat, Abu | |north by Fors |Darfur, possessing Salim | |and Maalia; |3.000 horses. Now | |east by Homr; |comparatively poor. | |on south by | | |Bahr El Arab; | | |and west by | | |Habbania. | | | | Taaisha |(Kubr Abd el |Between |Formerly cultivating |Rahman, |Habbania on |nomad Baggara Arabs. |Omdurman). |east and Dar |Now mostly | |Sula on west; |sedentary. | |south of Beni |Cultivators. | |Helba and north|Formerly rich, now | |of Dar Fertit. |poor. ---------------+---------------+---------------+-------------------- III. Kebkebia Province.
Bedaiat | ? |North and |Black nomad Arabs, | |north-east of |connected with the | |Wadai |Zaghawa. Owners of | | |camels, horses, and | | |sheep. They never | | |cultivate, but live | | |on meat, milk, and | | |dates. | | | Beni Hussein | ? |West of |Nomad Arabs—now few | |Kebkebia |in number. | | | Mahria, Ereigat|Mahakkar |From Kebkebia |Formerly nomad |Mohammed Ali |to Fasher, and |Arabs. Cultivators. | |at Melit. |Poor tribe. | | |Originally belonged | | |to Rizeigat. | | | „ Nawaiba | ? | | | | | „ Mahamid | ? | | | | | Masalat |Abu Bakr Ismail|Dar Masalat, |A large independent | |south of Dar |black tribe. | |Tama | | | | Tama |Senin |Kebkebia, on |Black tribe owning | |west frontier |horses. Cultivators. | |of Darfur, |Will not acknowledge | |between Zaghawa|Ali Dinar. | |and Dar | | |Masalat. | | | | Mountaineers | ? |Nurnia, and |Black tribes. Owners | |other villages |of cattle and | |in J. Marra |cultivators of | | |wheat, etc. | | |Collectors of honey | | |and salt. ---------------+---------------+---------------+--------------------
GENEALOGICAL TREE SHOWING THE DESCENT OF THE PRINCIPAL BAGGARA TRIBES.
(According to Kubr Abdel Rahman, Sheikh of the Guberat Section (late Khalifa’s) of the Taaisha.)
* * * * *
SHAKER (descended from Beni Abbas tribe). | (2)------+------(1)
(1)----------------------------------+ | Hamed El Afzar (the hollow backed). | +---------------+-------------+-------+-----------------+ | | | | Hamid Hamar Zeiad Maalla (Dar Hamid (Hamar (Zeiadia, (Maalia, in in Darfur). Darfur). Kordofan). Kordofan). \_________________________________________________________________/ “Abala,” or camel-owning tribes. Not Baggara.
+----------------------------------------(2) | Ahmed El Ajdum (the leper). | Shaker | +-------------------+-----------------+ | | | Salama (stepson) Jeneid. Helba (slave) (Salamat in Borgu). | (Beni Helba, Darfur). | +-------------+--------------------------+-------------(3) | | Rashid. Heimad. | | +-------+-+-----+-------+ +---------+------+--+----------+ | | | | | | | | Zebada Ziut. Hamda. Azid. Hasaballa. Habbana Firan Hameid (Zebadia | (Habbania (Feierin (Aulad in Amr. at Kalaka with Hameid, Darfur). | in Darfur). Homr J. Gedir), \___________________________/ Ahmed and in brother (Aulad Rashid, living mostly (nicknamed Borgu). of Nazir, in Borgu.) “Taaish” killed by his with nurse Khalifa. (Taaisha, west of Kalaka, Darfur).
(3)----------------------------------+ | Atia | +--------------+---------------+------------+---------------+ | | | | | Rizeig Messir Hawazma Talab Reiyan (Rizeigat (Messeria, (south of (Taelba). (Rowaina). at Shakka), south-west El Obeid). \_______________________/ in Darfur. El Obeid). Unimportant tribes in Darfur.
The Selim are true Arabs and Baggara; they are said to be descended from the Beni Abbas tribe. The Gimma, Gowama, and Bederia are not true Arabs, and are said to be descended from Nubas and others. The Kenana Khazama, Geheina (Kawahla, Shenabla, etc.) are descended from the Koreish tribe, and are chiefly Abâla, or camel owners. It is stated that many of the Baggara, who moved westwards into Borgu after the fall of Omdurman, are now moving eastwards into Southern Darfur.
N.B.—Tribes shown in the above table as nearly allied are found residing in adjoining districts at the present day.
[Footnote 245: In addition to these tribes, there is a considerable sedentary population residing along the river banks.]
[Footnote 246: In addition to the tribes mentioned below, there is a large sedentary mixed population in the Gezira, composed of representatives of most tribes in the Sudan.]
[Footnote 247: These tribes belong to the White Nile Province (1905).]
[Footnote 248: In addition to the above tribes there is a large sedentary population composed of representatives of almost every tribe in the Sudan.]
[Footnote 249: Sheikh Ibrahim Musa was appointed Nazir of the whole of the Hadendoa in Kassala and Suakin in October, 1904.]
[Footnote 250: Belong to White Nile Province (1905).]
[Footnote 251: In addition to the above tribes there is a large mixed sedentary population comprising amongst others Arabs of many of the Baggara tribes of Western Kordofan and Darfur.]
[Footnote 252: As the majority of these tribes wander far and wide in search of pasture, which varies in accordance with the rains, it is impossible to give their localities accurately.]
[Footnote 253: Ibrahim Musa is Nazir of the whole tribe, including the Hadendoa in Kassala Province as well as in Suakin Province. He is paid by Government, and has certain responsibilities as regards the collection of tribute, etc.]
[Footnote 254: With the exception of the Arab tribes the inhabitants of the Upper Nile Province are pagans. The Dinkas, Shilluks, etc., who return to their country from north having been converted to Islam, seem to exercise no religious influence over their heathen brethren.]
[Footnote 255: The head Sheikh of the Abyssinian Anuaks or Yambos is Odial; he is called by the Abyssinians Abajali. The Sheikh of Anuaks at Finkio is Ojilo.]
[Footnote 256: From information by Sir R. Von Slatin Pasha and natives of Darfur.]
=APPENDIX G.=
* * * * *
BOUNDARIES OF PROVINCES (DEFINED).
BAHR EL GHAZAL.
[Sidenote: North.]
The southern frontier of Kordofan and thence westwards up the Bahr El Arab to the French frontier.
[Sidenote: East.]
The western boundary of the Upper Nile Province between Lake No and N. lat. 5° 30′.
[Sidenote: South.]
The frontier of the Lado Enclave and thence westwards along the Congo-Nile watershed.
[Sidenote: West.]
The Congo-Nile watershed and the French frontier.
BERBER.
[Sidenote: North.]
The northern boundary of the Sudan from about E. long. 33° to the Red Sea.
[Sidenote: East.]
From the point where the northern boundary touches the sea the line runs in a southerly direction to Kokreb, leaving the Hamedorab, Shantirab, and other Bisharin tribes to Berber and the Amarar to Suakin.
From Kokreb, on the Suakin-Berber road, nearly due south to Tendera well (Kassala), leaving Talgwarab and Mib to Suakin, thence to J. Ayob and Mitateb on the right bank of the Atbara.
[Sidenote: South.]
From Meshra Kelitawi on the left bank of the Atbara the line runs south-west to J. El Beida, thence north of El Farukh, through El Ashanik, south of Um Masarin (Asherin (?)), north of El Abala, and the wells of Shag El Walia, across Wadi El Basai, north of El Geleita to Wadi Faragalla, dividing the cultivation of the Morghamab and Bisharin from that of the Shukria. From Wadi Faragalla, dividing the cultivation of the Morghamab (Berber) and Batahin (Blue Nile Province) in the Wadi Shahaheit, to Hafir Wad Um Berwa in the Wadi Sideira. Thence to Hafir El Babunotat and Isna Bir. Thence according to the well-known boundaries of the Jaalin (Berber) and Batahin (Blue Nile Province) to Hafir Giriaa (Magarin). Thence the boundary skirts the land of the Jaalin (Nafaab) in the W. Adeik, and runs northwards round the cultivation of the Batahin in the Wadi Hawad, thence to Hafir Giriaa of Debbaghat and south of Id Gerasa. From here the line divides the cultivation of the Ababda (Berber) from the Batahin (Blue Nile Province), the boundary passing through the following hafirs and hills to Hagar El Asal on the Nile, viz.: Dunieib, Kadabona, Shueir, Salmaniat, Um Serya, El Surat, Geiliat, Wad Kambelawi, J. Ganatir; it crosses the S.G.R. at mile post 515.
From Hagar El Asal the line crosses the Nile to Meshra Lemeki, thence to J. Rueis to the eastern boundary of Dongola, the Hassania belonging to Berber and the Hawawir to Dongola.
[Sidenote: West.]
On the west the boundary is formed by the eastern boundaries of Halfa and Dongola Provinces, the whole of the Bisharin of the Atbai belonging to Berber.
DONGOLA.
[Sidenote: North.]
The northern boundary is the southern boundary of Halfa Province as far as its junction with the Berber boundary at a point due north of Berti.
[Sidenote: East.]
The eastern boundary runs due south to Berti on the Nile, thence southwards to Sani well (Dongola) and Jakdul (Berber), thence south-east to Gambar well, leaving the Sauarab and Hawawir to Dongola, the Monasir, and the Hassania to Berber, and the Geriat tribe and Gabra wells to Khartoum.
[Sidenote: South.]
From Gambar to Hobagi and thence due west to the eastern frontier of Dongola.
[Sidenote: West.]
The western boundary includes the Arbain road from Lagia wells (Halfa) to the northern frontier of Darfur.
GEZIRA[257] (BLUE NILE).
[Sidenote: North.]
The northern boundary is the southern boundary of the Berber Province from Hafirs Kambelawi and Wad Edeid El Sid to Wadi Faragalla.
[Sidenote: East.]
From Wadi Faragalla to Ein El Lueiga on the Rahad the boundary is the same as that detailed as the western boundary of Kassala. From Ein El Lueiga down the thalweg of the Rahad to Abu Haraz, thence down the thalweg of the Blue Nile to a point 2 miles south of Fadasi Amarab on the left bank.
[Sidenote: South.]
From this spot in a westerly direction, including Talha, Fares, Wad Kerar, Telub, Um Dueina, Zahara, to Kremet El Mogharba; then in southerly direction west of the villages Wad Haleo and Abu Dign; then south-east, between Barh El Din and Gebelia; then south, leaving Teleih on the west and Um Hamra and El Homr on the east; then south-south-west to J. Atshan.
[Sidenote: West.]
The eastern boundary of Khartoum Province from Hafir Kambelawi to Soba, thence to a point half-way to Meshra Abadam on the White Nile. Thence the boundary runs to J. Atshan as detailed in eastern boundary of White Nile Province.
HALFA.
[Sidenote: North.]
Faras is the northern boundary on the Nile; on the left bank the boundary includes the oasis of Sheb, Nakhia, etc., and on the right bank runs due east along the 22nd parallel until it meets the 33rd meridian.
[Sidenote: East.]
From the eastern extremity of the northern boundary the line runs due south to Murrat wells leaving the desert tribes to Berber, thence in a south-west direction across the railway, a few miles north of No. 6 Station, to Abu Fatma on the right bank of the Nile.
[Sidenote: South.]
From Abu Fatma the southern boundary runs westwards to Lagia which belongs to Halfa.
[Sidenote: West.]
The western boundary includes the oasis of Lagia, Selima, and Sheb on the Arbain road.
KASSALA.
[Sidenote: North.]
The southern boundary of Suakin Province.
[Sidenote: East.]
The Sudan-Eritrea frontier from the junction of K. Ambakta and K. Baraka to R. Setit opposite the junction of Khor Royan; thence the Sudan-Abyssinia frontier to J. Madbara (south of Gallabat).
[Sidenote: South.]
From J. Madbara along the Abyssinian frontier to the R. Rahad, thence down the thalweg of that river to Ein El Lueiga.
[Sidenote: West.]
The eastern boundary of Berber Province from Tendera (Kassala) to Mitateb (Kassala) and thence viâ J. Kelitawi to Wadi Faragalla. From this point southwards to J. Daein, leaving Geili (Blue Nile Province) to the west, and thence to Hafir Sueih, J. Nasub, J. Arafi, J. Geriya to Ein El Lueiga (Kassala) on the Rahad.
KHARTOUM.
[Sidenote: North.]
The southern boundary of Berber from the Wadi Mogaddam (W. El Melh)[258] viâ J. Rueis to Hagar El Asal.
[Sidenote: East.]
From Hagar El Asal the boundary runs to mile post 515 on the railway, thence through J. Ganatir to the Hafirs of Kambelawi and Wad Edeid El Sid, 35 miles east of the Nile, thence south to Jebel Dura, and thence to Soba on the Blue Nile, thence straight across the Gezira to Meshra Abadam on the White Nile.
[Sidenote: South.]
Meshra Abadam to J. Medaha to Fatasha well (Khartoum).
[Sidenote: West.]
From junction of W. El Melh with W. Mogaddam; leaving the whole of the Geriat tribe and Gabra wells to Khartoum, the boundary runs south to J. El Sufar, thence to Fatasha.
KORDOFAN.
[Sidenote: North.]
The southern frontier of Dongola.
[Sidenote: East.]
The western frontier of Khartoum, White Nile, and Upper Nile Provinces. The Selim Baggara, who live on left bank near Jebelein and further south, belong to the Upper Nile Province. From the south of Dar El Ahamda (White Nile Province) the boundary includes the Aulad Hemeid tribe and runs to Fungor (Kordofan), thence to Lake No.
[Sidenote: South.]
From Lake No up the Thalweg of the Bahr El Ghazal and roughly westwards along the 9° parallel. Sultan Rob and Dar Jange belonging to Kordofan.
[Sidenote: West.]
The western boundary is the eastern frontier of Darfur, which leaves Um Badr and Foga to Kordofan and Kaja Serrug to Darfur, thence in a south-westerly direction to Dam Jamad, thence southwards, leaving Zernak, Um Bahr, Tom Wad Zarag, Gad El Habub and Sherafa to Kordofan. Thence southwards to the Bahr El Arab, leaving the Maalia and Rizeigat to Darfur, and the Homr and Dar Jange to Kordofan.
SENNAR.[259]
[Sidenote: North.]
The boundary of the Gezira (Blue Nile) Province from Ein El Lueiga to a point on the left bank of the Blue Nile two miles south of Fadasi Amarab.
[Sidenote: East.]
The thalweg of the Rahad from Ein El Lueiga to the Abyssinian frontier, thence the Abyssinian frontier to the K. Yabus south of Kirin.
[Sidenote: South.]
Not settled, but roughly the parallel 10° N. Lat.
[Sidenote: West.]
The southern boundary of the Gezira (Blue Nile) Province, from Fadasi Amarab to J. Atshan, and thence southwards, leaving the Segadi-Moya-Gule road to Sennar, to Jebel Gerauid, and thence to about the intersection of 33° E. Long. with 10° N. Lat.
SUAKIN.
[Sidenote: North.]
The northern portion of the eastern boundary of Berber Province.
[Sidenote: East.]
The Red Sea.
[Sidenote: South.]
The Eritrean frontier from Ras Kasar to the junction of the Ambakta and Baraka Khors, thence down the Khor Baraka to the junction of the Khor Langeb, thence up the Khor Langeb to the junction of the Khor Dageint, thence to Bir Tihamrori in Khor Derudeb, thence to Bir Tendera (Kassala).
[Sidenote: West.]
The eastern boundary of Berber Province.
UPPER NILE.
[Sidenote: North.]
Jebelein.
[Sidenote: East.]
The western and southern boundary of Sennar, thence the Abyssinian frontier to Uganda (5° N. Lat.)
[Sidenote: South.]
N. parallel 5°.
[Sidenote: West.]
The eastern frontier of Kordofan from Jebelein to Lake No, thence the left bank of the Bahr El Jebel to N. Lat. 5° 30′, including the Aliab and western Baris. Shambe and its immediate vicinity belongs to the Bahr El Ghazal Province.
WHITE NILE PROVINCE.
[Sidenote: North.]
From Meshra Abadam on the White Nile (13 miles south of Khartoum) to a point about half-way between it and Soba on the Blue Nile.
[Sidenote: East.]
From the abovementioned point, the eastern boundary runs in a S.S.W. direction, leaving El Sid Wad Isa, Wad El Eiselat, El Sideira, Mahareiba, Um Seneita and Salim to the east (i.e. to Blue Nile Province), thence westwards round N. end of Goz El Naga (Blue Nile Province) and southwards, leaving Abdel Majid, Hashaba, Hemedana and Faki Medawi to the west (i.e. to White Nile Province), thence westwards round N. of Tahamid (Blue Nile Province) and S.E. round N. of the Um Shadida (White Nile Province), west of Id Nibeihi (Blue Nile Province), and east of Baashiin and Ghefeil (White Nile Province). Thence due S.W. of Deshanat and Gemeil (Blue Nile Province) and east of Jebels El Duhum, Atshan, Gelata Gedad, and Byut (White Nile Province) to J. Mir, thence to the White Nile at Jebelein.
[Sidenote: South.]
Jebelein on the right bank of the White Nile, and on the left bank the southern boundary of Dar El Ahamda, the Selim Baggara Arabs belonging to the Upper Nile Province.
[Sidenote: West.]
From a point on the left bank of the White Nile opposite Meshra Abadam, the western boundary runs in a southerly direction west of J. Adara, east of J. Mandara, 7 miles E. of J. Menuk to Id Fatma (White Nile Province). Thence leaving El Lithi to the west, it includes the whole of Shageig hamlets and cultivation (White Nile Province), and runs south to Fulo Um Sunta (White Nile Province), 12 miles west of Id El Ud. From here line runs southwards, west of Bachi, Shat, and Zereiga, thence towards J. Kon, leaving Gowama and Baza villages to Kordofan and the Busata district and Beni Jerar tribe to White Nile Province. Thence to Um Kueika (White Nile Province), the whole of the Gimma and Mesellemia belonging to White Nile Province, and the whole of Gowama to Kordofan. From Um Kueika the line runs S.S.E. to about the intersection of N. Lat. 12° and E. Long. 32°, and thence due east to the White Nile, the whole of Dar El Ahamda belonging to White Nile Province, and the Selim Baggara to Upper Nile Province.
N.B.—The Shanabla and Kawahla who cultivate east of the frontier specified above belong to White Nile Province for purposes of “ushr” taxation.
[Footnote 257: In 1905 it is probable that Gezira Province will include Wad Medani and District. This will alter the detail of the Eastern and Southern boundaries.]
[Footnote 258: The Wadi El Melh joins the W. Mogaddam on the left bank 40 miles north of Gabra wells.]
[Footnote 259: In 1905 the Headquarters of Sennar Province will probably be at Senga, and Wad Medani will belong to Gezira. This change will alter the detail of the Northern and Western boundaries.]
=APPENDIX H.=
* * * * *
BIBLIOGRAPHY AND CARTOGRAPHY OF THE SUDAN.
The following lists do not pretend to be exhaustive: at the same time they contain the chief European works referring to the Sudan which may be of use for reference, etc.
Confidential Publications are marked *; particularly useful ones †.
I.D.W.O. — Intelligence Division, War Office, London.
(a) Official Publications.
Narrative of the Expedition to Dongola and Sennar, 1820-21. 1822.
† Report on the Proposed Railway between Wadi Halfa and Shendy; and the Ship Incline at the 1st Cataract. By Mr. Fowler. Cairo, 1873.
Reconnaissance from Berenice to Berber. By Col. R. E. Colston. Cairo, 1874.
† Survey of the White Nile. Lieutenants Watson and Chippendall. 1874.
† General Report on the Province of Kordofan. Col. Prout. Cairo, 1877.
Provinces of the Equator. Egyptian Staff. Cairo, 1877.
Psychrometrical Observations taken at Fascher, Darfour. By Col. E. S. Purdy. Cairo, 1877.
† Report on the Sudan. Lieut.-Col. Stewart. 1883 (Blue Book, Egypt, No. 11). 1883.
† The Nile above the 2nd Cataract. By Lieut.-Col. R. H. O’Grady Haly. 1884. Messrs. Harrison and Sons.
† Report on Egyptian Provinces of the Sudan, Red Sea and Equator. I.D.W.O. 1884. 3_s._ 6_d._
Parliamentary Papers respecting the Sudan Campaigns, 1884-1892:—
Correspondence respecting General Gordon’s Mission to Egypt, 1884.
Further Instructions to General Gordon, 1884.
Text of Proclamation of General Gordon to the Inhabitants of the Sudan. 1884.
Telegram relative to a British Force to be collected at Suakin, 1884.
Admiralty Telegrams relative to Affairs at Suakin, 1884.
Agreement between the Secretary of State for War and Messrs. Lucas and Aird for the Construction of a Line of Railway from Suakin towards Berber, 1885.
Papers relating to Withdrawal of Troops from Dongola, 1885.
Return of the Total Number of Cases of Sickness, Deaths, and Admissions to Hospital for Wounds in Action, 1885.
Relief of General Gordon. 1885.
Return showing the Approximate Distribution and Organisation of Medical Staff Corps during the Recent Campaign in Egypt and the Sudan, 1885.
Supplementary Estimate of H.M.’s Navy for the Year 1884-5.
Return of the Approximate Cost of the Military Expedition to Suakin. 1885.
Supplementary Estimate, 1884-5. Sum required to make good the deficiency in the provision made for the service of the Navy and Army during the year ending 31st March, 1885, owing to the non-payment by Egypt of the extra cost of the Army of Occupation. 1885.
Correspondence respecting the British Military operations in the Sudan. 1885.
Further correspondence respecting the British Military operations in the Sudan. 1885.
Nile Expedition casualties. 1885.
Return of the total sums spent by the Imperial and Indian Government on Naval and Military Operations in or connected with Egypt, since 1st January, 1882, to the present time; also return of the officers and men who have lost their lives, and of the number invalided home in consequence of our operations in Egypt between the above-mentioned dates. 1886.
Correspondence regarding the claims of the Egyptian Government and counter-claims of the British Government arising from the operations in the Sudan, etc. 1887.
Despatch addressed to Sir H. D. Wolff by Lieut.-Col. Parr, from the Headquarters of the Egyptian Army at Cairo, relative to the efficiency and gallantry of the native Egyptian Troops. 1887.
Correspondence respecting affairs at Suakin. 1888.
Further correspondence respecting the affairs at Suakin. 1888, 1889.
Correspondence respecting Military Operations in Egypt and the Sudan. 1882-89.
Correspondence respecting the re-occupation of Tokar by the Egyptian Government. 1892.
Correspondence respecting the Valley of the Upper Nile, 1898.
Rapport à S. E. le Ministre des Finances sur le règlement des comptes pour le service postal de l’armée d’expédition au Soudan. Cairo, 1885.
Camel Mounted Infantry. Cairo, 1886.
† History of the Sudan Campaign, 1884-85. By Col. Colvile. 2 vols. 1889. 15_s._
† Perennial Irrigation. By W. Willcocks. 1894.
† The Map of Africa by Treaty. By Sir E. Hertslet. 1893.
Catalogue of the War Office Library and Accessions to Ditto. 1893-1896.
† Report on the Nile and Country between Dongola, Suakin, Kassala and Omdurman. Capt. Count Gleichen, I.D.W.O. 2 Editions, 1897 and 1898. 4_s._ 6_d._
† Handbook of the Sudan. Capt. Count Gleichen. I.D.W.O. 1898. 2_s._
*† Intelligence Reports—Egypt. Compiled by Intelligence Department, Egyptian Army. 1891-1898. Printed by I.D.W.O.
*† Précis of Events on the Upper Nile, 1878-98. Foreign Office.
† Annual Report on Egypt and the Sudan. British Agent and Consul-General. 1899 to date. Issued by Foreign Office. Price varies.
*† Intelligence Reports—Sudan. Compiled by the Intelligence Department, Egyptian Army. 1899 to date. Printed by I.D.W.O.
† Supplement to Handbook of the Sudan. Major Count Gleichen. I.D.W.O. 1899. 2_s._ 6_d._
† Report on the Sudan. Sir W. Garstin (Blue Book, Egypt, No. 5). 1899.
The Sudan Code of Criminal Procedure. 1899.
The Sudan Code of Criminal Procedure. Instructions to Officers in Civil Employment. 1899.
The Sudan Penal Code. 1899.
† Red Sea Pilot. Admiralty. 1900. 3_s._ 6_d._
Sudan Military Railways. Traffic Regulations. 1900.
Regulations for the Government of Sudan Prisons. 1901.
† Report on the Forests of the Sudan. By E. C. Muriel. 1901.
Regulations for the Examination in Arabic and Law of Civilian Officials serving in the Sudan Civil Administration. 1901.
† Rules of Orthography for Native Names of Places, Persons, etc., in Egypt and the Sudan. 1901. Price P.T.3.
† Instructions for Destruction of Locusts, White Ants and Mosquitos in the Sudan. 1901.
† Report as to Irrigation Projects on the Upper Nile, etc., with 12 maps. Sir W. Garstin (Blue Book, Egypt, No. 2), 1901. 3_s._ 6_d._
† Report on the Woods and Forests of the Sudan. By A. F. Broun. 1902.
† Notes for Travellers and Sportsmen in the Sudan. Agent-General’s Sudan Government Office, Cairo. 1902. Price 1_s._ Corrected annually to date. Supplement to Ditto. Price P.T.1.
† Notes on Outfit. Agent-Genera’s Sudan Government Office, Cairo. 1902. P.T.2.
† Report on Cultivable Products of the Sudan. By W. W. A. Fitzgerald. Agent-General’s Office, Cairo. 1903.
Mining and Prospecting Licenses in the Sudan. 1903.
London Convention. Africa. Game.
Budget of the Sudan. Annual.
Catalogue of the War Office, Cairo, Library. (Up to date). (In the Press.)
† Sudan Almanac. Intelligence Department, Cairo. Annual. P.T.5.
*† Foreign Office and various Despatches and Prints. Blue Books—Egypt, Africa and Uganda.
Report on the Wellcome Research Laboratories. Gordon College. 1904.
† Report on the Basin of the Upper Nile. Sir W. Garstin. Egypt. Blue Book No. 2, 1904. 17_s._ (with numerous diagrams and illustrations).
* Annual Reports of Mudirs of Provinces.
Sudan Finance Reports. (Annual).
Sudan Government Telegraphs—Regulations and Tariffs.
Sudan Ordinances, viz.:—
An Ordinance for Setting Questions as to Lands situated within the Towns of Khartoum, Berber, and Dongola, and for providing for the laying out and re-building of the said towns. 1899.
An Ordinance for Settling Disputes as to Land and for the Registration of Titles. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Land and Date Tax. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Royalties on Gum, Ostrich Feathers, Ivory, and India-rubber. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Carrying of Fire-arms. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating and Licensing the Sale of Alcoholic Liquors. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating the House Tax. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Boat Tax. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating and Licensing the Occupation of Auctioneer and Pedlar. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating the application of General Laws and Regulations to the Districts of Wadi-Halfa and Suakin. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Herd Tax. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Prospecting for Metals, Minerals, etc. 1899.
An Ordinance for Providing for the Deportation of Offenders from the Sudan. 1899.
An Ordinance for Regulating Public Ferries, 1900. Repealing the 1899 Ordinance.
An Ordinance for Sudan Civil Justice. 1900.
An Ordinance for Extending the time within which Allottees of Land at Khartoum and Berber are required to erect Buildings. 1901.
An Ordinance for Amending the Land Tax Ordinance, 1899. 1901.
An Ordinance for Providing that the Royalty taken on Gum, Ostrich Feathers, Ivory and India-rubber, shall be taken in Money. 1901.
An Ordinance for Imposing and Regulating a Tax upon Animals. 1901.
An Ordinance for the Preservation of Wild Animals and Birds, 1903. Repealing the 1901 Ordinance.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Levying of Tribute. 1901.
An Ordinance for Regulating Woods and Forests. 1901.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Position of Civil Judges. 1901.
An Ordinance for Dealing with the Cattle Plague. 1901.
An Ordinance for Egyptian Judgments. 1901.
An Ordinance for Preventing and Regulating the Introduction of Contraband Goods in the Sudan. 1902.
An Ordinance for Regulating Liquor Licences. 1902.
An Ordinance for Licensing Seal Engravers and for the Registration of Seals. 1902.
An Ordinance for the Acquisition of Land for Public Purposes. 1903.
An Ordinance for Amending the Taxation of Animals Ordinance, 1901. 1903.
An Ordinance for Amending the Title of Lands Ordinance, 1899. 1903.
An Ordinance for Amending the Royalties on Gum, etc., Ordinance, 1899. 1903.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Manufacture and Sale of native Liquors. 1903.
An Ordinance for the Detection and Punishment of Adulteration of India-rubber and Gutta-percha. 1903.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Storage of Petroleum and other substances of a like nature. 1903.
An Ordinance for Regulating the Carrying of Fire-arms, 1903. Repealing the 1899 Ordinance.
Railway Ordinance. 1904.
Kassala and Kordofan Town Lands Ordinance. 1904.
Egyptian Judgments Ordinance, 1904. Amending 1901 Ordinance.
Suakin Town Land Registration Ordinance, 1904.
(b.) Unofficial Publications.
[Publ. Price.: Publishing Price.]
---------------+-------------+-----+-------------+------+------------- Name of Work. | Author. |Date.| Publisher. |Publ. | Remarks. | | | |Price.| ---------------+-------------+-----+-------------+------+------------- †The |Prince |1886 |Trübner & | | Literature of |Ibrahim-Hilmy| |Co., London. | | Egypt and the | | | | | Sudan | | | | | | | | | | A Journey to |Poncet |1698 | — | — |Sketchy. the Courts of | | | | | Sennar and | | | | | Abyssinia | | | | | | | | | | Nouveau |W. G. Browne |1800 |Dentu, Paris | — |No great voyage dans | | | | |value. la Haute et | | | | | Basse Égypte, | | | | | la Syrie, le | | | | | Darfour | | | | | | | | | | Travels in |J. L. |1819 |J. Murray, | — |Valuable Nubia |Burckhardt | |London. | |historically. | | | | | Narrative of |G. Belzoni |1821 |J. Murray, | | the Operations | | |London. | | and Recent | | | | | Discoveries in | | | | | Egypt and Nubia| | | | | | | | | | Notes during |Sir F. |1823 |J. Murray, | | a Visit to |Henniker | |London. | | Egypt, Nubia, | | | | | the Oasis, | | | | | Mount Sinai, | | | | | and Jerusalem | | | | | | | | | | †Voyage à |F. Cailliaud |1826 |Imprimerie | — |With atlas Méroé, etc. | | |Royale, Paris| |and plates; | | | | |valuable. | | | | | Relation |Ferlini |1834 | — | — |Treasure at Historique, | | | | |Meroe. etc. | | | | | | | | | | †Reisen in |Russegger |1838 |Vienna (?) | — |16 vols, Nubien, etc. | | | | |60 maps; | | | | |scarce. | | | | |There is an | | | | |abridged | | | | |edition. | | | | |Valuable. | | | | | Premier voyage |Capt. Selim |1842 |C. A. | | à la recherche | | |Bertrand, | | des sources du | | |Paris. | | Nil Blanc | | | | | | | | | | Voyage au |Cheykh Mohd. |1845 |B. Duprat, | — |Interesting. Darfour |Ebn-Omar | |Paris | | |El-Tounsy | | | | | | | | | Voyage en |E. Combes |1846 |Desessart, | | Égypte, en | | |Paris. | | Nubie | | | | | | | | | | †Expedition to |F. Werne |1849 |London. | | discover the | | | | | Sources of the | | | | | White Nile, | | | | | 1840-41 | | | | | | | | | | †Denkmäler aus |R. Lepsius |1849 | — | — |Valuable; Aegypten, etc. | | | | |500 plates. | | | | | Le Désert et |Cte. |1853 |J. Dumaine, | | le Soudan |d’Escayrac | |Paris. | | |de Lauture | | | | | | | | | Mémoire sur le |Cte. |1855-|A. Bertrand, | | Soudan |d’Escayrac |1856 |Paris. | | |de Lauture | | | | | | | | | †Travels and |H. Barth |1857 |London | — |Useful. Discoveries | | | | | in North and | | | | | Central Africa | | | | | | | | | | Étude sur la |H. Fournel |1857 |B. Duprat, | | Conquête de | | |Paris. | | l’Afrique par | | | | | les Arabes | | | | | | | | | | †Travels in |J. Petherick |1862 |London | — |Useful. Central Africa | | | | |Ghazal. | | | | | †Journal of |Capt. J. H. |1864 |Edinburgh. | | the Discovery |Speke | | | | of the Source | | | | | of the Nile | | | | | | | | | | What led to |Capt. J. H. |1864 |W. Blackwood | | the Discovery |Speke | |& Sons, | | of the Source | | |Edinburgh. | | of the Nile | | | | | | | | | | †A Walk across |Grant |1864 | | | Africa | | | | | | | | | | Voyage aux |G. Lejean |1865 |L. Hachette | — |With atlas; deux Nils | | |& Co., Paris | |detailed, | | | | |but not | | | | |accurate. | | | | | L’Égypte, la |Dr. Stacquez |1865 |Imprimerie | | Basse Nubie et | | |de L. | | le Sinai | | |Grandmont | | | | |Donders, | | | | |Liège. | | | | | | | Skizze der |Hartmann |1866 |Berlin. | | Nilländer | | | | | | | | | | Sul N’Yanza |M. Erizzo |1866 |G. | | Alberto | | |Antonnelli, | | | | |Venice. | | | | | | | †The Nile |Sir S. W. |1867 |MacMillan & | | Tributaries of |Baker | |Co., London. | | Abyssinia | | | | | | | | | | †Discovery of |Sir S. W. |1868 |MacMillan & | | the Albert |Baker | |Co., London. | | Nyanza | | | | | | | | | | Travels in |Hon. C. L. |1868 |J. Murray, | | Egypt and |Irby and J. | |London. | | Nubia, Syria |Mangles | | | | and the Holy | | | | | Land | | | | | | | | | | Les jardins et |G. |1870 |Imprimerie | | les champs de |Delchevalerie| |C. Annoot- | | la vallée du | | |Braeckmann, | | Nil | | |Gand. | | | | | | | †The Heart of |Dr. G. |1871 |Sampson, Low |7_s._ |Useful. Africa |Schweinfurth | |& Co., London| | | | | | | Vocabulaire de |Dr. Perron |1874 |Imprimerie | | la langue du | | |de | | Darfour | | |l’État-major,| | | | |Cairo. | | | | | | | †Reise in der |E. Marno |1875 | — | — |Useful. Egyptischen | | | | | Aequatorial- | | | | | Provinz und in | | | | | Kordofan | | | | | | | | | | †Reisebriefe |E. Marno |1875 |Wien. | — |Useful. vom oberen Nil | | | | | | | | | | Central Africa |Col. C. C. |1876 |London. | | |Long | | | | | | | | | Life with the |A. B. R. |1876 |Smith & Co., | | Hamran Arabs |Myers | |London. | | | | | | | Dell’ arrivo |C. Piaggia |1877 |Lucca. | | fra i | | | | | Niam-Niam e | | | | | del soggiorno | | | | | sul lago Tzana | | | | | in Abissinia | | | | | | | | | | Reisen und |K. Zoppritz |1877 |J. Perthes, | | Forschungen im | | |Gotha. | | Gebiete des | | | | | Weissen und | | | | | Blauen Nil | | | | | | | | | | †The Cradle of |E. A. de |1877 |J. Murray, | | the Blue Nile |Cosson | |London. | | | | | | | †Reisen im |E. Marno |1880 | — | — |Useful. Gebiete des Nil| | | | | | | | | | Nubische |Lepsius |1880 | — | | Gramatik | | | | | | | | | | Incidents of |F. Ensor |1881 |London. | | a Journey | | | | | through Nubia | | | | | and Darfur | | | | | | | | | | †Col. Gordon |G. B. Hill |1881 |T. de la | | in Central | | |Rue & Co., | | Africa, 1874-79| | |London. | | | | | | | To the Central |J. Thomson |1881 |Sampson, | | African Lakes | | |Low & Co., | | and back | | |London. | | | | | | | †Uganda and |Rev. C. T. |1882 |London. | | the Egyptian |Wilson and | | | | Sudan |R. W. Felkin | | | | | | | | | †Wild Tribes |F. L James |1883 |J. Murray, | — |Useful. of the Soudan | | |London | | | | | | | Itinéraire | — |1883 |Typo- | | de Souakin à | | |Lithographie,| | Berber | | |V. Penasson, | | | | |Alexandria | | | | | | | Modern |L. Cust |1883 |London. | | Languages of | | | | | Africa | | | | | | | | | | The English in |Lieut.-Col. |1884 |W. H. Allen | | Egypt, England |Hennebert | |& Co., | | and the Mahdi | | |London. | | | | | | | My Wanderings |Mrs. Speedy |1884 |R. Bentley & | — |2 vols. in the Soudan | | |Son, London | | | | | | | Life in the |J. Williams |1884 |London. | | Soudan | | | | | | | | | | The Soudan and |The |1884 |W. H. Allen |6_d._ | the British |Patriotic | |& Co., London| | Ministry |Association | | | | | | | | | †Ismailia: |Sir S. W. |1884 |London | — |Useful. Expedition to |Baker | | | | Central Africa | | | | | | | | | | Letters from |F. Power |1885 |London. | | Khartoum | | | | | | | | | | Gordon and the | — |1885 |London. | | Mahdi | | | | | | | | | | The Sudan |Lieut. M. |1885 |London. | | Military |Nathan | | | | Railway | | | | | | | | | | †Report on |Nushi Pasha |1885 |Cairo | — |Arabic and Gordon and | | | | |English MS. the Fall of | | | | | Khartoum | | | | | | | | | | L’Afrique |E. Reclus |1885 |L. Hachette | 37 |Useful. Septentrionale | | |& Co., Paris | frs. | | | | | | With Hicks |Col. Hon. J. |1885 |Smith & Co., | | Pasha in the |Colborne | |London. | | Sudan | | | | | | | | | | Three Months |E. Sartorius |1885 |Kegan Paul & | | in the Soudan | | |Co., London. | | | | | | | †Egyptian |C. Royle |1886 |London | — |Useful. Campaigns, | | | | | 1882-1885 | | | | | | | | | | †La Confrérie |H. Duveyrier |1886 |Société de | — |Useful. Musulmane de | | |Géographie, | | Sidi Mohammed | | |Paris | | Ben ’Ali | | | | | Es-Senussi | | | | | | | | | | Les |A. Khlat |1886 |Khedivial | — |Arabic. Explorations | | |Geographical | | égyptiennes en | | |Society, | | Afrique | | |Cairo | | | | | | | †Journals of |A. E. Hake |1886 |Remington & | | General Gordon | | |Co., Paris. | | at Khartoum | | | | | | | | | | Suakin, 1885 |Major E. G. |1886 |Kegan Paul & | | |Parry | |Co., London. | | | | | | | Diario storico |G. B. |1883 |Typo- | | militare delle |Messedaglia | |Lithographie,| | Rivolte al | | |V. Penasson, | | Sudan, Dal | | |Alexandria | | 1878 in poi | | | | | | | | | | Charles Gordon |F. Grin |1886 |Fischbacher, | | | | |Paris. | | | | | | | Events in |H. W. Gordon |1886 |Kegan Paul & | | the Life of | | |Co., London. | | Charles George | | | | | Gordon | | | | | | | | | | Days and |Major E. A. |1886 |J. Murray, | | Nights of |de Cosson | |London. | | Service | | | | | with Sir G. | | | | | Graham’s Field | | | | | Force at Suakin| | | | | | | | | | †From Korti to |Sir C. W. |1886 |London | — |Useful. Khartoum |Wilson | | | | | | | | | La Tripolitaine|M. Fournel |1887 |C. Ainé, | | | | |Paris. | | | | | | | Too Late for |A. Macdonald |1887 |J. Murray, | | Gordon and | | |London. | | Khartoum | | | | | | | | | | The Story of |A. E. Hake |1887 |Remington & | | Chinese Gordon | | |Co., London. | | | | | | | The late |Capt. C. B. |1887 |Gale & |2_s._ | Battles in the |Mayne | |Polden, | | Sudan | | |Chatham | | | | | | | †Campaign of |Col. Sir W. |1887 |London. | | the Cataracts |F. Butler | | | | | | | | | Notes on |Major G. B. |1887 |Harrison & |3_s._ | Transport and |Burn | |Sons, London |6_d._ | Camel Corps | | | | | | | | | | Recent Events |W. H. D. |1887 |T. Nelson & |3_s._ | in the Soudan |Adams | |Sons, London |6_d._ | | | | | | Emin Pasha in |Mrs. R. W. |1888 |London. | | Central Africa |Felkin | | | | | | | | | With the Camel |Lieut. Count |1888 |Chapman & |9_s._ |Nile Corps up the |Gleichen | |Hall, London |6_d._ |Expedition, Nile | | | | |1884-85. | | | | | †’83 to’87 in |A. B. Wylde |1888 |London | — |Useful. the Sudan | | | | | | | | | | Chinese Gordon |A. Forbes |1889 |G. Routledge | | | | |& Sons, | | | | |London. | | | | | | | †Emin Pasha |J. |1890 |Sampson, Low | — |Useful. and the |Mounteney- | |& Co., London| | Rebellion at |Jephson | | | | the Equator | | | | | | | | | | †Chronological |Major F. R. |1890 |Harrison & | — |Useful. Index of |Wingate | |Sons, London | | Events in | | | | | the Sudan, | | | | | 1881-1889 | | | | | | | | | | †In Darkest |H. M. Stanley|1890 |Sampson, | | Africa | | |Low & Co., | | | | |London. | | | | | | | Travels and |H. Barth |1890 |London | — |Reprint. Discoveries | | | | | in North and | | | | | Central Africa | | | | | | | | | | Ten Years in |G. Casati |1891 |F. Warne & | | Equatoria | | |Co., London. | | | | | | | †Sette anni |Capt. M. |1891 |G. Chiesa | | nel Sudan |Camperio | |and F. | | Egiziano | | |Guindani, | | (Gessi) | | |Rome. | | | | | | | †Le Nil, |A. Chélu |1891 |G. Frères, | — |Useful; le Soudan, | | |Paris | |rather l’Égypte | | | | |inaccurate. | | | | | My Personal |T. H. Parke |1891 |Sampson, | | Experiences | | |Low & Co., | | in Equatorial | | |London. | | Africa | | | | | | | | | | The Other Side |H. R. F. |1891 |Chatto & | | of the Emin |Bourne | |Windus, | | Pasha Relief | | |London. | | Expedition | | | | | | | | | | †Herodotus |H. Cary |1891 |G. Bell & | | | | |Sons, London.| | | | | | | †Mahdism and |Major F. R. |1891 |MacMillan & | |Valuable. the Egyptian |Wingate | |Co., London | | Sudan | | | | | | | | | | Seven Years in |R. Gessi |1892 |London. | | the Sudan |Pasha | | | | | | | | | The Fate of | — |1892 |London | |“Edinburgh the Sudan | | | | |Review,” | | | | |January, | | | | |1892. | | | | | †Travels |Dr. W. Junker|1890-|Chapman & | £3 |Valuable. 3 in Africa, | |1892 |Hall, London |3_s._ |vols. 1879-1886 | | | | | | | | | | The Sudan Past |Major F. R. |1892 |Royal | | and Present |Wingate | |Artillery | | | | |Institution, | | | | |Woolwich. | | | | | | | Notice sur |J. Artin |1892 |Imprimerie | | quelques |Pacha | |Nationale, | | monnaies | | |Cairo. | | en argent | | | | | frappées à | | | | | Omme Dirman | | | | | (Soudan) | | | | | | | | | | Charles George |Col. Sir W. |1892 |Macmillan & | | Gordon |F. Butler | |Co., London. | | | | | | | The Ruin of |H. Russell |1892 |Macmillan & | | the Sudan | | |Co., London. | | | | | | | The Siege |Major F. R. |1892 |London | — |“United and Fall of |Wingate | | | |Service Khartoum | | | | |Magazine,” | | | | |1892. | | | | | The Rise and |Major F. R. |1892 |Woking | — |Proceedings Wane of the |Wingate | | | |of the Mahdi Religion | | | | |Oriental in the Sudan | | | | |Congress. | | | | | Notes on the |E. A. Floyer |1892 |London | — |“Journal Geology of | | | | |of the Northern Etbai | | | | |Geological | | | | |Society,” | | | | |November, | | | | |1892, Vol. | | | | |48. | | | | | La Chute de |Borelli-Bey |1893 |J. Barbier | | Khartoum 26 | | |Cairo. | | Janvier, 1885 | | | | | | | | | | Die |H. Frobenius |1893 |Berlin. | | Heiden-Neger | | | | | des | | | | | ägyptischen | | | | | Suda | | | | | | | | | | †Etude sur le |E. A. Floyer |1893 |Cairo | — |Valuable. Nord-Etbai | | | | | entre le Nil | | | | | et le Mer Rouge| | | | | | | | | | Guide to |Surgeon T. |1893 |London. | | Health in |H. Parke | | | | Africa | | | | | | | | | | Plus loin que |A. Excoffon |1893 |Jouvet & | | l’Oubanghi. | | |Co., Paris. | | Les Pères | | | | | Blancs en | | | | | Afrique | | | | | | | | | | The Dwellers |E. A. W. |1893 |The |2_s._ | on the Nile |Budge | |Religious | | | | |Tract | | | | |Society, | | | | |London | | | | | | | †England in |A. Milner |1893 |E. Arnold, | — |Valuable. Egypt | | |London | | | | | | | †Die Wahrheit |V. Hassan |1893 |D. Reimer, | 7 | über Emin | | |Berlin |marks.| Pascha | | | | | | | | | | Father |E. M. Clerke |1893 |M. H. Gill & | | Ohrwalder’s | | |Sons, London.| | Captivity | | | | | | | | | | La Région du |G. le Marinel|1893 |Paris. | | Haut Ubangi ou | | | | | Ubangi-Dua. | | | | | | | | | | Six semaines |M. E. Cotteau|1894 |L. Hachette | 50c. | sur le Nil | | |& Co., Paris | | | | | | | British Trade |A. B. Wylde |1894 |J. E. | | in the Soudan | | |Cornish, | | | | |Manchester. | | | | | | | Agordat |Col. Arimondi|1894 |V. Enrico, | | | | |Rome. | | | | | | | I Dervisci nel |Gen. L. Dal |1894 |V. Enrico, |Lire, | Sudan Egiziano |Verme | |Rome | 1.50 | | | | | | Mit Emin |Dr. F. |1894 |D. Reimer, | | Pascha ins |Stuhlmann | |Berlin. | | Herz von Afrika| | | | | | | | | | Révélations |L. I. Picard |1894 |A. | PT.3 | sur la | | |Costagliola, | | prochaine | | |Cairo | | campagne de | | | | | l’Angleterre | | | | | au Soudan | | | | | | | | | | The Mahdi |H. Caine |1894 |Longmans & |1_d._ | | | |Co., London | | | | | | | †The Camel: |Major A. G. |1894 |Longmans & | — |Useful. its Uses and |Leonard | |Co., London | | Management | | | | | | | | | | More about |“One who |1894 |R. Bentley & | | Gordon |knew him” | |Sons, London.| | | | | | | Sir Samuel |T. D. Murray |1895 |London. | | Baker: a Memoir|and A. S. | | | | |White | | | | | | | | | L’Égypte et le |H. Pensa |1895 |L. Hachette | | Soudan égyptien| | |& Co., Paris.| | | | | | | †Dictionary of |T. P. Hughes |1895 |W. H. Allen | — |Valuable. Islam | | |& Co., London| | | | | | | †Ten Years’ {|(Ohrwalder) |1892}| | | Captivity in {| | }|Sampson, Low | — |Useful and the Mahdi’s {|Major F. R. |1895}|& Co. | |interesting. Camp {|Wingate | }| | | | | | | | †The Partition |J. S. Keltie |1895 |E. Stanford, | — |Useful. of Africa | | |London | | | | | | | Communication |Cte. C. |1895 |Imprimerie | — |Journal sur la |Zaluski | |Nationale, | |officiel du Mahdisme et le | | |Cairo | |Gouvernement Soudan égyptien| | | | |égyptien, | | | | |No. 138. | | | | | †North Africa |A. H. Keane |1895 |E. Stanford, | | | | |London. | | | | | | | Les |Lieut.-Col. |1895 |H. C. La | | Expéditions |E. Septans | |Vaugelle, | | Anglaises en | | |Paris | | Afrique | | | | | | | | | | †Albert Nyanza |Sir S. W. |1896 |Macmillan & | — |Reprint. |Baker | |Co., London | | | | | | | The Story of |Mrs. E. L. |1897 |Smith, Elder |16_s._|Useful for the Church of |Butcher | |& Co., London| |ancient Egypt | | | | |history. | | | | | Towards |A. H. |1897 |A. D. Innes | | Khartoum |Atteridge | |& Co., | | | | |London. | | | | | | | Life of Gordon |H. D. Boulger|1897 |London. | | | | | | | Letters from |E. F. Knight |1897 |London. | | the Soudan | | | | | | | | | | †The Journals }| |1885}|Kegan Paul & | — |Valuable. of Major-Gen. }|A. E. Hake | }|Co., London | | C. G. Gordon }| |1898}| | | at Khartoum }| | | | | | | | | | †Fire and |Col. Rudolf |1896-|E. Arnold, |21_s._|Valuable and Sword in the |Slatin Pasha |1898 |London | |interesting; Soudan | | | | |English, | | | | |French, | | | | |German, | | | | |Italian. | | | | | Le Soudan |H. Dehérain |1898 | | | égyptien sous | | | | | Mehemet Ali | | | | | | | | | | †Campaigning |Lieut. S. |1898 |Methuen & | | on the Upper |Vandeleur | |Co., London. | | Nile and Niger | | | | | | | | | | Emin Pascha |G. Schweitzer|1898 |Berlin | — |Useful. | | | | | The Egyptian |H. S. L. |1898 |Macmillan & | | Sudan: Its |Alford and | |Co., London. | | Loss and |W. D. Sword | | | | Recovery | | | | | | | | | | Fachoda et le |P. Barré |1898 | | | Bahr el Ghazal | | | | | | | | | | Downfall of |E. N. Bennett|1898 | | | the Dervishes | | | | | | | | | | Sirdar and |B. Bennett |1898 |Chapman & |12_s._| Khalifa | | |Hall, London | | | | | | | †Egypt in the |D. A. Cameron|1898 |Smith, Elder | | Nineteen th | | |& Co., | | Century | | |London. | | | | | | | With Kitchener |G. W. |1898 |W. Blackwood | | to Khartoum |Steevens | |& Sons, | | | | |London. | | | | | | | From Cairo |H. D. Traill |1898 | | | to the Sudan | | | | | Frontier | | | | | | | | | | †The River War |W. S. |1899 |Longmans, |36_s._|Very good. |Churchill | |Green & Co., | | | | |London | | | | | | | La Question du |V. Collin |1899 | | | Haut Nil au | | | | | point de vue | | | | | Belge | | | | | | | | | | In the Mahdi’s |G. M. Fenn |1899 | | | Grasp | | | | | | | | | | A Prisoner of |G. Neufeld |1899 |G. Bell & | | the Khalifa | | |Sons, London.| | | | | | | Sudan Campaign |An Officer |1899 |Chapman & | | | | |Hall, London.| | | | | | | The Expansion |A. S. White |1899 |Methuen & |15_s._|Mostly of Egypt | | |Co., London | |statistics. | | | | | †Handbook for |J. Murray |1900 |E. Stanford, |15_s._| Travellers | | |London | | in Upper and | | | | | Lower Egypt | | | | | | | | | | Story of the |Rawlinson |1900 |Fisher Unwin | — |Useful. Nations (Egypt)| | | | | | | | | | African |Major A. J. |1900 |J. Murray, | | Incidents |Thruston | |London. | | (Egypt and | | | | | Unyoro) | | | | | | | | | | From the Cape |E. S. Grogan |1900 |Hurst & | — |Useful. to Cairo |and A. H. | |Blackett, | | |Sharp | |London | | | | | | | Die |H. Schäfer |1901 |Leipzig. | | Aethiopische | | | | | Königsinschrift| | | | | des Berliner | | | | | Museums | | | | | | | | | | †The Nile |Dr. W. Budge |1901 |T. Cook, | — |Useful. | | |Cairo. | | | | | | | †Vers Fachoda |C. Michel |1901 |P. Nourrit & | |(From | | |Co., Paris. | |Abyssinia). | | | | | Egypt and the |T. Cook & Son|1901-|T. Cook & | | Nile | | 02 |Son, Cairo | | | | | | | †Handbook for |K. Baedeker |1902 |K. Baedeker, | 15 | Travellers in | | |Leipzig |marks | Egypt | | | | | | | | | | †A History of |Dr. W. Budge |1902 |Kegan, Paul | — |Valuable for Egypt | | |& Co. London | |B.C. history. | | | | | †Amongst |Major H. H. |1902 | | | Swamps and |Austin | | | | Giants in | | | | | Equatorial | | | | | Africa | | | | | | | | | | †Geography of |H. W. Mardon |1902 |Blackie & | | Egypt and the | | |Son, London. | | Anglo-Egyptian | | | | | Sudan | | | | | | | | | | The Mines of |E. A. Floyer | — |Royal | | the Northern | | |Asiatic | | Etbai, or | | |Society | | of Northern | | |of Great | | Ethiopia | | |Britain and | | | | |Ireland. | | | | | | | Egypt and Nubia|J. A. St. | — |Chapman & | | |John | |Hall, London.| | | | | | | Le Nil | — | — |Société | | | | |d’Etudes du | | | | |Nil, Paris. | | | | | | | L’Afrique | — | — | — | — |Periodical. explorée et | | | | |Useful. Civilisée, | | | | | 1881-1885, etc.| | | | | | | | | | †The Nile |Sir H. |1903 | | | Quest; Story |Johnston | | | | of Explorations| | | | | | | | | | Discovery of |Lieut. |1903 | | | Lake Rudolf |Ludwig Von | | | | and Stefanie |Höhnel. | | | | by Count | | | | | Teleki’s | | | | | Expedition | | | | | | | | | | †The Binding |Hon. Sydney |1904 |E. Arnold, | | of the Nile |Peel. | |London. | | and New Sudan | | | | | | | | | | Aethiopien |W. Max Müller|1904 |Berlin. | | | | | | | †History of |Naum Bey |1904 |Cairo | — |In Arabic. the Sudan |Shoucair | | | | ---------------+-------------+-----+-------------+------+-------------
And numerous articles in Periodicals and Newspapers, especially:—
Bulletin du Comité de l’Afrique Française. (Paris.)
Mouvement Géographique. (A. J. Wauters, Brussels.)
Revue Française de l’Etranger et des Colonies. (Paris.)
Petermann’s Mittheilungen. (Justus Perthes, Gotha.)
The Geographical Journal. (Royal Geographical Society, London).
The Scottish Geographical Magazine. (Royal Scottish Geographical Society, Edinburgh.)
Journal of the African Society. (Macmillan and Co., London);
etc., etc., etc.
(c) Maps.
See Map Catalogue[260] of War Office Library, Cairo, for details.
For general maps the following are recommended:—
The Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. I.D.W.O., No. 1856, 1904. 1:4,000,000. (Latest and most up-to-date general map).
Afrika: Justus Perthes; 1892; Sections 6-8. 1:4,000,000.
Stieler’s, or the Times, Atlas.
Berber to Victoria Nyanza. I.D.W.O., No. 1319, 1898. 1:2,500,000.
Nile Basin. I.D.W.O., No. 860, 1891-98. 1:611,434.
French Staff Map: good; 1:2,000,000.
[Sidenote: Ancient.]
[Sidenote: Modern.]
For old maps of particular portions, see reproductions of ancient maps in Scott Keltie’s “Partition of Africa,” Cailliaud’s Atlas (along the Nile); the same and Lepsius, for Antiquities; Lejean’s Atlas of Voyage aux deux Niles—somewhat inaccurate; Russegger—valuable mineralogical and other maps of east Sudan and Kordofan; Junker—chiefly Bahr El Ghazal and Eastern Sudan; and the recently published one of Marchand’s, etc., journeys—Bahr El Ghazal to Abyssinia, 4 sheets (published by the “Société de Géographie, Paris,” 1903. 1:1,000,000.)
Petermann’s Mittheilungen and other geographical periodicals occasionally contain good maps of portions.
The most modern and most accurate maps however are the series of Ordnance Survey Maps now being constructed by the Director of Surveys, Sudan Government, and printed and published by I.D.W.O. (No. 1489) on a, scale of 1:250,000 (about 4 miles to the inch). Of these, each covering 1 degree of latitude and 1½ of longitude, there are over 50 now on sale, out of about 140 projected. They can be obtained (price 1_s._ 6_d._ each) from the leading map-sellers in England, and exceptionally a few are to be had from the Director of Intelligence, Cairo.
A reference to the last pages of the Monthly British Army List will show all the I.D.W.O. sheets that have been published. At present they are as follows:—
Abba Island, Adarama, Akobo, Atbara, Beni Shangul, Boma, Debba, Doka, Dongola, El Obeid, El Safia, Fazogli, Gallabat, Gedaref, Geili, Goré, Jebelein, Kagmar, Kaka, Karkoj, Karora, Kassala, Keili, Khartoum, Khor Langeb, Kirin, Kosha, Lower Omo, Lower Sobat, Ma’atuk, Maman, Merowe, Middle Dinder, Middle Sobat, Mt. Lubur, Murrat, Musha, Nasser, Nogara, Renk, Rera, Roseires, Salmia, Senna, Setit, Shabluka, Shendi, Sinkat, Suakin, Talgwarab, Tokar, Wadi Halfa, Wadi Keheli, Wad Medani, Walega.
Index to above sheets, October, 1904. Scale 1/4000000. I.D. No. 1578. Price 1_s._ 6_d._
Sheets of the Sudan on the scale of 1/1000000 are now in the course of production.
[Footnote 260: In the press, 1904.]
=INDEX.=
* * * * *
=A.=
Aarakin Tribe, 119.
Aard Wolf, 307.
Aba Island, 58, 71, 244.
Abad, 91.
Abadaro, 125.
Ababda Tribe, 86, 91, 105; Nazir of, 98.
Abai (Blue Nile), 111.
Abaraga W., 92.
Abbassia Gedida, 59.
Abbas Pasha, 49, 91, 232.
Abbeinedu J., 289.
Abdalla Wad El Hassan, 119.
Abdanab, 125.
Abd el Kader, 244, 247.
Abd El Rahim Wad Abu Dugal, 104.
Abdin, 111.
Abesher Town, 189, 190, 217, 274, 276; French occupation (20th Dec., 1903), 184.
Abialang District, 129.
Abidia, 90; railway station, 214, 215; P.T.O., 219.
Abkor, 31.
“Abnus” tree, 151.
Aboir Tine, 183.
Abok (Goddess), 162.
Aborigines, 125, 187.
Ab Rumeila, 43.
Ab Tin Village, 43.
Ab Turki Island, 28.
Ab Zaroda, 125.
Abseit District, 32.
Abud District, 26, 117.
Abudiin Tribe, 93.
Abuldugu Hill, 120, 123.
Abu Anga, 106.
Abu Baguga Village, 204.
Abu Bakr, 41.
Abu Deleig District, 2, 103, 104; W., 104, 105; action (Feb., 1898), 104.
Abu Dis (railway station), 214.
Abu Dom Village, 32; W., 92.
Abu Dom Sanam, camp site, 34; village, 34.
Abu Egli, 40.
Abu Fatma, 26, 27, 85; British garrison (1885), 27.
Abu Gamal, 99.
Abu Gemai, 123.
Abu Gerad, 31.
Abu Girga, 261, 263.
Abu Gir, 208.
Abu Goloda, 90.
Abu Gulud, 100, 107.
Abu Gurud, 72; hill, 119.
Abu Gurun, 57.
Abu Gussi Village, 206; British garrison (1885), 31.
Abu Hagar, 53.
Abu Halfa Village, 204; W., 209.
Abu Hamed, 7, 17, 27, 35-47, 83, 86, 87, 88, 91, 93, 219; attack (1897), 35; taken (7th Aug., 1897), 44; railway station, 214, 217; P.T.O., 219; battlefield, 214; from Old Merowe, 42-44; to Khartoum, 44-47; railway to Halfa, 4, 7.
Abu Haraz, 36, 42, 103, 175, 177, 217.
Abu Hareira cotton, 113.
Abu Hashim District, 2; town, 44; rapid, 44, 109.
Abu Haweid W., 205; vel Haweid, Haweiya, 206.
Abu Hindi, 57.
Abu Hodeid Hills, 87.
Abu Homera tree, 140.
Abu Hussein Oasis, W., 202.
Abu Khamera tree, 158.
Abu Klea (Tleih) W., 210; battle, 248, 219.
Abu Kleiwat District, 32.
Abu Kuka, 21, 76, 82, 144.
Abu Lahm, 58.
Abu Naama District, 2, 113; village, 204.
Abu Rakhis, 113.
Abu Ramla, 109, 123.
Abu Rannat Island, 34.
Abu Rof Tribe (Arab), 103, 129.
Abu Sari, 22, 25, 26, 83.
Abu Saud, 234.
Abu Sayal Cataract, 39.
Abu Selem, 37.
Abu Shaneina, 120, 125, 126.
Abu Shok, 177.
Abu Sillem Railway Station, 214.
Abu Sin, family of, 106.
Abu Sinum Hella, 183.
Abu Sir Cliff, 23.
Abu Siteib, 100.
Abu Surug tree, 155, 158.
Abu Tabag, 87, 92.
Abu Tabr, 174.
Abu Tleih, 210.
Abu Zabbat Swamp, 175, 182.
Abu Zeid, 20, 59, 71.
Abwong District, 217.
Abydos, 311.
Abyssinia (Ethiopia), 8, 9, 11, 70, 99, 100, 103, 122, 123, 132, 134, 137, 184; Southern, 15; South-Western, 16; Northern, 114, 217; Eastern, 217; King John of, 108; trade routes to, 217; history of, 117, 221-229, 252-259, 268-280; relations with Egypt, 236-242; English expedition, 236.
Abyssinian Frontier, 9, 13, 16, 67, 83, 96, 99-101, 107-109, 114-123, 131, 135, 141, 295; demarkation, 123; plateau, 131, 136, 217; hills, 15, 16, 19, 63, 100, 101, 131, 135, 138, 139; mountains, 110, 111, 114, 131-133; highlands, 137; territory, 122; rule, 123; flag, 108; horses, 98, 120; ponies, 130, 182, 217; donkeys, 107, 218; outlaws, 100; “Razzias,” 138.
Abyssinians, 98, 100, 106, 107, 108, 113, 120, 135, 139, 152; “Makada” (“slaves”), 108.
Abyssinia-Eritrean Frontier, 298.
Acacia Arabica, 12, 208.
Acacia Ehrenbergii, 12.
Acacia Melifera, 13.
Acacia Nubica, 13.
Acacia Sayal, 12, 87, 88, 103, 109, 181.
Acacia Spirocarpa, 12, 181.
Acacia Tortilis, 12.
Acacia Verek, 12, 13.
Acacias, 29, 39, 44, 47, 54, 56, 58, 59, 68, 76, 88, 113, 158, 173, 204, 208; grey gum, 173, 177; thorny, 208.
Adam Rigal, 189.
Adansonia digitata, 13, 185; bark and fruit, 125, 175, 176, 181, 185.
Adarama, 96, 97, 103, 104.
Adarsi, 125.
Addax (antelope), 183, 202, 206, 308.
Addis Ababa, 50, 98.
Addra Gazelle, 183, 308.
Aden, 94, 219.
Adjutant stork, 309.
Adjouaro, 136.
Adjouba, 136.
Adlan, 229, 231.
Adlan Wad Surur, 122.
“Adlib” bush, 88.
Administration, 1, 2, 4, 9, 10, 23, 79, 85, 93, 123, 154, 189; Egypt, 93; Darfur, 189; Shillucks, 196; of army, 34.
Adobana Harbour, 96.
Adoloiab Tribe, 92.
Adornments (native), 135-138, 145, 155, 160; anklets, 155; arm rings, 194; bracelets, 134, 135, 140, 145, 156, 160; silver ornaments, 178; tattooing, 79.
Adua, 238.
Adura River (loop of Baro), 132, 136.
Affat District, 32.
African Kingdoms (ancient), 184, 226.
Agabar Village, 125.
“Agabas,” 89, 90, 95.
Agaliin Tribe, 109, 110.
Agang, 62.
Agaru Mt., 123.
Agent-General and Director of Intelligence, 3; British, 10, 213, 215.
Ageir Dinka Tribe, 66.
Agibba, 136, 137, 142, 151, 152.
Agik, 95, 96; harbour, 96.
Agnesa, 291.
Agordat, 257.
Agreement, Anglo-French (March, 1899), 1, 2; British-Egyptian, Administration of Sudan (19th Jan., 1899), 10, 283; Sudan-Eritrea-Abyssinia, 291; Sudan-Eritrea, 289.
Agriculture and Lands, Director of, 3.
Agricultural products, 7; implements, 84, 105.
Aguzzo Mt. (v. Naita, Etua), 149.
Agweim Dinka Tribe, 63.
Agwei R., 136, 137, 151.
Ahamda Tribe, 104.
Ahmed Abu Ghazali, 274-277.
Ahmed, 186.
Ahmed Agha, 62, 120.
Ahmed El Makur (K. of Darfur), 184, 186.
Ahmed Fedil, 60, 63, 106, 122.
Ahmed Mohammed Abu Sin, 104.
Aiet R., 288.
Ailet, 236, 238.
Ain El Bir Village (deserted), 204.
Aitara R., 289.
Ai-yak (goddess), 162.
Ajak Village, 66.
Ajibur R. (vel Ruzi I.), 137, 138, 148; valley, 148.
Ajiung, 142, 143.
Ajok Village, 67.
Ajuba R., 138.
Ajungmir Village, 134.
“Akan,” 158.
Akareirirba Hills, 89.
Akasha Village, 22, 25, 35, 85; occupied (April, 1896), 25, 35, 85; camp (1896), 86, 88; railway station, 215.
“Akingedo” (greeting), 145.
Akobo R. (vel Juba), 16, 136, 137, 138, 141, 148, 149, 151, 152, 295; loop of, 137.
Akorwen, 64.
Akri Village, 28.
Akurwa, 193.
Akwai Chakab, 129.
Alagi R., 86, 91, 92.
Ala Takura, 296.
Albert Lake (Nyanza), 15, 21, 81, 232-239, 259-261, 280.
Albert-Edward Lake, 15.
Aldrovandia, 303.
Allal District, 63.
Alluvial (soil), 28, 30, 33, 38, 49, 73, 83, 87, 100, 101, 117, 131, 141, 153, 160.
Aliab Railway Station, 214.
Aliab Tribe, 79, 91, 92, 105, 145.
Aliab Dok (vel Hellet El Nuer), 74.
Ali, 91, 186.
Ali Bey, 148.
Ali Dinar, 189.
Ali Wad Rowaa, 125.
Alikori (chief of tribe), 147, 148.
Altitudes, 68, 81, 86, 87, 94, 95, 97-127, 150-153, 173, 181, 183-185, 208, 209.
Alula, Ras, 242, 243.
Alumbal, 64.
Aluro R. (vel Anuak), 136.
Aiwa (Soba), 226-228.
“Amal” sheep, 145.
Amar, 91.
Amara, 22, 25, 26, 55, 118, 119, 213.
Amarar Island, 86.
Amarar Tribe, 91, 96; country, 87.
Amari Village, 36.
Amarna Tribe, 118.
Amasis, 222.
“Ambach,” 20, 59, 70, 73, 75, 140, 157, 165; canoes, 21, 216; construction of, 216.
Ambakta R., 289.
Ambassa, 104.
Ambugol, 27, 33, 35, 36, 208-210, 213; rapid, 24; town, 27; railway station, 215; vel Ambokol, 208, 209.
Amenemhat, 222.
Amenhotep, 222, 223.
Amenophis, 222.
Amentogo Village, 30.
Amerab Tribe, 97.
American Prot. Mission Station, 11, 70, 192.
Ametha Village, 139.
Amka Cataract, 17.
Ammunition, 2, 36, 37, 179, 180.
Amora, 125.
Amr, 227.
Amrab Tribe, 91-93; country, 87.
Amras, 42.
Amri Island, 39, 208.
Amwot el-Sogheir, 140.
Anæmia, 157.
Anchorage, 95, 96.
Anglo-Egyptian Expedition (10.9.98), 68; flags, 117; force, 85; lease (1902) trading station, 135; treaty (1902) with Abyssinia, 135.
Angareb R., 100, 101.
Angariab Tribe, 83.
“Angarib” (bedstead), 181.
Augites, granite, 210.
Ankylosis, 157.
Animals, 199, 207; tax, 4, 189; products, 7; wild, 12, 138, 157, 182, 206.
Anogeissus leiocarpus, 13.
Anok, 63.
Anopheles theory, 120.
Ant bear, 308.
Antelope, 173, 183, 197, 300; Roan, 88, 110, 120, 151, 161, 182, 308; Addax, 183, 202, 206.
Antiquities, 103, 104, 105; carvings, 104; drawings, 40; crushing stones, 211; inscriptions, 30, 104, 203; detail list of, 311-316.
Anuak R. (vel Aluro), 136.
Anuak Tribe, 131, 132, 134-139, 148, 151, 152; Yambos, 136.
Aonia Tribe, Arab, 105, 208.
Apes, 307.
Apocynaceous Creepers, 154.
“Apwamah” vel “Bih,” creeper, 154, 155.
Arab, battalion, 3, 97, 107, 109; encampment, 63, 205; settlement, 123; descent, Royal Family, Darfur, 185.
Arabs, 17, 54, 62, 64, 66, 83-88, 91-98, 101, 103, 104, 125, 130, 178, 179-183, 186, 187, 190, 196, 201, 203, 205-209; village Arabs, 178; Nomad Arabs, 96, 98, 103, 186, 207; Invasion of Egypt by, 217, 221.
Arab Hag Village, 30.
Arabia, 96, 221.
Arabian Road, 26.
Arabic, 11, 120, 122, 125, 155, 179, 180.
Arabi Dafaalla, 144, 145, 148.
“Arad” Acacia, 88.
Arak District, 34, 89; bush, 89.
Araki, 118.
Arakin Tribe, 118, 119.
Arbagi, 118; destroyed (18-19 Century), 119.
Arbain Road, 26, 185, 201-203; El Arbain Road, 217.
Areas, 1, 47, 106, 107, 117, 141, 153, 175, 184, 201.
“Ardeb” (300 lbs.), 36, 49, 84, 88, 104.
“Ardeib” tree, 108, 114, 157, 158.
Ardeib El Miriam District, 66.
Ardi El Monfok Village, see Ordi El Monfok.
Arduan Island, 26.
Areirib River, 289.
Arendrup, Col., 238.
Argi Island, 31.
Argin, 253.
Argo, district, 2; island, 27; “king” of, 27.
Ariab W., 90.
Arid (country), 85, 86, 185, 201; unfertile, 103.
Ariel, 88, 96, 107, 110, 183, 308.
Arimondi, Col., 259.
Armbruster, Mr., 115.
Arms, and native weapons, 2, 36, 122, 145, 149, 160, 179, 180; sword, 122, 179; scabbards, 88; shields, 134, 140, 149, 179, 180, 192; arrows, 122, 134, 140, 145, 160; arrows, “Juet,” 145; bows, “Danga,” 145; bows, 122, 134, 140, 160; chain armour, 179; elbow knives, 160; knives, 148, 160; knobkerry, 126, 134, 135, 140, 180, 192; spears, 122, 126, 130, 134, 135, 140, 149, 160, 179, 180, 192, 194.
Armstrong, Capt., 277.
Army, Brit., of occupation, 3, 4; Egyptian, 3, 4, 252, 265; Darfur, 189; Officers as Magistrates, 9.
Arneti Island, 26.
Arteiga Tribe, 96.
“Artesian” Vents in Strata, 210.
Artimoga District, 32.
Artillery, 3, 47, 49, 105.
Artomonoff, Col., 70, 270.
“Asal” (honey), 107.
“Asal” blight (1902-3), 107.
“Asalia” (liquor), 108.
Asar, 107.
Asclepia gigantea, 209.
Aseri, 147.
Ashaf, 173.
Ashargo District, 196.
Ashel Village, 132.
Ashraf Tribe, 96, 98.
“Asida” (food), 176.
Asmara, 50.
Asobri, 108.
Asotriba Range, 87.
Ass, wild, 98, 307.
Assa, King, 221.
Assiut, 217.
Assosa, 122.
Assuan Dam, 15, 17; cataract, 17.
Asua R., 17, 21.
Asubri, 98-101, 104.
Aswan, 7, 15, 17, 19, 84, 88, 91, 93; north end, 215.
Atara, 196.
Atbai, The, 86-90, 92, 93.
Atbara R., 7, 15, 16, 19, 44, 45, 47, 50, 83, 86, 91, 96, 97, 99, 100, 101, 103, 104, 106-108, 111, 131, 184, 213, 214, 221, 254-259; railway station, 214.
Atem R. (vel Awai), 144.
Atiri Rapid, 24.
Atlas Mountains, 15.
“Atmurs” (wadis), 90.
“Atoitoish” (bird, fabulous), 162.
Attar R., 142.
Aturuk, 66.
Atwadoi Village and District, 193.
Auli Islands, 38.
Austin, Major, 67, 136, 137, 138, 148, 273, 274, 280; Expedition (1901), 136, 137.
Austrian R.C. Miss. Stn., 11, 68; abandoned (1864-5), 76; (1858), 81.
Automobiles (motors), 7, 213.
Automoloi, The, 224.
Awai R. (vel Atem), 144.
Awaida (Awaidia), Tribe, 104, 105.
Awarajok, district, 196; village, 197.
Awitong, 64.
Azalet Rocks, 20, 59.
Azande (A-Zande) Tribe, 162; (Nyam Nyams), 161.
Azhar Mosque, 10.
Azolla, 300, 303.
=B.=
“Babanus,” 13, 114.
Baboons, 99, 307.
Bacteriological Laboratory, 11.
Badin Island, 27, 83.
Baert, 261, 262.
Bagbag, 207.
Bagara Cataract, 17, 44; El Bagara Rapid, 44.
Baggara Tribe, Arab, 60, 126, 129, 156, 175, 181, 187; colony, 106; cattle owning, 178, 179; nomad, 178, 179, 181, 182, 187, 190; genealogy, 196, 334.
Baggara Selim, 59, 196.
Bahri Village, 30.
Bahr Azrak R. (Blue Nile), 111.
Bahr El Abiad R. (White Nile), 16, 142.
Bahr El Arab R., 16, 153, 154, 165, 167, 168, 179, 184, 185.
Bahr El Asfer R., 17, 68.
Bahr El Ghazal Province, 2, 3, 7, 9, 11, 13, 20, 21, 76, 129, 153-170, 178, 185, 197, 213, 216, 218, 260, 271-280, 299, 335; force of occupation, 16; re-occupation (1901), 153; Southern, 217; Mahdism in, 259; French advance into, 271, 272.
Bahr El Ghazal River, 15-18, 73-77, 111, 132, 153, 154, 162, 185, 197, 213, 216, 218, 262, 273-280, 299.
Bahr El Harami R. (branch of Blue Nile), 197.
Bahr EL Homr R., 16, 165, 169.
Bahr El Jebel R., 13, 15-19, 58, 70, 73-77, 79-81, 111, 122, 123, 131, 141-144, 148, 153, 165, 169, 218.
Bahr El Salam R., 100, 101; Upper, 100, 101.
Bahr El Salamat R., 185.
Bahr El Zaraf R. (Bahr El Zeraf), 15, 18, 70, 71, 73, 75, 76, 82, 111, 142, 143, 166.
Bahr Telgona R., 154.
Baja Island, 30.
Baker, Sir Samuel, 15, 16, 45, 81, 101, 107, 146, 232, 233, 303; headquarters (1865), 68; Lady, 107.
Baker, R.N., Commander Julian, 34.
Baker, Valentine, Col., 257.
Bakhit, 33.
Bakhit Niok, 126.
Bakri, 30, 205.
Bakurig Bugul, 125.
Balæniceps Rex, 167, 169, 300, 309.
Balanites Ægyptica, 13.
Balamkan, 131.
Balgab, 91, 92.
Bamboo, 80, 81, 108, 138, 148, 155, 158.
“Bamia,” 57.
Bananas, 80, 81, 161.
Bandana Village, 109.
Banholzer, Rev. Father, 192, 199.
Bank, of Egypt, 49; National, 49.
Banks (Rivers), 99-154, 170 (see also Nile Banks); erosion, 31, 77, 79.
Ban Naga, 226.
“Banyan,” 155.
Baobabs, 13, 108.
Bara District, 2, 173, 175, 177, 181, 183; P.T.O., 219.
Barachi (Goddess), 162.
Baraka, Khor, 289.
Baratier, Capt., 271, 272.
Baratier, Col., 259, 289.
Barges, 111, 141; troop, 215, 216; steel, 216.
Bari Tribe, 77, 80, 81, 147, 148.
Baria Tribe, 99.
Baringo Lake, 274.
Baris, 116; Tribe, 146, 148.
Barkal, J., 42, 86, 222, 224.
Bark, tanning, 12, 155, 158; rope, 125, 181.
Barley, 7, 31, 38-41, 57, 84, 190.
Baro, R., 7, 16, 120, 122-139.
Barracks, 47, 49, 81, 85, 97, 146, 181; Tewfik, 49.
Barrakwik Village, 132.
Barter, 134, 135, 145, 149, 156, 177, 204.
Basalt, 201.
Bashi Bazuks, 31.
Basket work, 84, 105, 160, 194.
Bassia Parkii, 154.
Basunda Village, 108.
Batahin Tribe, 104, 105, 118.
Bateleur Eagle, 309.
Ba Ur Tettu, 231.
“Batikh” (Water Melon), 185.
Batn El Hagar, 17, 22, 23, 83, 85.
Batrachians, 310.
Bats, 307.
Bayuda Village, 45, 204, 205; W., 205, 206.
Bayuda Desert, 11, 201-203, 207-211, 213.
Baza Tribe, Arab, 99, 101, 179.
Bazaroda Tribe, 125.
Beacon (lights), 94, 96.
Beads, 120, 135, 136, 138, 144, 146, 148, 149, 152, 156, 177; Suksuk, 156; Amber, 120.
Beans, 7, 39, 41, 81, 178, 193.
Bedaiat Tribe, 190, 201, 204.
Bedawi Tribes, 208.
Bedden, 20.
Bederia Tribe, 179.
“Bedingan,” 160.
Bee-eaters (bird), 73, 79, 308.
Bees, 155; Bees-wax, 108, 155.
Begas, 318, 319.
“Bei” vel “Riang” tree, 158.
Beigo Tribe, 186, 187.
“Being-Dit” (office of Head Sheikh), 144.
Beir Tribe, 142, 144, 147, 152.
Beisa, 96.
“Beit El Amana” (Dervish storehouse), 47.
Bela R. (vel Mokwai), 132, 139.
Bela Vice, 35.
Belal, village, 27, 35, 38; cataract, 17.
Belanda Tribe, 161, 162.
Beletamaru, 125.
Balgab Tribe, 87, 91, 92.
Belgians, 79, 81, 146, 156; Officers, 80, 261-263, 271-273, 279.
Bellal, 235, 256.
“Belly of Rocks,” 23.
Beni Tribe, 186.
Beni Amer Tribe, 96-99, 101.
Beni Helba Tribe, Baggara, 187.
Beni Jerar Tribe, 179, 182.
Beni Ommia Tribe, 227, 228.
Beni Shangul, 120, 123, 125, 126; Sultan of, 125.
Benson, Major, 259.
Berabera, Barabra, Tribe, 83, 318.
Berber, Province, 1-4, 9, 15, 39, 44, 47, 84, 85, 86, 94, 96, 98, 103-105, 207, 208, 214, 217, 232, 234, 243-259, 315, 322, 335; Town, 1, 2, 19, 32, 38, 44, 45, 50, 85; P.T.O., 219; captured (26.5.84), 85; reoccupied (6.9.97), 85; camp, 85; N. railway station, 214; S. railway station, 214; Berber-Suakin railway, 5, 7, 84, 208, 214.
Berbera, 257.
Beresford, Lord C., 249.
Beri Tribe, 141, 142, 144, 146, 147, 152.
Beris Oasis, 202.
Berlin Act, 298.
Bernard, Lieut.-Col. E. E., Financial Secretary (1904), 3.
Berta Tribe, 122, 125; language, 125.
Berti Village, 38-40, 83; tribe, 187.
Beshbesh, W., 93.
Besher Bey, 93.
Besher Village, 123.
Besher Ahmed, 125.
Besher Hamdan, deposed (February, 1903), 123.
Bia, 139.
Bibliography, 339-349.
“Bi” tree, 154, 155.
“Bih,” 160.
Bil Village, 136.
Bint El Mek (tomb), 104.
Bint Joda, 176, 182.
Birds, 59, 63, 75, 79, 98, 166, 209, 303; water, 54.
Birged, 187.
Biri R., 154.
Bir Ambasa W., 104.
Bir El Ain (vel El Auein), 205.
Bir El Melh, crater, extinct, 185.
Bir El Melha, 185.
Bir Geheid W., 104.
Bir Mahtul, 32.
Bir Margum W. (vel Margum, vel El Margum), 205, 206.
Bir Meisa, 91.
Bir Sani, 38.
Bir Sederi Oasis W., 202.
Bir Suleimat Oasis W., 202.
Bir Sultan Oasis (vel Sultan), 201, 202, 203.
Bir Tawil, 189.
Bisharin Tribe, 83, 86, 91-93, 96, 101, 104.
Bittern, 309.
Blacks, Negroes, 118, 156, 176-184; soldiers, 79; renegade, 100.
“Black Water” Fever, 79, 147, 157.
Blemmyes, The, 226.
Blewitt, Major A., 141, 276.
Blight, 98, 107.
Blood-feud, 125, 129; blood-shed, compensation, 92.
Blue Nile, 1, 2, 7, 9, 13-19, 49, 59, 77, 103, 105-120, 125; source of, 110; junction, 111; Upper, 9, 11; “Bahr Azrak,” 111; “Abai,” 111.
Boar, Sennar, 308; wild, 162.
Boardman, Col.-Sergt., 277.
Boat Tax, 4, 5; building, 9, 12, 51, 83, 216; yard, 58, 216; portage, 24; navigation, 19, 20, 35; landings, 31; builders, 194.
Boats, 20, 21, 22, 25, 27, 34, 47, 57, 58, 67, 74, 75, 79, 83, 114, 131, 197, 215, 216; Director of, 3; abandoned (1820), 39: steel, 79; whale, 20, 35; “Nugger,” 21, 35, 36, 216; “Gayassa,” 21, 36, 215, 216.
Bodrero, A., 291.
Bogos, 236, 238, 243.
“Bohor” (reedbuck), 109.
Boils, 156.
Bol, 196.
Boma Hills, 136, 138, 148; district, 148, 149, 151.
Bonaparte, Napoleon, 235.
Bonchamps, Marquess de, 270.
Bonga R., 135.
Bongo R., 153, 154, 155, 156, 158, 159.
Bongo Tribe, 156, 158-163; vocabulary, 163.
Bonham-Carter, Esq., E., Legal Secretary (1904), 3.
Boni, 39, 40.
Bonjaho Tribe, 132.
Bonjak, 137.
Bor Village, 16-21, 74-79, 82, 132, 140, 142-148, 151, 160; military post, 77, 145; district, 144.
Borgu, 184.
Bornu, 185, 186.
Boro R., 154.
Borton, Capt. N. T., 141, 147.
Bottégo, 137, 138, 149; map, 151.
Boulders, 22-26, 120, 125, 210.
Boulenger, 310.
Boulnois, Major, 273, 274.
Boundaries, 122, 123, 136, 153, 184; of Sudan, 1, 25, 137; of Bisharin Tribe, 91; of Darfur, 184; of Halfa and Dongola, 25-27; of Dongola and Berber, 39; of Provinces, 335-338.
Boutros Ghali, 284, 285.
Bowarti, 88.
Brackenbury, Genl., 31, 249.
Brass, wire, 132-135, 144-148, 156; ornaments, 155, 160.
Bray, Mr., 213, 232.
Bricks, 29, 119, 146; kilns, 49.
Bridge, railway, 45; girder, 214.
British, Agent-General, 10; army of occupation, 3; flag, 2; barracks, 49; battalion, 3; relief, 49; Dragoon Guards, 74; garrisons (1885), 27, 29, 31; troops (1885), 41; inspector, 27, 57, 62, 105, 107, 113, 114, 126, 146; officers, 3, 135, 184, 196; surveys, 15; officers’ convoy of boats, 36; Protectorate Church, 11.
Broun, Mr. A. F. (Director of Forests), 154, 157.
Bruce, 16, 105, 110, 232.
Brushwood, 44, 99, 209.
Brussels Act (1890), 2, 298.
Buck, 73; bushbuck, 98, 110, 120, 151, 162, 183; reed buck, see Reed; waterbuck, see Water.
Budge, Dr. W., 221.
Budget (1905), 4-6.
Buffalo, 64, 98, 99, 110, 120, 130, 151, 161; hides, 120, 130, 182, 308.
Buildings, construction, 49; native, 144, 145; ancient, 211.
Bula District, 137.
Buller, Sir R., 249.
Bulli Island, 62.
Bullock, 182, 189, 217.
Bulpett, Mr., 148, 151, 280.
Bulrushes, 20, 209.
Burdia Swamp, 175.
Burges, Capt., 273.
Buri, 49.
Burial place, Sultans of Darfur, 190; Shillucks, 199.
Burton, Sir R., 237.
Burun Tribe, 120, 122, 136; language, 123.
Burush, 185.
Bus (plant), 302, 303.
Busata District, 179.
Bush, 31-38, 45, 52, 53, 63, 66, 74-80, 95-100, 106, 109, 120, 137, 138, 149, 150, 167-170, 173, 202, 208, 217; see Scrub and Jungle.
Bussalia Tribe, 119.
Bustard, 96, 99, 107, 162, 183, 309.
Butana, 103, 104, 109.
Butcher, Mrs., 221.
Butlar Bey, 175.
Butna W., 92.
Butta, 201.
Butter and “Ghee,” 146, 158.
Butyrospermum Parkii, 155.
Buzzards, 309.
Byol (Euphorbia juice, arrow poison), 145.
=C.=
Cailliaud, 311.
Cairo, 10, 17-19, 50, 62, 94, 128, 129, 135, 189, 213-218.
Calotropis Procera, 181.
Cambon, P., 285.
Cambyses, 225.
Camel, 4, 28, 32, 40-43, 83-92, 95-98, 103-109, 118-126, 142, 148, 159, 178, 179, 184, 189, 190, 201-218; Camel Corps, 3, 29; Light Camel Regiment (1885), 29; Post, 98, 107; breeding, 9, 190, 208, 217; price, hire, loads, 218; riding saddle, 218; camel grass, 208; camel thorn, 208; owning Arabs, 178-181.
Camps, 22, 29, 32, 34, 40; (1896), 86; quarantine, 23; cantonment, 79; “The Camp,” 85.
Camping places, 28-33, 38-44, 53-58, 62, 63, 150, 167; risk, 87.
Canals, 7, 17, 47, 55; “Green Canal,” 55.
Candace, Queen, 225, 312.
Cannibals, 161.
Canoes, 21, 137, 152, 194; dugouts, 21, 137, 139, 144, 216.
Cape Elba, 89.
Cape Railway Gauge, 214.
Capital and Seat of Government, 1, 181.
“Capitulations,” 2.
Capparis Aphylla, 12.
Capper, Major, 132, 266.
Caracals, 307.
Caravan, 32, 43, 88-90, 105, 119, 137, 182, 189, 203, 208, 217.
Carnivora, 307.
Carpentry, 9.
Carriages (carts), 7, 159, 213.
Carriers (porters), 135, 139, 145, 159, 182, 218.
Carter, Captain, 277.
Cartography, 103, 339-349.
Cascades (waterfalls), 138.
Castle, 31, 32, 87; camp, 50.
Castor oil plant, 80, 81.
Cataracts (i.), 17, 221, 222; (ii.), 20-24, 35, 221; (iii.), 20-26, 35, 216, 221; (iv.), 20, 27, 32, 35-38, 50, 216; (v.), 20, 44, 50; (vi.), 20, 47, 50.
Catchment Basins, 15.
Cattle, 4, 7, 40, 45, 52, 54, 58, 62, 77, 80, 84, 96-99, 104, 108, 109, 126-139, 140, 145, 147, 149, 150, 155, 177-182, 187, 189-196, 214; breeding, 190, 193, 194; disease, 194; plague, 100; “Wong,” 145; Zeribas “Mura,” 145; watering, 175; exports, 177; Arab owning, 178, 179.
Caucasians, 320.
Cavalry, 3, 38, 45, 47, 49, 105; loss (1891), 95; headquarters, 45-49.
Caves, 211.
Cecil, D.S.O., Lt.-Col. Lord E. (Agent-General, 1904), 3.
Census, 128, 193.
Century, A.D. ii.-iii., 40.
Ceratophyllum, 303.
Cereals, 7, 9, 84, 107, 117, 148; corn, 7, 91, 187, 189, 190; grain, 83, 88, 123, 126, 130, 132-136, 148, 149, 204, 211; districts, 7; depôt, 55; transport, 216.
Cerebrospinal meningitis, 47.
Cetacea, 308.
Chad Lake, 242, 263, 273, 276.
Chai District, 136.
Chak Chak, 154, 155.
Chalk, 185.
Chaltin, 263, 264, 279.
Chamamiu (vel Chak Chak), 153, 154, 159.
Chameleons, 309.
Channel (Coast), 94, 95; river channels, see Navigation.
Cheetah, 88, 96, 99, 120, 182, 307.
Chel R., 154, 155.
Chelga, 100, 109.
Chelu, 81.
Chermside, Colonel, 252, 257.
Chimpanzee, 307.
Chippendall, Lieutenant, R.E., 15, 235.
Chiro Village, 138.
Chirol (vel Merol), 139, 141.
Choga Lake, 17.
Churches, British Protectorate, 11, 29-32, 76; Coptic, 32; early, 313.
Christian, 30, 31; convent, 203.
Christianity, early, 226-228, 312.
Ciccodicola, Captain, 291, 298.
Civet, 99.
Clay, 77, 153, 158, 173, 185, 189; iron, 176.
Cliffs and bluffs, crags, 23, 25, 31, 34, 45, 79, 81, 100, 110, 202; bluffs, 79, 81, 206; escarpments, 151, 210, 211.
Climate and weather, 11, 12, 21, 27, 49, 68, 76, 83, 86, 87, 89, 94, 95, 98, 105, 107, 109, 113, 148, 156, 183, 189, 196; meteorological table, 12.
Cloth (barter), 132-134, 156, 180.
Clothing (native), 85, 87, 140, 143, 145, 148, 152, 161, 180, 187, 192, 193.
Club (Social), 49.
Coal, 13, 20, 100.
Coast, 95, 96.
Cobra, 310.
Cob, 151, 162, 183.
Cobus leucotis (cob), 67, 120, 151, 163, 300, 308.
Cobus Maria, 151, 161, 300, see Waterbuck.
Cobus Thomasi, 308.
Coetlogon, De, 247.
Coffee, 84, 106, 108, 126, 135.
Coir, 84.
Colds and coughs, 194.
College, Gordon, 5, 11; Training College for Schoolmasters, 11.
Colies, 309.
Colli, Lieutenant, 274.
Collinson, C.B., Colonel, 108, 265, 267, 268, 274, 291.
Colobus Guereza, 307.
Colony, 59; of miners, 87; of Arabs, 93; of Baggaras, 106.
Colour of waters, 15, 73, 80, 113, 131, 136, 142.
Colston, Colonel, 236.
Colvile, Colonel (Grenadier Guards), 205, 248, 262.
Combretaceæ family (botanical), 155.
Commandant, 79, 154.
Commelaria, 303.
Commerce and resources, 5, 7, 88, 221.
Communications, 7, 35, 83, 90, 94, 95, 98, 106, 109, 123, 135, 145, 159, 189, 208, 213-219.
Comyn, Lieutenant, 141, 151, 153.
Compensation for murder or wounds, 92.
Concessions (prospectors), 13.
Condensers, 94.
Congo R., 1, 16, 161, 279; watershed, 153, 161, 165.
Congo Free State, 1, 9, 79, 156, 161, 261, 278, 286; post, 79; 1st Expedition to Nile (1889), 79; French boundary, 9, 297, 298.
Conies, 88, 209.
Consuls, 2, 284.
Consul General in Cairo, 284.
Controller of stores, 3.
Convolvulus, 73.
Convoys, 36, 43, 95; destroyed (1897), 87.
Cook, Messrs. Thomas, 215.
Copper, 9, 156.
Copts, 11, 313; Coptic churches, 32.
Coral, reefs, 94, 96; buildings, 94.
Cormorants, 309.
Corn, 7, 91, 187, 189, 190.
Co-terminous countries, 9.
Cotton, 7, 9, 38, 39, 55, 83, 84, 97, 106-109, 113, 114, 117, 118, 125, 135, 176, 178, 182, 189, 190, 193; “belwa,” 113; seed, 84, 95; yield, 113; rainwatered, 107; “mit afifi,” 117; cloth weaving, 9, 85, 146, 176, 180, 187; “damur” 85, 146, 176; “gomash,” 189; goods (and Manchester goods), 98, 106, 108, 178, 189; soil, 55, 56, 58, 66, 97, 99, 100, 106-109, 113.
Council, of Ministers, 10; president of, 10; village, 128.
Course of rivers, 132, 136-139, 141, 143.
Courts (Law), 4, 9, 10; President of Special Court of Appeal, 10.
Cow, 134; bells, 150; dung fuel, 160; stable “luak,” 145.
Cowrie shells, 149.
“Cradle of the Blue Nile,” the, 108.
Crane (bird), 139, 309.
Crayfish (lobsters), 96.
Credits and loans, 5.
Creeks, 96.
Creepers, 77, 79, 155, 173.
Criminal administration, 9; crime, 85, 182.
Crocodiles, 54, 99, 101, 110, 194, 197, 309.
Cromer, Lord, 10, 284, 285.
Crops, 7, 54, 98, 104, 113, 126, 134, 146, 148, 156, 160, 208; foreshore, 113; failure, 98.
Crowfoot, Mr., 221.
Cuckoos, 309.
Cucumber, 189.
Cultivation, 4, 7, 9, 23, 25, 27, 29, 30, 32, 52-58, 77, 79, 80, 81, 83, 84-90, 95, 98, 101-109, 113, 122-126, 130, 133-139, 140, 144-146, 147, 158, 160, 176, 178, 179, 189, 190, 193, 194, 196, 202, 214; harvest, 84, 192.
Cummins, Capt., 163.
Cunningham, Major, 263.
Currency (money, coin), 109, 120, 135, 156, 189.
Currie, Mr. J., 203.
Custard apples, 107.
Customs, 3, 4, 9, 108, 189; director of, 3; house, 49; duties, 2, 9; Eritrea, 292; Uganda, 297; convention, 9.
Cyperus papyrus, 302.
=D.=
Dabarosa Island, 23.
Dabasi (Dobasi) Meshra, 55.
Dabba Dungit, 63.
Dabba El Ghoda, 62.
Dabba Marbeit, 64.
“Dabka” tree, 157.
Dabus, 57.
Dagash Railway Station, 214.
Dago, 185, 186.
Dakafili, 43.
Dakhila, 122.
Dalbergia Melanoxylon, 13.
Dal Cataract, 25.
Dalgo, 26, 35, 85; railway station, 215; P.T.O., 219.
Dams, 91, 74, 190; locks, 215; vegetation, 16; see Sudd.
Damaliscus Senegalensis, 109.
Damaliscus Korrigum, 183.
Dambo Village, 29.
“Damur” (cotton cloth, native), 85, 146, 176.
Dam Jamad, 184.
Danagla, 54, 57; tribe, 54, 57, 83, 118, 173, 179, 182.
“Danga” (bow), 145.
Daniellia Thurifera, 155.
Danko Selim, 59.
Danko Shush, 59.
Dankul Rocks, 20.
Dara, 185, 186, 190; tribes, 332.
Darfur, 11, 32, 108, 156, 159, 173, 174, 178-191, 201, 206, 217; Kings, 184, 186; Royal Family (descent), 186; Sultan’s genealogy, 191; administration of army, 189; tribute, 189; annexed (1874), 184; southern, 11, 185; northern, 174, 179; eastern, 179, 185; provinces, 213, 231, 255, 256, 268-277; conquest of, 235; tribes, 332.
Darters, 309.
Darur Harbour, 88, 96.
Dar Ageil Tribe, 122.
Dar Vedaiat, 184.
Dar Berber, 44.
Dar El Ahamda, 175, 179, 182.
Dar El Rizeigat, 182.
Dar El Tagele, 182.
Dar El Zeiah, 177.
Dar Fertit, 145, 163, 182, 184, 189, 256, 262.
Dar Fung District, 2, 119, 122, 123.
Dar Gimr, 184, 189.
Dar Habbania, 184.
Dar Hamar, 174-176, 177, 179, 185.
Dar Hamid, 173-175, 177, 179, 183; tribe, 179.
Dar Homr (Dar El Homr), 175, 177, 182-185.
Dar Jange, 182, 183-189.
Dar Nuba (Dar El Nuba), 166, 173, 182.
Dar Robatab, 44.
Dar Shaigia, 27, 83.
Dar Sula, 184-189.
Dar Taaisha, 184.
Dar Tama, 184; hills, 185, 189.
Dar Zaghawa, 189.
Dates, 7, 9, 38, 39, 83, 84, 107, 202, 203, 205, 217; tax, 4, 84; Sudan date, 155, 201; caravans and transport, 217, 218 (see Palms); Species: “agwa,” 203; “barakawi,” 203; “gawa,” 203; “kulma,” 203; “Tunis,” 84; “Tripoli,” 84.
Dazira, 54.
Dead Sea Fruit, 30.
Debalo, 196.
Debania Tribe, 100, 103, 106, 107.
Debba, 2, 22, 27, 31, 35, 83, 204-217; P.T.O., 219; Bashi Bazuk Garrison (1884), 31.
Debba Abu Teiba, 63.
Debba El Kebir Hills, 209.
Debba El Zawia or Zawa, 63.
Debba Ibrahim Sharak, 63.
Debba Madiu, 129.
Debba Shagerab, 66.
Debbaghat W., 104.
Debeik Village, 66.
Deberenis, 289, 290.
Deberki, 109-114.
Debra Sin, 258.
Debris talus, 209, 210.
Decle, L., 280.
Defence works, 29-31, 94, 181, 211; ditches, 77, 79, 81; earthworks, 45, 49; parapet, 75, 79, 80; stockade, 138.
“Deim,” 60, 77, 144.
Deim Bekir, 160.
Deim Idris, 160.
Deim Zubeir, 2, 154-160, 217; Dem Zubeir, 154.
Dejaj Gassesa, 100.
Delal, 196.
Deleib Palm, “Tuga,” 70. See Palms.
Delta of Egypt, 17.
Demtemma, 21, 67, 71.
Denegila, 57.
“Deng,” 128, 143.
“Deng-Dit” (Rain Giver), 145, 146.
Deng Karuma Wad Akwai, 129.
Dengkur (a fakir), 140.
Depth, of wells, 90-100, 103-108, 117-123, 173-175, 181-185, 190, 202, 204-210; of rivers, 136, 137, 142, 144, 197.
Deraheib (Castle-beautiful), 87.
Derau, 93.
Derbieib W., 92.
Derer Island, 28.
Dervish (1898), 15; (1885-96), 22; (1888) 23; (1897), 44; (1885), 49; Pre, 88, 153; invasion, 85; occupation, 47, 119, 177; commander, force, post, 104, 105; raids, 122, 126, 213; rule, 45, 130, 146, 176, 179, 182; defeated, (29.4.83) 58, (1891) 95; magazines, 47; cesspits, 25, 26, 45, 47, 68, 74, 94-96, 104-109, 119, 122-126, 130, 144, 146, 182, 199, 213; action with, 25, 26, 68, 106, 108; forts, 47.
Desaix Fort, 271, 272.
Desert, 26-30, 34, 40, 44, 52, 53, 83, 85, 86, 89, 90, 94, 201-208, 214, 215, 221; sterile, 208, 214; west of Nile, 201-204; north and west, 9; Western, 9, 206; Eastern, 9; column (1885), 45; tribes in Eastern, 318, 319.
Desert, Bayuda, 11, 201-203, 207-211, 213.
Desert, Kordofan, N., 7.
Desert, Libyan, 1, 23.
Desert, Nubian, 7, 86.
Deserted, village, 30, 31; country, 45, 80, 103, 110, 157, 186; uninhabited, 60, 66, 101, 103.
Deshiab Batahin Tribe, 105.
Devolder, Baron, 298.
Dew, 87-89, 156.
Dhanis, Baron, 263.
Dhows, 96.
Diarrhœa, 184.
Didaut, W., 91, 92.
Difar District, 32.
Dig-Dig, 88, 96, 98, 183, 308; tree, 158.
“Diia,” 92.
Di-ib, 92.
Dilla, 181.
Dilling District, 2.
Dilko, W., 93.
“Dilwas” (leathern bucket), 176, 181.
Dinder District, 2, 114; river, 108, 110, 111, 113, 114.
Dinka Meshra, 62.
Dinka Tribe, 62, 63, 64, 76, 77, 81, 122, 126, 128, 129, 130, 132, 139, 140, 142, 143-146, 152, 154, 156, 159, 160, 161, 167, 168, 169, 182, 194, 196; history, 129; country, 60, 120, 122, 131; district and limits, 140, 143, 155; “Jangé,” 126; “Ibrahim,” 129; N. Dinkaland, 126; of Bor, 145; vocabulary, 163.
Diorites, 210.
Discharge of rivers, 17, 18, 19, 73, 74, 99, 111, 131, 136, 137, 167-170; site, 18.
Disease and sickness, 13, 21, 47, 49, 156, 157, 184, 194; waterborne, 184.
Distances, 23-35, 38-45, 50, 52-82, 100-104, 116, 117, 131, 135-147, 182, 185, 190, 201-210; on railway, 214, 215.
Districts, 2, 9, 25, 143, 196, 197.
Ditte, Capt., 271.
Dobadob, 289.
Dockyard, 49, 68.
Dog, wild, 88; eaten, 122, 161; greyhound, 206.
Doka Village, 107.
Dollars, “Maria Theresa,” 109, 120, 135; “Menelek,” 120, 135.
Domaia, 21, 63.
Domme Hills, 137.
Donaldson Smith, 280.
Donga, 95.
Dongola, Province, 2, 7, 9, 11, 13, 17, 20-42, 83, 84, 179, 201-207, 213-215; Southern, 217; district, 2, 335; town, 27, 201-214; P.T.O., 219; Old Town (To’ngălo), 30, 31, 86; expedn. (1896), 22, 213; Brit. garr. (1885), 3, 27; Mudir of (1884), 32; tribes, 323.
Donkeys, 4, 7, 96, 106, 107, 108, 109, 120, 126, 135, 139, 148, 149, 150, 159, 178, 182, 189, 206, 217, 218; load, price, hire, 218.
Donyiro, 151.
Doran, Capt. W., 36.
Dorcas Gazelle, 88, 96, 183, 308.
Dormer, Genl., 32.
“Dorut” tree, 158.
Doves, 309.
Drainage, 86, 87, 89, 98-101, 120, 154, 174, 184, 185, 209.
Draka Island, 44.
Dravidians, 320.
Drought (dry season), 73, 80, 99 to 103, 113, 116, 118, 129-139, 146, 147, 156, 157, 178, 179, 184, 185, 190-194, 208.
Drury, R.N., Lieut., 74, 75, 279, 304.
Drunkenness, 180, 182.
Dueim (El Dueim), 1, 2, 19, 71, 118, 182, 216, 219; P.T.O., 219; Itiny. Khartoum and Kodok, 52-67.
Duck, 139; Comb-duck, 162.
Dufile, 16, 21.
Dugaiyet, 38; Dugiyet, 34.
“Duiker,” 98, 162, 183.
Dukhn (millet), 7, 38, 39, 40, 41, 57, 95, 106, 107, 109, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 181, 182, 189, 190.
Dukur village deserted, 204.
Dul District, 119, 122, 123.
Dulgo District, 25, 26, 35.
Dulka (vel Dirbi) Island, 37, 39, 40.
Dunjol Wells, 67.
Dunkur, 109, 114.
Dura, 7, 31, 32, 35, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 47, 49, 54, 57, 77, 81, 84, 87, 88, 90, 95, 98, 104, 106, 107, 109, 113, 117, 122, 125, 126, 128, 130, 136, 140, 145, 146, 147, 160, 161, 176, 178, 180, 181, 182, 189, 190, 192, 193, 194, 196, 207; flour, 107; “Shami” (Indian Corn), 84, 117; “Feterita,” 104, 117.
Dura Hemeisi, 104.
Dura Kurgi, 107, 109, 126.
Dura Mugad, 98, 109.
Dura Naggad, 98, 107, 126.
Dura Taulib, 98.
Durraba Village, 109.
“Duruk,” 99.
Dusim, village, 196, 197; district, 196.
Dutch, 70.
Dyé, Lieut., 271.
Dye, 88.
Dynasty, 221-225; XII., 23; Fung, 122; Darfur, 186.
Dysentery, 157, 184, 194.
Dyspepsia, 157.
=E.=
Eagles, 309.
Earle, Major-General, 248, 249.
East Africa, 135, 149.
East Coast Railway, 45.
Earth nuts, 193.
Ebony, 7, 13, 47, 108; clubs, 145, 158.
Edentata, 308.
Edermi Cataract, 38.
Edesius, 226.
Edor Gamoia, 64.
Education, Director of, 3, 10; teachers, 10.
Eetvelde, Baron van, 287.
Egrets, 309.
Egypt, Bank of, 49.
Egypt, 10, 19, 83-86, 88, 93, 101, 108, 111, 113, 184; “flesh pots of,” 191.
Egypt, Lower, 20, 213, 217.
Egypt, Upper, 158.
Egyptian, Army, 1, 3, 4, 27, 130; garrison, 49; posts, 12, 80; flag, 2, 169; battalion, troops, 36, 62, 85, 130; XVth, 105; officers, 184; War Department, 3; Martial Law, 9; forts, 23, 24-27, 138; Administration, Government, 5, 93; Commercial law, 10; Mamur 107, 113; sheikhs, 10; frontier, 85, 96; railway, 215; Slavery repression, Inspector, 3; races, 320; currency, 120, 189; “Postal Guide,” 218.
Eigat, W., 92.
Eilafun, 105.
Eireiab Tribe, 91, 93.
“Eitil,” 89.
Eiweb, W., 93.
Elai, 208.
Eland, 161, 183, 308.
Elba Cape, range, 89, 91.
Elephants, 12, 63, 73, 77, 79, 81, 98, 110, 120, 130, 132, 139, 142, 145, 148, 151, 154, 157, 161, 167, 173, 182, 193, 196, 197, 218, 300, 307; tusks, 140; Abyssinian variety, 110.
Elias Khamis, 125.
Eliot, Sir C., 280.
El Abiad, 175.
El Adeid W., 104.
El Agaba, 173, 179.
El Ahamda, 129.
El Alaga, 54.
El Alob, 58.
El Arag, 33.
El Arda Island, 53.
“El Asal” (blight), 98.
El Bab W., 205, 206.
El Bagarawia, 105.
El Bana, 36, 37.
El Bar District, 32.
El Barsa District, 32.
El Basa, 33.
El Burak, 290.
El Butana District, 103, 104, 109.
El Daheira District, 103.
El Damer (vel El Darmar), district, 2; town, 45, 85, 103, 104, 105, 109; railway station, 214; P.T.O., 219; former University at, 105.
El Debeiba Village, cliffs, 34.
El Debeiker, 54.
El Dermi Cataract, 37.
El Dueim W., district, 2, 18; village, 38, 181; action (23.8.’83), 56; town, 54-56, 93, 175, 176, 177, 182, 217.
El Dugaiyet Village, 38.
El Eddaiya, 175, 177, 179, 182.
El Eifein, 92.
El Ein (vel El Ain), 207, 210, 211.
El Faar, W., 209.
El Fasher (vel Fasher), 31, 99, 100, 101, 104, 181, 185, 186, 189, 190, 207, 208, 213, 217; tribes, 332.
El Faui W., 92.
El Fiki Medani, 119.
El Gab, 43.
“El gau” (camel grass), 208.
El Geleita W., 104.
El Gerab Village, 67.
El Gerazi (vel Garrasa), 54.
El Geteina, 53, 118.
El Ghaba Village, 31.
El Ghar, 176.
El Goled, 29.
El Goz Railway Station, 214.
El Gumra Village, 204.
El Gura, 90.
El Haad Oasis, 202.
El Hagar, 53.
El Haj (site), 114.
El Harma W., 205.
El Hasa, 44.
El Hawad, 103, 104.
El Haweiyat W., 209.
El Hoi (“Gezira”), 117, 119.
El Homar Cataract, 17.
El Hudden W., 205.
El Huffera W., 205.
El Jeberked Tribe, 118.
El Kabur, 38, 39.
El Kadalo Tribe, 125.
El Kaf, 94.
El Karaba District, 103.
El Kheiran District, 173.
El Khelaiun (Kheleiwa), 30.
El Khema District, 58, 59.
El Kirbekan Village, 39, 40.
El Kurmotai, 204.
El Kwais Mt., 204.
“El Lagat” (self-filling tebeldi trees), 176.
El Makur, 186.
El Marghum, see Marghum.
El Meiga Railway Station, 214.
El Mesalima Plain, 209.
El Mungur Village, 204, 205.
El Nahud, 176, 177.
El Obeid, 2, 7, 32, 50, 53, 55, 56, 173, 175-183, 185, 189, 190, 208, 214, 217, 218, 244-268, 277; P.T.O., 219.
El Ordi, 27, 204, 205.
El Ragal, 63.
El Rahawat, 55.
El Rechewa Plain, 209.
El Sadda, 104, 105.
El Safia, 175, 179.
El Safra, 114.
El Salahia District, 54.
El Salamat, 27.
El Sawāni Village, 204, 205, 206.
El Seneita Swamp, 175.
El Serg, 210.
El Shwadiyat, 37.
El Sinut Swamp, 174, 175.
El Sofeiya W., 104.
El Teb, 257.
El Wat, 63, 64, 126.
El Walia (vel Shag) W., 104.
El Zoma, 34.
Emily, Dr., 271.
Emin Pasha, 80, 148, 239, 243, 259-262, 303.
Emir Arábi Dafaalla, 77.
Emir Abu Anga, 106.
Emir Ahmed Fedil, 106.
Emir Heddai (1884), 32.
Empire, Early, 222.
Endowments, 10, 11.
English (language), 11.
Ereidiba, 119.
Ereigat Tribe, 186.
Eritrea (Erythræa), 1, 9, 13, 98, 100, 101, 218, 274-278, 290, 291, 292, 294.
Eritrean Frontier, 13, 83, 95, 96, 289, 291, 296; hills, 99, 101.
Ergamenes, 225.
Erkowit, 89, 94, 95, 122; summer headquarters, 94, 95, 122; P.T.O., 219.
Erythræa (see Eritrea).
Eshabab Tribe, 93.
Ethiopia (Kush or Kesh), 221-229, 312.
Ethiopian Plateau, 138.
Ethnology, 317-321.
Etna Mt. (Naita), 149.
European, merchandise, 32; hotels, 49; staff, 81; quarter, 106; ideas, 192; Europeans, 81, 149, 151, 156, 157, 161, 194; trade, 284.
Euphorbia, 74-76, 167; giant, 79.
Euphorbia Candelabrum, 122, 145, 157.
Evaporation, 18, 20, 73, 145.
Expeditions, 15, 139, 181; Dongola (1896), 22, 213; (1884), 94; danger to (1884), 210; (1899), 58; (1903-4), 74; Nile, 20, 29, 33; (1884-5), 213; Anglo-Egyptian (1898), 68; Suakin (1885), 214; Austin’s (1901), 136; Macdonald’s, 151; Faivre (1898), 111; Blewitt (1902), 141; Marchand (1898), 153.
Expenditure, 4-6.
Experimental farm, 113.
Exploration, 13, 15, 141; problems, 141; unexplored country, 141; unknown country, 151.
Exports, 2, 7, 9, 12, 84, 108, 155, 177, 189.
=F.=
Fachi Shoya, 71, 183; expedition base (1899), 58.
Factories, 7.
Fadiang, 196.
Fadiet, 196.
Fading, 140.
Fadlab Tribe, 83.
Fadnia Tribe, Arab, 103, 105, 208.
Fadoko Tribe, 125.
Fai-at Village, 143.
“Faidherb, The” (steamer), abandoned, 135.
Faivre, Mr., 70; expedition, 136, 141, 270.
Fajak, 144.
Fakir, 143.
Fakir Benti (vel Fakr Benti), 26.
Faki Don, 183.
Fakoi Village, 143.
Fakrin Koti District, 32.
Falang Tribe, 132.
Falcons, 309.
Falkat R., 288.
Fama District, 196.
Famaka, 16, 109, 111, 114; fort, 125.
Famines, 192.
Fanakama R., 70.
Fannidwai Village, 197.
Fanyanglwel, 139.
“far” (“rats”), 108.
Faras Island, 22, 23, 35, 83, 85.
Farikh, 64.
Faroge District, 155; tribe, 159.
Faronge Tribe, 125.
Fasher (see El Fasher).
Fasheikh, 143.
Fashoda (see Kodok), 120, 132.
“fasses,” 120, 177.
Fatiwanyang Village, 132.
Fatooah Village, 75.
Fauwel District, 133.
Favor Village, 75.
Fayum, 27.
Fazogli District, 119-126, 231, 232, 268.
Fazogli Village, 125.
Feathers (ostrich), 5, 7, 9, 12, 148, 149, 177, 182, 189.
Febrifuge, 155.
“feddan,” 84, 96, 113.
Fees, market and court, 4.
Feireida W., 92.
Felata Tribe, 196.
Felkin, 168.
Felizzano, Di, 290.
Fell, Lieut., 170, 273.
Fellahin, 84, 85.
Felluru, 148.
Fennec foxes, 307.
Fennikang (vel. Finnikang), 194, 197; district, 196.
“ferda” (toga), 85.
“feriks” (cattle shelters), 139.
Ferries, 4, 27, 47, 49, 50, 55-57, 100, 113; chain, 216.
Fertile (soil), 7, 28, 30, 33, 38, 49, 73, 83, 87, 100, 101, 117, 131, 141, 153, 160, 173, 185, 190, 214. See Alluvial.
Fertilizing water, 15, 113, 114, 116.
“Feterita” dura, 104, 117.
Feuds, 93, 125.
Fevers, 21, 49, 79, 80, 83, 85, 107, 113, 147, 156, 184, 194; blackwater, 147, 157.
Fibres, 7, 125, 158.
Ficus bengalensis, 155.
Ficus elastica, 88.
Ficus platyphylla, 155.
Ficus (epiphytic), 154.
Figs, 107; trees, 155; wild, 148.
Fiki Senin, 189.
Fil Village, 66.
Filik, 97.
Financial Secretary, 3.
Finidawi, 70.
Finkio, 131, 134, 135.
Fire, on sudd, 303; making, 181, 208.
“Fire, and Sword in the Sudan,” 184, 185.
Firket Village, action, 25; jebel, action (6.7.’96), 25, 26, 254.
Fish, 95, 99, 128, 134, 139, 175, 310; weirs and traps, 137, 194; fisheries and fishing, 66, 76, 77, 96, 136, 139, 194; rods, 194; harpoons, 194.
“fitra” (a tax), 189.
Fitorari Hill, 139.
Flags, 2, 283, 286.
Flamingoes, 309.
“Flanders Kettle,” 36.
Flocks, 86, 101, 118, 128, 134-137, 140, 160, 179, 206, 208, 209, 211.
Flood, 11, 15, 17, 18, 19, 20, 45, 47, 57, 70, 74, 80, 81, 87, 95, 100, 111, 114, 115, 132, 136, 137, 139, 146, 151, 168; gauge, 81; inundation, 134, 141, 153, 154.
Florican, 162.
Flour, 107, 135, 145, 148.
Fly-catchers, 308.
Fly limit, 64. See “Serut” fly.
Flying Column (1897), 35.
Fodder, forage, 47, 176, 210.
Foga, 177, 179, 182; district, 183, 185, 189, 218.
Fogara Tribe, 93.
Fola Rapids, 16, 21.
Ford, fordable, 59, 60, 63, 131.
Ford Abu Zeid, 20.
Forest Department, 20; Director of, 3, 154, 157; fires, 13, 20, 155, 157; products, 7, 12, 13, 20, 154, 155; zones, 157; petrified, 201, 203; forests, 7, 12, 13, 20, 60, 62, 66, 75-80, 106, 109, 113, 114, 119, 120, 138, 139, 140, 144, 153, 155, 157, 158, 168, 177.
Fors Tribe, 108, 185, 187, 190; ruling class, 186.
Forts, 23, 24, 25, 27-29, 30, 31, 39, 42, 47, 58, 68, 80, 88, 94, 97, 108, 138, 170, 181, 190; fortifications, 85, 138.
Fossil remains, Saurian, 209.
Fowler, C.E., Mr. J., 208, 213, 232-234.
Fowls, 125, 160, 169, 183; eggs, 145.
Francolin, 98.
French, 68, 161, 184; territory, 163; sphere, 184; expedition, 264, 266, 271, 273-276; agreement, 270, 285.
French Congo, 9.
Freights, 84, 215, 216.
Frontier (see under different countries).
Frontier Force (1886-96), 24; headquarters (1885-96), 85, 97, 125; site for future post, 148.
Frontiers of provinces, 18, 335.
Fruit, 84, 148, 155, 158, 203; trees, 109.
Fuel (wood), 12, 13, 20, 29, 31, 37, 49, 142, 151, 166, 167, 168, 202, 210, 301; (charcoal), 158.
“ful” (earth nuts), 193.
“fulas” (pools), 142, 145, 175, 176.
Fulfam Village, 143.
Fulwal Village, 143.
Fum Omer, 57.
Fung Tribe, Arab, 1, 2, 23, 125, 129, 184; kings, 104; dynasty, 122; (1770-1775), possession of Kordofan, 184.
Fungor, 196.
Fungor (Mek Bosh-Nubawi), 67.
=G.=
Gaba Keli, 289.
Gab El Abd Cataract, 37, 39.
Gab El Abd Gate, 39.
Gabra, 175, 179, 183, 207, 208.
Gabra El Sheikh, 179.
Gabt El Megahid, 70.
Gadabi, 100, 108, 109; tribe, 99, 100.
Gadjak Village, 132, 134.
Gage, Capt., 74, 273.
Galaat Arang, 103.
Galat Hatani, 32.
Gallabat District, 2, 50, 98-100, 106-109, 217, 218, 257-261, 268, 274-279, 295; sacked (1886), 108; battle (9.3.’89), 108; occupied (7.12.’98), 108; P.T.O., 219.
Galla hills, 136; tribe, 120, 134, 135, 137, 138, 221, 236, 321.
“Galus” (mud and stone), 85.
Gambela, 131.
Gamble, Capt., 16, 266.
Game, 12, 59, 63, 64, 66, 67, 70, 88, 95, 96, 98, 100, 107, 109, 110, 114, 120, 128, 132, 135, 148, 151, 161, 173, 182, 183, 197, 202, 206; preservation department superintendent, 3; preserving, 12; laws, 17, 101; dealers, 100; country, 128; paths, 100.
“Gammam” (reservoir), 88.
Gamob, 89.
Gamra, 39.
Gamus, 62, 64.
Gandaua, 104.
Ganeti Island, 31.
Garafab W., 90.
Gararish Tribe, 83.
Gardens, 68, 76, 81, 98, 107, 109, 182, 190; public, 49; zoological, 49.
“Gardner Machine” guns, 97.
Gar El Nabi, 53.
“Garids,” 202.
Garrasa, 54.
Garre Valley, 123.
Garrisons, 3, 27, 31, 47, 49, 56, 68, 75, 79, 80, 81, 85, 94, 95, 97, 106, 109, 113, 119, 123, 135, 146, 154, 184.
Garstin, G.C.M.G., Sir William, 15, 17, 73, 74, 99, 100, 101, 110, 111, 144, 206, 273, 280, 305.
Gash, R., 11, 97, 98, 99, 111, 289.
Gash Dai Plain, 97.
Gasa El Abiad, 130.
Gatacre, Major-General, 265.
Gawazma Tribe, 119.
“Gayassas,” 21, 36, 83, 216.
Gazella rufifrons, 99, 109.
Gazelle, 10, 88, 96, 98, 99, 107, 110, 120, 183, 202, 206, 208; Dorcas, 88, 96, 98, 183; Heuglin’s, 98; Isabella, 88, 96, 99, 183, 308.
Geckoes, 309.
Gedaref District, 2, 7, 9, 50, 98, 100, 103, 105, 106, 107, 109, 257, 267, 268; town, 106, 217, 218; P.T.O., 219; province, 106; “Suk Abu Sin,” 106; colony, 106; devastated (1885) and garrison captured, action (1898), 106.
Gedid District, 2, 58, 59, 60, 174, 175, 176, 179.
Gehadia troops, 3.
Geif El Hamam, 100.
Geili W., 103, 104, 105, 214.
Gelmabai M., 289.
Gelo R., 136, 137, 138, 139.
Gemaab Tribe, 105.
Gemai, 24.
Gemaiza (Gemmeiza), gum tree, 77, 88, 89, 115; fight, 258.
Gemmeiza District, 43.
Gemilab Tribe, 97.
Gemmueija District, 52.
Genealogy (tribal), 91; table, 187; table, Sultans, 191, 197.
“Geneina” (“garden gum”), 177.
Genenetti, 83.
Genets, 307.
“Genotor” vel “Gianotta,” vel “guainakwash” beads, 120, 145, 156.
Geological formation, 32, 153, 185, 201, 202, 204, 210, 211.
Gerab El Aish, 67.
Gerauit, 64.
Gerazi, 54.
Gerard, 262.
Gereif, 38.
Gerendid Cataract, 35.
Geriat Tribe, 207.
Geridu (vel Geriddo) Rapids, 36, 37.
Germain, Capt., 271, 272.
Gerr Province, 196.
“Gertrude Nile,” 144.
Gessi (explorer), 16, 167, 234-243, 300, 304.
Geteina District, 2, 53, 71, 218; P.O., 219.
Getti R., 154.
Gezan, 125, 126; district, last aboriginal Mek of, 125.
Gezira Province, 2, 7, 9, 104, 105, 106, 117, 118, 119, 178, 179, 222, 237; “Nahud,” 178; “El Hoi,” 117.
Gezira Tribe, 111, 178, 323, 324.
“Gezira” gum, 13.
Gezira Abdalla Harbour, 96.
Gezira Wad Beiker, 64.
“Geziret Ashraf,” 28.
Ghaba B’ta el Arab, 168.
Ghaba Shambé, 75.
Ghaddar Island, 30.
Ghobeisha, 56.
Ghoreiba, 33.
Ghosts, Land of, 221.
Gibli, 29, 30.
Gidimib W., 92.
Giegler Pasha, 214.
Giffen, Rev. J. F., 192, 199.
Gileidat Village, 109, 110.
Gimirra, 138.
Gimma, 130, 179.
Gimr, 187.
Ginefab, 43.
Ginnis, 23, 26; action (1885), 26, 250, 252.
Gira Island, 31.
Giraffe, 73, 98, 110, 120, 130, 134, 148, 151, 161, 173, 182, 218, 300, 307; hides, 130, 218.
Girbas, 176.
Giref, 31.
Girid W., 92.
Girsh Garagandi coin, 189.
Girsh Kabashi coin, 189.
Glanders, 194.
Gleichen, Count, 291, 293-297.
Glossina morsitans, 157.
Gneiss, 24, 153, 185, 211.
Goamili Tribe, 125.
Goang R., valley, 100.
Goats, 4, 45, 58, 62, 87, 91, 97, 104, 128, 132, 134, 135, 136, 137, 139, 148, 149, 150, 178, 179, 181, 182, 190, 193, 194, 205, 206, 208; “Biu,” 145.
Gods (native), 162, 197, 199.
Godwits, 309.
Goffinet, Baron, 298.
Gogaib W., 92.
Goin, V., 138.
Gojjam Province (Abyssinia), 126.
Gokjak Village, 139.
Gold, 9, 13, 88, 151, 176, 311; alluvial, 123, 125; dust, 125, 126, 135, 211; rings (currency), 120.
Golden Orioles, 308.
Goled Bahri, 29.
Golo District, 196.
Golos Tribe, 154, 155, 159, 160, 161.
“Gomash” (native cotton cloth), 189.
Gomasha, 123.
Gondar sacked, 108, 109.
Gondokoro, 7, 20-22, 73, 74, 77, 79, 80, 81, 82, 145, 146, 148, 216, 218, 219, 233-237, 280.
“Gong” (ivory bracelets), 145.
Goose, spur winged, 162; Nile, 162; geese, 99, 139.
Gordon, General, 15, 21, 49, 76, 81, 126, 151, 213, 216, 234-248; college, 5, 11, 49, 98; gate and causeway, 94.
Gordon, Colonel (1877), 190.
Goré, 139, 217.
Gorge, 209, 210, 211; see pass and defile.
Gorringe, Lieut.-Colonel, 123, 278.
Gouly, Lieutenant, 270.
Governor-General, 1, 2, 3, 9, 94, 129, 280, 283; palace, 49.
Governor of Provinces, 1, 3, 34, 49, 196, 207, 216, 217.
Government (Sudan), 91, 100, 103, 109, 122, 126, 129, 134, 135, 153, 157, 187, 189, 196, 203, 215, 217; buildings, 49, 56, 57, 62, 67, 94, 95, 97, 106, 119, 183, 218; officials, 3, 49; ferry, 50; railways, 213-215; troops, 130, 153, 181; lease enclave at Itang, 134; posts, 68, 79, 83, 93, 154, 156, 196, 206; ordinances, 10; Orders in Council, 10; property sales, 4.
Government (Old), 113, 144, 161, 190.
Gowama (Gowamma) Tribe, Arab, 118, 179, 196.
Gowari Village, 33.
Gowazma Tribe, 119.
Goz Abu Guma, 2, 21, 50, 59, 71, 117-120, 176, 216, 218, 219; (Zeinoba), 118; P.T.O., 219.
Goz El Fugar Village, 204.
Goz Regeb, 97, 100, 101, 104; P.O., 219.
Graham, General, 257.
Grain, 83, 88, 123, 126, 130, 132, 134, 135, 136, 148, 149, 204, 211.
Granaries, (native), “gu,” 134, 145, 146.
Grand Kadi, 10.
Granite, 26, 42, 43, 47, 60, 86-88, 104, 118, 119, 138, 153, 185, 202, 209, 210.
Grant and Speke, 15, 232.
Grass, 28, 30, 45, 47, 52, 57-59, 62-70, 73-80, 86-90, 95-100, 103, 106-109, 113, 117, 118, 120, 131, 136-140, 144, 149, 157, 166-170, 173-177, 192, 194, 202, 203, 206, 208; fires, 73, 109, 157, 177; land, 157; plain, 209; prickly, 60; sword, 76; poisonous, 159; “Kitr,” 64; “Naal,” 64, 117; “Aada,” 107; “Homra,” 13, 117; “Maherib,” 117; “Tleih,” 210; “Halfa,” 45, 47, 202; “Halaf,” 202; “Haad,” 202; “Hantut,” 103, 117; “Tabas,” 86; “Rope,” 175.
Grazing, 13, 28, 42, 45, 52, 58, 59, 86, 87, 90, 95, 97, 101, 105, 109, 113, 114, 118, 182, 193, 194, 201, 202, 206, 211.
Gravel and shingle, 28, 38, 43, 45, 83, 85, 86, 90, 120, 148, 201, 205, 210.
Greek inscriptions, 30; merchants, 59, 105, 106, 182; Greeks, 23, 85, 97, 106, 182.
Gregory, 24.
Grenfell, Sir F., 252, 260.
Grewia (grewia-) tree, 158.
Griffiths, D.S.O., Major G. R., 157.
Grits (geological), 211.
Grivet, 307.
Grogan, Mr. E., 142, 144, 280.
Ground-hornbill, 162.
Ground-nuts, 81, 147, 156, 193.
Ground-squirrels, 307.
Grouse, sand, rock, night, 88, 99, 162.
“gu,” native granary, 145, 146.
Guarafard Hills, 139.
“guard ships,” Nile, 216.
Gubba, Mek of, 125.
Gubbat Khojali Village, 105.
Gubran family, 93.
“gughan” tree, 157, 158.
Guides, 137, 140, 149, 151, 203.
Guinea-fowl, 99, 162, 183, 309.
Guinea-worm, 79, 157, 184, 194.
Gule, 62, 118, 119, 120, 122; Jebel, 130.
Gum, 32, 47, 56, 57, 59, 80, 100, 106, 110, 118, 178, 179, 181, 182; royalty, 5, 7, 9, 13; “Hashab” and “Talha,” 6, 176; country, 179, 182; “garden,” “wild,” 177; caravan and transport, 217; tree, 154.
Gumburra, 183.
Gum Gum Hill, 123.
Gumr, 208.
Gumz Tribe, language, 125; (“Gumz” = “people”), 125.
Gunboats, 20, 21, 36, 44, 45, 79, 113, 146, 216.
“gungeleis” fruit, 125.
Gunjang Village, 134.
Gunnub W., 93.
Guns, 37, 79, 160, 161; Machine, Nordenfelt, Krupp, 97; stocks, 158; Maxims, 47.
Gurafarda Mts. (“horse-ears”), 138, 139.
Gureir Village, 33.
Gurjan Tau, 26.
“Gurung-dit” (God), 162.
Guttapercha, 7, 154, 158.
“Gwared” (Shillucks of royal descent), 199.
Gwynn, Major, 122, 136, 273-277.
Gypsum, 201.
=H.=
Habab Tribe, 96.
Habbania Tribe, Baggara, 179, 187.
“habil” (“habila”) tree, 158.
Habisa (Habisha), 174, 175, 179, 208.
Hadendoa Tribe, 91, 96-100, 101, 321; country, 217.
Hæmoglobinuria, 157.
Hafir, 204, 205, 206; camp (1885), 27; action (1896), 27.
Hafir El Igl, 104.
“hafirs” (tanks), 103, 117, 118, 120, 123.
Hafta R., 289.
Hagab Tribe, 83.
Hagar El Asal, 47.
Hagar Nush, 288, 289.
“hagins” (light, fast camels), breeding, 208.
Haikolab Tribe, 97.
Hajeir, 33.
“hakos” (outlaw), 100.
Halaib W., 88, 93, 95; harbour, 96.
Halawin Tribe, 118.
Halenga Tribe, Arab, 98.
Halfa, 1, 2, 7, 11-15, 17, 22, 23-27, 83, 85, 201, 202, 215; province, 2, 3, 5, 83, 85; district, 2, 25; town, 2, 19, 21, 83, 85, 201, 213, 214; railway station, 214, 215; P.T.O., 219; camp, 23, 35; headquarters troops (1885-96), 85; -Khartoum Railway, 4; -Kherma Railway, 7, 22, 218.
Halfaya, 1, 36, 103, 214.
Halfaya Cataract, 36.
Halfia, 36.
Halibai, 289.
“halidob” (cony), 88.
Hamar Tribe, Arab, 176, 177, 179, 182.
Hambokeb Valley, 97.
Hamboti, 208.
Hamdab Village, 38.
Hamdaui, 183.
Hamedomerab Tribe, 91, 92.
Hamedorab Tribe, 91, 93.
Hameg (Hamig) Tribe, 114, 118, 122, 123, 125, 227-229.
Hamitic descent, 91; languages, 319.
“Hamla,” 90, 95.
Hammam, 24.
Hammill, R.N., Commander, 23.
Hamoiet M., 289.
Hamran Village, 96; tribe, 99, 100, 101.
Hamur Is., 30.
Hanafi School (Jurisprudence), 10.
Haneik, 53.
Hannek Cataract, 17, 26, 35, 83; village, 27, 34, 204.
Hanolet, Capt., 279.
Hanr Tribe, 97.
Hanotaux, G., 298.
Hansal, 247.
Haraza, 208.
“haraz” tree, 84, 114, 176.
Harbours, 94, 96.
Hare, 96, 99, 183, 307.
Harrar, 240, 243, 257, 270; Annexation of, 237.
Harrington, Sir J., 291, 295.
Hartebeeste, “Tora,” 98, 110, 120, 308; “Jacksa,” 120; “Tiang” (bastard), 120, 139, 308; “Jackson’s,” 151, 161, 182, 308; “Neumann’s,” 120, 308.
Hartmann, 318.
Harun, 239-241.
Harvest, 192; tax, 189.
Hashab (Hashob), gum, 7, 13, 63, 108-114, 119, 173; Geneina and Gezira (gum), 13.
Hashab (acacia), 12, 13, 173, 174, 175.
Hashaba, 55, 173, 179.
“Hasoia,” vel Muti, vel Renk, 129.
Hassab El Gabu Oasis W., 202.
Hassanab Tribe, Arab, 203.
Hassania (Hassaniya), 53, 56, 57; island 56; tribe, Arab, nomad, 57, 104, 105, 118, 207, 208.
Hassan Allob, 57.
Hassan Nimr, 114.
Hassan Wad El Gharbi, 125.
Hatshepset, Queen, 222.
Haussmann, 298.
Haut Ubangi, 161.
Hawata Village, 107, 109, 114, 115.
Hawawir Tribe, Arab, nomad, 182, 201, 207, 208.
Hawazma Tribe, Arab, 179, 180, 196.
Haweiza or Haweid, 206.
Hawks, 309.
Hawkshaw, Mr., 232.
Haymes, Capt., 278.
Head-dress (native), 148, 149, 160, 161, 180, 192.
Headman (district), 25, 27, 160, 161.
Headquarters, 25, 27, 29, 31, 43, 53, 59, 62, 67, 114; province, 23, 34, 67, 118, 119, 154; district, 118, 119, 122, 125, 144, 182; Mamuria, 33; sheikh, 207; summer, 94; troops, 68, 85, 105; railway, 23, 85.
Health (healthy climate), 11, 13, 21, 83, 140, 147, 169, 170, 183, 184; unhealthy parts, 11, 79; see also Disease and Sickness.
Heath, Major, 257.
Heathen, 125.
Hebi (Hebba) Village, 37, 38, 41, 43; (1884), Lieut.-Col. Stewart murdered, 41; destroyed (1885), 41.
Hedgehogs, 307.
Hegerib Valley, 97.
Heglig, 13, 63, 64, 84.
“Heglig” tree, 84, 88, 109, 115, 140, 141, 151, 158, 208, 210.
Heidob Harbour, 96.
Heilaigabeir W., 92.
“Heiligen Kreuz,” 76.
“Hella” (village), 178.
Helba, 175, 177, 183.
Helile, 295.
Hellet Amara (Arbagi), 118.
Hellet-el-Nuer (Hellet Nuer), 19, 21, 73, 74, 82; (Aliab Dok), 74.
Hellet Hamad Village, 105.
Hellet El Nyam Nyam, 67.
Henri, Lt., 280.
Henry, Commandant, 273.
Herbin, 247, 248.
Herds, 91, 104, 128, 132, 134, 182, 194, 206.
Herminiera elaphroxylon, 157.
Hernia, 157.
Herodotus, 224, 225.
Heron, 139, 309.
Hesia Is., 58.
Hetani (Tani) Camp (1885), 32; Emir Heddai (1884), 32.
Heuglin’s gazelle, 308.
Hewett, Sir W., 257.
Hickman, Major T., 105.
Hicks Pasha, 58, 247, 255.
Hides and skins, 7, 9, 12, 21, 128, 130, 134, 135, 138, 148, 160, 179, 181, 211; wild animal, 12.
Hill, Bart., Major Sir H., 40.
Hills, 15, 24, 28-32, 42-47, 52-55, 58, 60-64, 80, 83-94, 97, 99, 104, 106, 108, 117-125, 131, 136, 138, 147, 149, 153, 154, 157, 173-182, 185, 190, 201, 202, 208-211, 217, 221; kopjes, 39.
Hippopotamus, 59, 67, 75, 76, 80, 99, 101, 110, 113, 120, 138, 142, 161, 165, 167-169, 194.
Historical, 15, 129, 184, 193, 197, 199, 213, 221-280; railways, 213, 214.
Hobagi, 208.
Hoburra, 125.
Hodgson, Captain H., 201, 203.
Holled Smith, Colonel, 258.
Hofrat El Mahas, mines, 156.
Homeitra W., 92.
“homra,” “homraya” grass, 13, 53, 103, 117, 155, 158.
“homr” tree, 176.
Homr Tribe, 179, 180, 217.
Honey, 100, 108; “Asal,” 106, 125, 155, 160, 190; bird, 107.
Hoopoes, 308.
Hora W., 93.
Hornblende porphyrite, 87.
Hornbill, ground, 162, 309.
Horse, 4, 42, 43, 95, 98, 101, 108, 109, 120, 122, 126, 182, 190; “Arab,” 120; “Tama,” 190; “Dongalawi,” 98, 182; men, 189; owning tribes, 217; breeding, 190, 217; sickness, 98; fly, 120, 159.
Hosh El Jeruf, 37.
Hosh El Geruf, 37, 42, 43.
Hoshiri, 90.
Hoskins, 311.
Hospitals, 6, 146, 183.
Hossinger, Capt., 271.
Hotel, 49, 85.
Houses, 27, 29, 30, 32, 33, 38-44, 47, 49, 51, 54, 55, 57, 75-77, 79, 80, 81, 85, 94, 105, 106, 107, 118, 147, 181, 190, 194, 206, 211; tax, 4, 5; destroyed, 177.
Huella Rapids, 37.
Hunter, General Sir A., flying column (1897), 35, 42, 44, 205, 254, 265, 267.
Hunter, Major, 257, 274, 276, 277.
Hunters, hunting, 66, 100, 101, 143, 157, 161, 179, 194, 196, 206.
Hussein Tribe, 186.
Husseinarti Is., 31.
Huts, 23, 25, 28, 29, 30, 34, 39-44, 74, 76, 77, 79, 80, 81, 133, 134, 139, 140, 149, 152, 154, 168, 170, 187, 193, 204, 205, 206, 209.
Hydrobromide of quinine, 184.
Hydrocele, 157.
Hyenas, 88, 99, 144, 307.
Hygiene, 156; sanitary efforts, 13.
Hyphæne thebaica, 208.
Hypodermic injections, 184.
Hyrax, 307.
=I.=
Ibembo, 80.
Ibex, 88, 96, 98, 109, 308.
Ibis (white), 162.
Ibrahim Wad Mahmud, captured (Feb. 1904), 122, 123, 278.
Ibrahim (Sultan, Wadai), 274.
Id-El-Ud, 173.
Implements and utensils (native)—
Axes, 120, 160, 176, 177, 178, 181, 194.
Buckets, 125, 181, 209.
Cooking utensils, 181.
Hoes, 146.
Mill (corn), 176.
Picks, 194.
Plough, 84, 105.
Spades, 194.
Imports, 2, 9, 84, 108, 177, 189, 284.
Inderab, 208.
Inderab tree, 157.
Indian magistrates, courts, procedure, 9, 10; well construction, “butcha,” 210.
Indian corn (maize), 32, 156, 160, 193.
Indiarubber, 5, 7, 9, 13, 80, 154, 155, 177, 182; trees yielding, 155; collecting, 155.
Industries and crafts (native), 9, 158, 187, 189; bell making, 194; blacksmith, 145, 194; chain making, 194; leather work, 9, 88; mats, 84, 87, 160, 187, 194; pipe making, 194; pottery, 9, 194; thatching, 194; spinning, 187; rope making, 84; weavers, 9, 160, 186; wood carving, 160.
Infantry, 47, 49.
Infidels, 104.
Ingassana Tribe, 122.
Inhabitants, 58, 59, 62, 74-79, 83-86, 94, 99, 100-109, 117-125, 129, 130, 136, 137, 142-144, 152, 178, 181-185, 187, 190, 205, 207; riverain, 86.
Inlet, 96.
Inscriptions, 104, 203, 313; Greek, 30.
Insects, 73, 85, 210; beetles, 209.
Insectivora, 307.
Inspector-General, 3; of Prisons, 3; slavery repression, 3; districts, 1, 44, 94; Upper Nile Province, 139.
Intelligence, Director of, 3.
Inundation, 134, 141, 153, 154.
Invasion of Sudan, 85, 317.
Ipomoea, 302, 303.
Iron, 9, 13, 135, 144, 146, 148, 156, 158, 176, 185; stone, 153, 155, 158; smelting, 9, 158, 160; ore, 156, 158; bracelets and anklets, “Lungkok,” 145.
Irrigation, 7, 15, 54, 85, 98, 101, 125, 175; Director-General of, 3.
Irtidi Village, 27.
Is W., 91, 92.
Isabelline gazelle, 183, 308.
Ishashi Island, 39.
Iskenie M., 289.
Islam, 161, 163, 189.
“Island of Merowe,” 45, 103.
Islands of Auli, 38.
Islands 17, 21, 23, 25-27, 31, 35, 37-41, 44-47, 52-85, 91, 103, 132, 134; grass, 59; floating, 67.
Ismailia (Gondokoro), 233.
Ismail Pasha (1882), burnt, 45, 105, 184; boats abandoned (1820), 39.
Ismail Pasha (Khedive), 232, 236-238, 240; (1887), 22; Barracks, 68.
Ismail Yagub Pasha, 236, 239; Ayub, 256, 303.
Isnabir W., 104.
Itang, 131, 134-136, 218, 296.
Italian frontier, 97; territory, 99; Italians, 100, 101, 253, 260, 261, 270.
Ivory, 5, 7, 9, 12, 32, 74, 80, 135, 139, 152, 154, 156, 161, 177, 179, 182, 189; hunting, 139; bracelets (gong), 146, 160.
=J.=
Jaalin Tribe, Arab (1822), (1823), (1897), 45, 53, 57, 100, 103, 104, 105, 107, 114, 118, 119, 129, 179, 180, 182.
Jaalin Kenana Tribe. See Kenana.
Jaber (Fung Conqueror), 125.
Jabranza, 125.
Jackals, 307.
Jackson, Maj., 266.
Jackson, Lieut., 273.
Jakdul W., 33, 34, 207, 209, 213.
Jange, 126.
Jan R., 154, 165, 167.
Jebelawin Tribe, 123, 125; language, 123, 125; aborigines of Darfur, 187.
Jebelein, 20, 21, 58, 60, 71, 119, 120, 126, 130; massacre (1882), 62.
Jebel R. See Bahr el Jebel R.
Jebel Aar, 289.
Jebel Abdanab, 125.
Jebel Abd el Daim, 55.
Jebel Abiad, 201.
Jebel Abud, 26.
Jebel Abuldugu, 123.
Jebel Abu Gamal, 99, 290, 296.
Jebel Abu Hadid, 179.
Jebel Abu Hodeid W., 92.
Jebel Abu Shenkawi, 209.
Jebel Afada Gumbib, 289.
Jebel Agadi, 122, 123.
Jebel Ago, 85.
Jebel Ahmed Agha (vel Bila), 63, 64, 71, 120, 123, 126, 129, 130.
Jebel Alibersi, 26.
Jebel Alimula, 24.
Jebel Anderaib, 290.
Jebel Arashkol, 55, 56, 71.
Jebel Asma (J. Osma), 41.
Jebel Asotriba, 91.
Jebel Atin, 152.
Jebel Atshan, 179, 180.
Jebel Auli, 52, 53, 71.
Jebel Awyn, 187, 189.
Jebel Barga, 24.
Jebel Barima (vel Breima), 53.
Jebel Barkal, 42, 86, 222, 224.
Jebel Benefer, 289.
Jebel Buyut, 58.
Jebel Daier, 174, 180.
Jebel Dali, 118, 119, 120.
Jebel Dal, 25.
Jebel Derish, 174.
Jebel Dimr, 125.
Jebel Egerdan, 45.
Jebel Eigat, 86.
Jebel Elba, range, W., 87.
Jebel Eliri, 174, 175, 180, 196.
Jebel El Geri, 123.
Jebel El Hella, 180, 189.
Jebel El Ioghub, 174, 180.
Jebel El Sadda, 104.
Jebel Eigat, 86.
Jebel Ein, v. Jebelein.
Jebel Erba, 89, 93.
Jebel Eunice, 290.
Jebel Falabut, 125.
Jebel Faronge, 125, 126.
Jebel Fas, 183.
Jebel Firket, Action (1896), 25.
Jebel Gainshur, 123.
Jebel Gedir, 67, 174, 244.
Jebel Gerawid, 123.
Jebel Gerebin, 119.
Jebel Gereiwa, 122.
Jebel Gerri Railway Station, 214.
Jebel Gilif, range, 207, 208, 209, 210.
Jebel Gule, 130, 217.
Jebel Gulsa, 290.
Jebel Gurun, 52.
Jebel Hamra, 25.
Jebel Haraza, 173, 176, 179.
Jebel Heina, 95.
Jebel Idris (vel J. Gule), 25, 122.
Jebel Iliri, 179.
Jebel Jerok, 64.
Jebel Kadero, 174.
Jebel Kaja Katul, 173.
Jebel Kaja Serrug, 174.
Jebel Kajmar, 174.
Jebel Kari, 174.
Jebel Kashaf, 201, 202.
Jebel Kashangaru, 123.
Jebel Kassala, 97, 98.
Jebel Keili, 123.
Jebel Kershungal, 179.
Jebel Kindirma, 175.
Jebel Kirbekan, 39, 40; action (1885), 49.
Jebel Kon, 173, 179.
Jebel Krondi, 180.
Jebel Kukura, 126.
Jebel Kulgeili, 38, 39.
Jebel Kurmuk, 123.
Jebel Kuror, 85, 86.
Jebel Lado, 77, 80.
Jebel Lafol (terraced), 141, 147, 148.
Jebel Lukdi, 100.
Jebel Maganus, 180.
Jebel Maiak, 123.
Jebel Makakush, 210, 211.
Jebel Mandara (Mendera), 53.
Jebel Marra, range, 184, 185, 186, 187, 190; stronghold, 187.
Jebel Mashushanai, 92.
Jebel Masmum (Maznum), 119.
Jebel Meesat, 289.
Jebel Meidob, 184, 185.
Jebel Menze, 125.
Jebel Metongwe, 125.
Jebel Mokram, 97.
Jebel Moro, 174.
Jebel Moya, 118.
Jebel Mulki, 125.
Jebel Nakam, 44.
Jebel Osma, 41.
Jebel Rafit, 87, 88, 92.
Jebel Ragreig, 123.
Jebel Rejaf, 80.
Jebel Rera, 122.
Jebel Royan, 47, 179.
Jebel Sadek, 26.
Jebel Safra, 97.
Jebel Sahaba, 23.
Jebel Sanai, 97.
Jebel Shabba, 95.
Jebel Shukuk, 40.
Jebel Soga, W., 169.
Jebel Sonka, 136.
Jebel Sude, 125.
Jebel Surkum, 123.
Jebel Tabi, 120, 122, 123.
Jebel Tagabo, 184, 185.
Jebel Tagale, 174, 180.
Jebel Talodi, 174, 180.
Jebel Taraka, 32.
Jebel Tawal, 104.
Jebel Tira El Akhdar, 175.
Jebel Tuema, 58.
Jebel Tyem, 47.
Jebel Ulu, 64.
Jebel Umali, 45.
Jebel Um Durrug, 179.
Jebel Us, 43.
Jebel Wad El Duga, 42.
Jeddah, 94.
Jerboa, 307.
Jessen, Mr., 148, 151.
Jerma (Othman), 274-276.
Jigarnarti Island, 31.
Johar, 227.
John, King of Abyssinia, 236, 238-243, 257, 258.
Johnston, Sir H. H., 320.
Jokau, 135.
“Jo-uk” (“Great Creator”), 197.
Juba R. (vel Akobo), 137.
Juba R. (E. Africa), 237-239.
Judicial Commissioner, 9, 10; Judge, 9; Justice, 9, 10.
“Juet” (arrow), 145.
Jugub W., 92.
Junction of Niles, 1, 19, 53, 111, 117.
Jungle, 52, 62, 113, 173. See Bush and Scrub.
Junker, Dr. (Explorer), 16, 153, 166, 170, 260.
Jur R. (vel Sueh R.), 16, 154, 169, 170.
Jur Tribe, 145, 155-158, 160, 197.
Jur Ghattas, 161.
Jura District, 32.
Jura Wells, 40.
Jurwel District, 133.
Jussiæa diffusa, 303.
Justice, 9, 10, 144, 147.
=K.=
Kababish Tribe, Arab, nomad, 179, 182, 201, 204, 206, 207, 217; Omatto section, 205, 207; country, 217.
Kabarega, 237, 262.
Kabeinat, 39; cataract, 39.
Kabush, 119.
Kabush forest, 119.
Kabushia, 103, 104, 105; railway station, 214.
Kadalo (El Kadalo) Tribe, 125.
Kadi, 11; grand, 10.
Kafi Kingi, 154.
Kagmar, 175, 179.
Kahl, 91.
Kaibar Cataract, 26, 35.
Kaja District, 182, 183; tribe, 188.
Kaja Katul, 179, 182, 189.
Kaja Serug, 184.
Kajabi, 34.
Kajatti, 28.
Kajbar (vel Kaibar, vel Kagbar) Cataract (rapid), 17, 22, 26, 35.
Kajoj Hills, wells, 87, 92.
Kaka, 21, 66, 71, 192, 193, 196, 197; wood station (1902), 21, 67, 126, 129, 130.
“Kakamut” tree, 113, 114.
Kalakla, 52.
“Kalto” tree, 158.
Kamar El Din, 189.
Kamasab, 43.
Kambal Village, 125.
Kamlin District, 2, 7, 105; town, 2, 7, 118; P.T.O., 219; sugar factory, 7.
Kamoreib W., 93.
Kamotit W., 92, 93.
Kan Island, Stewart’s steamer wrecked (1884), 41.
Kandi Island, 39.
Kang R., 151.
Kanisa Village, 20, 21, 38, 76, 82, 219.
Kankalab Village, 30.
“Kantar” (100 lbs.), 113.
“Kantûsh” (pot), 175, 181.
“Kara,” 12, 181.
Karad (vel Kurot), 31; brigade headquarters (1885), 31.
Karafab District, 32.
Karamalla, 259, 260.
Karkoj Village, 109, 113, 114, 122, 129, 219.
Karnak, 185.
Karora, 95, 96, 288.
Karshawal, 21, 62, 126.
“Karu” Land, 12.
Karuno R., 148, 149; tribe, 148; country, 149.
Karunga, 185.
Kash, v. Kush.
Kashangaru Mt., 123.
Kash Kash District, 63.
Kasr Dongola, 204.
Kasr Wad Nimiri, 28.
Kassaba Oasis W., 202.
Kassala, 7, 11, 49, 50, 94, 96, 97, 98, 99, 106, 107, 109, 214, 217, 218; province, 1, 2, 7, 11, 104, 336; district, 2, 218; town, 1, 2, 7, 11, 274; P.T.O., 219; fall, 257; capture, 253, 258; tribes, 325.
Kassingar, 36, 42.
Katat Kennasha Reef, 95.
Kavirondo People, 138.
Kawa (vel El Eis) District, 2, 57, 118, 218; P.O. 219.
Kawahla Tribe, 103, 109, 119, 179, 180, 182.
“Kazan” (cooking pot), 36.
Kebkebia, 189, 333.
Keibe, 189.
Keik Village (cone of earth), 140.
Keilak, 166, 183.
Keili District, 119, 120, 122; town, 122, 123, 130.
Kena, 86, 93, 221.
Kenana Tribe, Arab, 103, 109, 119, 179, 196.
Kenisa, vel “Heiligen Kreuz,” 36, 76.
Kenset, 221-224.
Kenuz, 57.
Keppel, R.N., Comdr. Colin, 36.
Keren, 98, 219.
Keriri, 187, 265.
Kerma, 7, 22, 26, 27, 83-86, 201, 213-216; railway station, 214-218; P.T.O., 219; -Halfa Railway, 7, 22, 218.
Karraba, 83.
Kerreri Hills, 187; battle (1898), 47.
Kesh, 221.
Khalifa, 47, 55, 177, 178, 187, 196, 251-268.
Khalifa Abdalla, 118.
Khandak District, 2; town, 29, 143, 201, 204, 205; rest house, 29.
Khannag Village, 28.
“Kharif” (“Kherif”) (rainy season), 21, 98, 183.
Khartoum, 1, 2, 7, 10-15, 17, 19-21, 44-56, 74, 85, 104, 105, 111, 117, 118, 128, 129, 176, 177, 190, 210, 213-218, 223-259, 268-280; provinces, 1, 2, 3, 47, 49; district, 2; destroyed (1885), 49; tribes, 325, 326; P.T.O, 219; -Halfa Railway, 4, 49.
Khartoum, North (vel Halfaya), 1, 7, 47, 49, 103, 105, 213, 214, 215, 216, 219; railway station, 214-218; P.T.O., 219.
Khashm El Girba, 99.
Khatmia, 98.
Khawalda Tribe, 119.
Khaya Senegalensis, 13, 155.
Khedive Ismail Pasha, 213.
Khedive Mohammed Ali, 105.
Khojalab Tribe, 105.
Khojali, 154.
Khor Abent, 89.
Khor Abnaheir, 108, 109.
Khor Abnakheir, 99.
Khor Abu Dom, 34.
Khor Abu Habl, 174-177.
Khor Abu Herejil, 37, 42.
Khor Adaia, 89, 90.
Khor Adar (vel Khor Yal), 120, 126.
Khor Aderot, 89.
Khor Adit, 89, 90.
Khor Angwatiri, 97.
Khor Arab Basin, 89, 90, 95.
Khor Arbat, 89, 90.
Khor Attar, 20, 70, 142.
Khor Balm, 143.
Khor Balentega, 63, 120.
Khor Baraka, 11, 95, 289.
Khor Barameyu, 89, 90.
Khor Bengar, 89, 90.
Khor Biba, 64.
Khor Bombode, 125.
Khor Bowal, 100.
Khor Dada, 289.
Khor Diar, 142.
Khor Deleib, 62, 74, 120.
Khor Dimm, 90.
Khor Dirab, 89.
Khor El Dahab, 126.
Khor El Deleb, 165, 166.
Khor El Dom, 100.
Khor El Gash (vel Khor Gash), 97.
Khor El Sawari, 38.
Khor El Shungui, 38.
Khor Erheib, 89, 90.
Khor Filus, 139, 140, 141, 142.
Khor Ganna, 123.
Khor Garar, 89, 90.
Khor Garre (vel Khor Jokau), 120, 132, 135, 136.
Khor Gasa, 125.
Khor Gash, 97, 100.
Khor Gaweir, 142.
Khor Gaza El Abiad, 63.
Khor Gebet, 95.
Khor Gemmeiza, 123.
Khor Gersat, 99.
Khor Godamaieb, 97.
Khor Gullui, 99.
Khor Gusab, 57.
Khor Habob, 89.
Khor Hadasana, 90.
Khor Haieit W., 89, 90.
Khor Hamadein, 43.
Khor Hareitri, 90.
Khor Haweili, 43.
Khor Hudi, 214.
Khor Jegjegi, 104.
Khor Jokau, 135.
Khor Khashgil, 174.
Khor Laiameb, 89.
Khor Mahaleit, 89.
Khor Makeir, 136.
Khor Masurkum, 126.
Khor Mesangeir (vel Khor Balentega), 63, 64.
Khor Misra, 89.
Khor Musa, action (1888), 23.
Khor Nerol (vel Khor Chirol), 141.
Khor Nifar, 142.
Khor Oi W., 89, 90.
Khor Okwat, 89, 90.
Khor Rau, 16, 64, 120, 129.
Khor Royan, 99, 100, 101, 291.
Khor Sangeir (vel Khor Rau), 64.
Khor Seraf Said, 106, 107.
Khor Sonka, 120.
Khor Teiutelri, 89.
Khor Thamiam W., 89, 90.
Khor Tomat, 114, 120.
Khor Totali, 89.
Khor Umbrega, 101.
Khor Um Degul (vel Khor Agaliin, vel Khor Mehara), 110.
Khor Um Hagar, 291, 295, 296.
Khor Wandida, 148.
Khor Yabus, 120, 122, 123.
Khor Yudib, 90.
Khor Zuar, 125.
Khors, 21, 39-45, 53, 63-66, 70, 75, 79, 80, 86, 88-90, 94, 96-99, 103, 120, 123, 125, 126, 132, 135, 137, 139-143, 149, 153, 154, 166, 168, 173, 174, 185, 190, 196, 205, 210.
Khulla, 43, 83.
Khursi District, 2, 177.
“Kibis” (large spear), 179.
Kidana Miriam (outlaw), 100.
Kilgour, Mr. G., 208.
Kimberley, Lord, 288.
King John of Abyssinia, slain (1889), 108.
Kingfishers, 309.
Kir R. (vel Sobat), 131.
Kirbekan Rapids, 37, 39.
Kirbekan battle, 249.
Kiri Village, 20, 125, 126.
Kirin, 63, 64, 67, 136, 217; district, 119.
Kirkman, Col., 236, 238.
Kiro, 21; Sudanese station (1901), 79, 80, 81, 82, 146.
“Kisra” (a food), 176, 181.
Kit R., 17, 169, 170.
“Kitab-Dali” (Penal Code), 186.
“Kitala” (Wild Ostrich), 177.
Kitchener, Lord, 85, 247, 252, 258, 266, 273, 280, 289.
Kitchener, Col. W., 268.
“Kittr” (acacia) thorn bush, 13, 99, 103, 109, 113, 114, 118, 119, 139, 141, 181.
“Klato” tree, 158.
Klipspringer, 88, 96, 109, 308.
Koatil Tribe, 91, 92.
“Koba” tree, 158.
Kobé, old capital of Darfur, 190.
Kodok, 2, 11, 15, 16, 21, 50, 60, 66-78, 126, 130, 132, 135, 142, 143, 193, 194, 196, 266, 272; Dueim Itinerary, 57-67; Anglo-Egyptian Expedn. (10.9.98), 68; P.T.O., 219.
Kodokol Village, 30.
Kokreb Valley, 89, 90.
Kolang El Wat, 63.
Kolkilai, 95.
Kolong Wad Akwai, 129.
Komi Island, 29.
Komilab Tribe, 96.
Koptos, 221.
Kor, King of Darfur, 186.
Koraitib, 99, 290.
Koran, 187.
Koratong (vel Waratong), 136.
Kordofan, 2, 7, 9, 11, 13, 32, 59, 84, 106, 118, 173-186, 189, 201, 205-207; N., 7, 179, 182, 183, 217; N.W. 183; S., 13, 58, 179, 182, 183, 217, 218, 231-279; S.W., 182; S.E., 183; E., 175-178; W., 175-178, 183; past and present, 177; gum, 56, 57, 106; port of, 182; prov. wasted by Khalifa, re-occupied (Dec. 1899), 177; a part of Darfur Kingdom until 1882, when subjected, 184; tribes, 318, 319, 326, 327.
Korei District, 34.
Koreish Tribe, 91.
Kori District, 32.
Korosko Desert, 43, 83, 86-88, 91, 93, 213, 217.
Korti, District, 2, 34, 35, 45, 85, 207, 208, 209, 217, 218, 248, 249; Nile Expedn. advanced base (1884-5), 33; P.O. 219.
Kos R., 141, 142.
Kosha, 2, 22, 25, 26, 35, 83, 85, 203; railway station, 215; P.T.O., 219; Dulgo railway, 26.
Kosseir, 86, 93, 221.
Kossinga, 154.
Koya, 26.
Koyeka, 26.
Kraals, 149.
Kreich Tribe, 159, 160.
Kubalab Railway Station, 214.
Kuchuk Ali, 143.
Kudu, 96, 98, 110, 120, 182, 308.
“Kugur,” 180.
Kulba, 25.
Kulgeili, 38, 39.
Kulla River Column (1885), 43.
Kumna Temple, 24.
Kunama, 291.
Kunjara, 186.
Kur, 136, 199.
Kur Deng Achuk Wad Agweia, 129.
“Kûr Konga” (God), 162.
Kurbeilab Tribe, 91, 92.
Kurgi, 107.
Kurkur, 202.
“Kurmut” tree, 109.
Kuror, 83; railway station, 215.
Kuru R., 154.
“Kuru” tree, 158.
Kurwa District, 67.
Kush (Kash or Kesh), 221-228, 318.
Kutna Swamp, 175.
“Kuttab” schools, 11.
Kutum, 189.
Kuturu, 125.
Kwa El Mango, 66.
Kwara, 109, 114.
Kwasana, 290.
Kwé, 64.
“Kwel” tree, 151, 155.
Kwoilualtong Village, 134.
=L.=
Labasoi W., 93.
Labore, 20.
Labour, 7, 49, 84, 160.
Lado, 17, 18, 21, 79, 80, 81, 82; Mt., 79; village, 146; enclave, 1, 79, 80, 153, 234-243; 259-264; 279.
Lagia Oasis, village, 202, 203, 204, 206.
Lahawin tribe, 104.
Lajak, 132.
Lak District, 143.
Lakadawia, 57.
Lake Abu Serai, 174.
Lake Albert, 15, 17, 18, 19, 21.
Lake Albert Edward, 15.
Lake Ambadi, 167, 168, 169.
Lake Chad, 184, 185.
Lake Choga, 17.
Lake El Abiad, 175.
Lake El Birka, 174.
Lake El Rahad, 174.
Lake El Sinut, 175.
Lake Iro, 185.
Lake Keilak, 175.
Lake Kit, 168.
Lake No (vel Moghren El Buhur), 18-21, 68-75, 79, 153, 165, 169, 170, 179, 190, 193, 196, 197.
Lake Powendael, 76.
Lake Rudolf, 135, 149, 151, 273, 274.
Lake Sherkeila, 174, 175.
Lake Tata, 138, 139.
Lake Tsana, 19, 217.
Lake Victoria, 17, 138.
Lake Victoria Nyanza, 15.
Lakes and lagoons, 73-77, 79, 138, 142, 168, 169, 174, 185, 194, 209; sulphurous, 204; regulating effects of, 16, 17; lagoons, 73-79; 142, 143.
La Kéthulle, 262, 263.
“Lalob,” 137.
Land tax, 4; settlement, 7, 13.
Landerouin, 271, 272.
Landing places, 21, 23, 27, 29-31, 49, 52, 66, 68, 70, 74, 144, 169.
Landolphia owariensis, 13, 154.
Landolphia florida, 155.
Langeb R., 97.
Language and dialects, 123, 125, 138, 145, 147-160, 161, 163, 318.
Lannoy, 262.
“Laot” acacia, 13, 109, 113, 118.
Largeau, Lieut., 271, 272.
“Laterite” (ferruginous stone), 153.
Latex (rubber juice), 155.
Latti District, 30.
Latitude and longitude, 1, 67, 74-76; 79, 81, 82, 85-89, 93, 96, 109, 119, 122, 131, 132, 134, 138, 144, 149, 165, 173, 181-184, 201, 207, 217, 221.
Latuka Hills, 141; tribe, 147.
Lau Village, 168.
Launches, 21, 136, 137, 218.
Lava, 137, 185.
Law, Mohammedan, 10; English, 10; Egyptian, 9, 10; civil, 10; criminal, 9; customary, 10; by proclamation, 2; commercial, 10, 284.
“lawai” (well lining), 175.
Lebab Island, 28.
Legal, secretary, 3, 9; department, 6; procedure, 9, 10; codes, 9, 10; legislation, 10; training, 9, 10.
Legia W., 92, 205.
Leguminosæ family, 155.
Lemaire, 278.
Le Marinel, 262.
Lemons, 84.
Lemur, 307.
Leopard, 88, 96, 99, 110, 120, 122, 151, 162, 182, 307.
Lepsius, 311, 312, 315.
Leptadenia spartium, 12, 181.
Leungton, 63.
Levels, 74-77, 79-81, 85, 97, 142, 206.
Lewis, Colonel, 265, 267, 268.
Lianas (rubber), 13.
Libois, 262.
Libyans, The, 222, 317.
Licences, 3; game, 12; liquor, 97.
Liddell, Captain J. S., 142, 144.
“lif” (coir), 84.
Light-houses at Suakin, 5.
Lignite, lignitic coal, 13, 20.
Lime, 122, 201; stone, 209, 210.
Lime trees, 81, 107.
Limes, 107, 109, 161, 173.
Linant Pasha de Bellefonds, 237.
Lions, 60, 67, 96, 99, 110, 120, 151, 162, 182, 197, 307.
Liotard, M., 261, 271.
Liquors, 97, 284.
“littel,” 202.
Lizards, 309.
Loads (carriers, pack, cart), 159, 217, 218.
Loak Province, 196.
Loat, Mr., 310.
Locusts, 95, 98, 156, 167.
Loingwin, 63.
Lokova Tribe, 147.
Lolle R., 70, 166, 197.
Lom, Chief, 147.
Long, Colonel, 234, 238.
Lowala Village, 80, 147, 148.
“luak” (cow stable), 145.
“lubia” beans, 57, 126, 146, 160.
Ludolphus, 119.
Lueisa Village, 109.
Lui R., 289.
Lul R.C. Mission, 68.
“lulu” tree, fruit, 154, 158; Sudan date, 155.
Luluba Tribe, 81.
“lung kok” (iron bracelets), 145.
Lupton Bey, 243, 256, 259, 271.
Lutu Hill, 153.
L’wâl Burrajôk (Shaitan), 162.
Lybian cat, 307.
Lyttleton, General, 265.
Lybian Desert, 1, 23.
=M.=
Ma-ah (Shaitan), 162.
“maal,” price of wife, 128, 129; “fine-maal,” “blood-maal,” 128, 129.
Maalia Tribe, 187.
“maata” (farm ostrich), 177.
Ma’atuk, 56, 57, 118.
Mbima, 80.
Macdonald’s brigade (1896), 25; expedition, 151, 265, 270.
“Mach-far,” 176.
Machar, 135.
Macmillan, 280.
Madi W., 92.
Madi Tribe, 159, 160, 161.
Mading R., 144.
Mafasa Village, 107.
Magal, 33.
Magashi, 34.
Magenis, 183.
Magistrates, 9, 10.
“Maglufa” (saddle, riding camel), 218.
Magnetic bearings, 201-211.
Magois Tribe, 148, 149.
Magunga, 21.
Mahagi, 286.
Mahamid Tribe, 186, 190.
Maharia Tribe, 186, 190.
Maharib, maheirib, grass, 103, 117.
Mahas, district, 2, 26, 206; tribe, 83, 84, 105.
Mahbale, 57.
Mahdi, Mahdists, 28, 56, 108, 177, 179, 181, 243-260; tomb, 47; place, 58; revolt, 186; leader, 105; Mahdism, 94.
Mahdia, 98, 100, 105, 106, 109, 119, 181, 187, 204.
Mahmud (1897), 45, 254-265.
Mahogany, African, 13, 155, 158.
Mahon, Colonel, 268, 275.
Mahtul W., 31, 210.
Mai Ambessa, 296.
Maietib W., 92, 101, 296.
Majam, 144.
“Makada” (slaves), 108.
“Makhzan” (reservoir), 85, 88.
Malaria, 13, 98, 107, 113, 156, 157, 184, 189.
Mallaha, 58.
Mallak Tribe, 91, 92.
“Malika” School of Jurisprudence, 10.
“Malote” hoe, 147, 160.
Malwad, 28.
Mameluke Fort, 25.
Mammals, 307.
Mamum R., 185.
Mamur, 1, 2, 27, 68, 104; police officer, 104; residence, 25, 27, 29, 31, 43, 44, 56, 57, 95, 105, 118, 119; headquarters, 107.
Mamuria Headquarters, 33.
Managil District, 2, 117, 118.
Mandalla Tribe, 159.
Mangara, 58.
Mangin, Capt., 271, 272.
Manioc, 81, 161.
Manir Island, 55.
“Manjera,” 58.
Mansur Koti District, 32.
Mansurab Tribe, 91.
Maps, 23, 36, 41, 73, 74, 75, 86, 142, 149, 151, 349.
Marabia, action (29.4.83), 58.
Marabou stork, 309.
“Marakh” bush, tree, 12, 174, 208.
Marble, 40.
Marchand, Colonel, 16, 68, 70, 264-272.
Mareb R., 298.
Marghum, 29, 205.
Markets, 4, 27, 29, 30-34, 45, 47, 53, 56, 57, 81, 91, 95, 105, 114, 119, 135, 177, 181, 182, 218; bazaar, 49.
Marl, 185.
Marno (explorer), 16, 70, 167.
Marocco, 15.
Marshes (swamps, morass, bog), 15-18, 52, 53, 58, 60, 63-70, 73-81, 113, 114, 120, 123, 130, 133, 134, 136-139, 142, 149, 151, 153, 154, 156, 165-170, 173, 174, 175, 185, 217; vegetation, 157 (see also Sudd).
Martini, Signor, 274, 289.
Maruga Village, 45.
“Marakh,” 173, 181.
Marriage (native), 128.
Martyr, Lieut.-Colonel, 270.
Masabat Tribe, 186, 187.
Masabat Kunjara (ruling class of Fors), 186.
Masambaga, 125.
Mashango Tribe, 138.
Masilli, 95.
Mason, Colonel (1874), 189, 257.
Masran Island, 60.
Massacre of Egyptian troops, 62.
Massadab Tribe, 179.
Massawa, 50, 98, 217, 219, 221.
Masurkum, 126.
Matemma (vel Gallabat), 108, 258.
Mather, M.P., Sir William, 11.
Matj, 144.
Matmar District, 64.
Matruk-el-Wabur, 169.
Mats, 84.
Matthews, Major, 192, 276, 304.
Matuka, 23.
Mawalads Tribe, 118.
Maxse, Capt., 40, 266.
Maxwell, Colonel, 265.
“Maya” (spills), 74, 114.
Maya, Signora, 70.
Mbima, 80.
M’bomu R., 298.
Mayyat Eléri, 166.
Mayyeh Nur, 166.
McMillan, Mr., 139.
McKillop, Pasha, 237.
McNeill, Gen., 257.
Meat, 49, 148.
Mecca, 98, 108.
Medaniim Tribe, 119.
Medemia argum palm, 87.
Medical officer, 3; medicinal plants, 88.
Mediterranean, 1, 7, 15, 17, 33, 49, 85.
Megabari, The, 226.
Megabda Village, 30.
Mehara, 110.
Meheiriga W., 93.
“Mehkema Sharia” Courts, 10.
Meinom, 140.
Meisa W., 91, 92.
“Mek” (head Sheikh), 122, 123, 125, 180, 327; (ruler), 192; (king), 196.
“Mek” Abadalla, 125.
“Mek” Abulang, 125.
“Mek” Abu Ras, 125.
“Mek” Adam, 125.
“Mek” Agoda, 122.
“Mek” Ahmed Wad Mohammed (El Wishari), 125.
“Mek” Amaka, 125.
“Mek” Anok, 145.
“Mek” Fadiet Wad Kwad Keir (1904), 196.
“Mek” Geili, 177, 180.
“Mek” Ghezan, of, 125.
“Mek” Ghormaz, 125.
“Mek” Gubba, 125.
“Mek” Idris, 125.
“Mek” Jibara, 125.
“Mek” Keili, Acting of, 123.
“Mek” Khamis, 125.
“Mek” Kur Wad Nedok, deposed (1903), 196.
“Mek” Mansur, 125.
“Mek” Nimr, 100, 105.
“Mek” Regab Hassan (Abadaro), 125.
“Mek” Ya Karda, 125.
Melani thicket, 201, 202.
Melbis, 177.
Meleikab Tribe, 93.
Melha Tribe, Arab, 190.
Meliaceæ family (botanical), 155.
Melik Island, 24.
Melik of Argo, 27.
Melile, 137.
Melit district, 190.
Melkem (vel Melken) Hill, 120, 123.
Mellawiya, 99.
Melons, 7, 84, 175, 176, 178, 190, 193; water, 160, 185, 189.
Melut, 21, 67, 123, 217; P.T.O., 219.
Memphis, 223, 224, 311.
Menelek, Emperor, Treaty (May, 1902), 135, 238, 239, 257, 258, 270, 291, 296-298.
Mengalla, see Mongalla.
Merchandise, merchants, see Trade.
Merib R., 288.
Merifab Tribe, 83.
“Merissa” (liquor), 108, 147, 176, 180, 187, 193, 199.
Mernat Island, “Bordein” steamer aground (1885), 47.
Mero Island, 44, 45.
Meroe Island, 103; railway, 214; Pyramid, 214; P.T.O., 219.
Merowé district, 1, 2, 7, 22, 27, 30-44, 50, 83, 86, 105, 208, 215, 216, 218.
Mersa Barghut, anchorage, 95.
Mersa Durur, 95.
Mesellemia district, 2, 117-119; tribe, 179.
Meshra ferry, 55.
Meshra Abid, 115.
Meshra El Abiad, 36, 37, 42.
Meshra El Hella, 57.
Meshra, El Rek (vel Meshra Rek), 153-157, 159, 163, 169, 170, 216, 218, 219.
Meshra Ghayafa, 56.
Meshra Leungtom (Domaia), 21.
Meshra Mallaha, 58.
Meshra Meteima, 64.
Meshra Rom (vel Tereiti), 21, 66.
Meshra Shaggara, 57.
Meshra Sherif, 62.
Meshra Zeraf, 21, 66, 126.
Meshra Zubeid, 60.
Meshras, 54, 113.
Meshushenai, 91.
Messeria Tribe, Baggara, 179, 217.
Metamorphic rocks, sandstone, 32; rocks, 209.
Metemma town, 33, 45, 50, 208-210, 213, 217; destroyed (1897), 45; reconnaisance (21.1.85), 45.
Methok Village, 136.
Meyer, Capt., 290.
Miaus W., 92.
Mib W., 90.
Mice, 193.
Mikael, Walad, 238-243.
Military command, 3; posts, 77, 156.
Milk, 145, 160, 179, 194, 196.
Milk plant, 208.
Mima, 187.
Mimosa, 29, 30, 33, 39, 41, 44, 52, 60, 168, 204, 205; Mimosæ family, 155.
Minedrib, 55.
Minerals, 9, 13, 83, 88, 156, 176, 201, 211, 221.
Mines, 83, 156; old, 211; miners’ ancient colony, 87; mining company, 92; shafts, 88.
Miriam Tajer, 190.
Missionary stations and schools, 11, 68, 70, 76, 163, 192.
Mist, 89, 94.
“Mit Afifi” cotton, 117.
Mitateb, 86, 91, 101.
Mitragyne Africana (Rubiacea), 157.
Mittu Tribe, 159, 160, 161.
Mixed Tribunals, 284, 285.
Moama District, 196.
Mocha Hills (Abyssinia), 138.
Mogharba Tribe, 104, 105.
Moghren El Buhur, 16, 165.
Mograka, 25.
Mograt Island, 37, 86; rapid, 44.
Mohadan Zeraf, 64.
Mohammed Ahmed, see Mahdi.
Mohammed Ali (1823), 45, 231-237, 248; Khedive, 105.
Mohammed Ali Dedingawi, 189.
Mohammed Ali Pasha, defeated (Sept., 1884), 105, 129.
Mohammed Beg Dafterdar (1882), 184.
Mohammed Gul harbour, 95, 96.
Mohammed Kheir, 129.
Mohammed Pasha Said, 181, 247.
Mohammedan, 10, 125, 128; Mohammedia, 53; Moslem faith, 162; Moslemised, 186.
“Moka,” 123.
“Mokert,” 208.
Mokwai R. (vel Bela), 132, 139.
Monasir (vel El Salamat), 27, 41, 42, 44, 83, 207.
Monasir Tribe, Arab (sedentary), 39.
Moncrieff, Commr., 257.
Mongalla District, 2, 13, 21, 77, 79, 82, 145-148; post, garrison, 79.
Mongoose, 307.
Monkeys, 59, 99, 138, 173, 307; drawings of, 40.
Monsoon, tropical, 210; tropical rains, 208.
Morghani Sect, 98.
Mosque, 5, 10, 27, 31, 47, 49, 105, 119.
Mosquitos, 21, 49, 62, 68, 73, 113, 120, 156, 157, 166, 170; “Ba-uda,” 120; Anopheles, 300.
Mougel Bey, 213, 232.
Mount Naita (vel Etna, vel Aguzzo), 151.
Mountain limestone, 209.
Mountains of the Moon, 15.
Mountains, 7, 15, 24, 39, 40, 131, 138, 149, 184, 189, 190, 201, 209.
Mount Illyria, 147.
Mounteney Jephson, 260.
Mouse birds, 309.
Moya Village, 118, 120.
M’tesa of Uganda, 233-239.
Mudiria, 49, 125, 144, 177, 181, 190.
Mudirs, 1; courts, 9, 10, 32, 49, 122, 146, 216.
Mudeli Village, 125.
“Mudus” tree, 155, 158.
Mufti, 10.
Mules, 4, 7, 98, 106, 107, 108, 109, 120, 126, 135, 138, 139, 148, 159, 213, 217, 218; Abyssinian, 159; load, 218.
Muli (vel Renk, vel Hasoia), 129.
Mulmul R., 154.
Mumtaz Pasha, 113.
“Mumtaz” cotton, 113.
Munzinger Bey, 236.
“Mura” (cattle zeriba), 145.
Murchison Falls, 17.
Murio W., 93.
Murrat Wells, 40, 86, 201; garrison, 88, 92 (vel Wadi Murrat).
Murray (guide book), 23.
“Murraya” tree, 158.
Murshid, 24.
Musa Adlan, 329.
Musa ranges, 87.
Musa Pasha Hamdi, Gov.-Genl. (1863), 129.
Musha Tribe, 149, 150.
Mushani Ridge, 39.
Musran Island, 59.
Mustafa Pasha Yawar, 27.
Mutmir Railway Station, 214.
Mythology, 162, 197.
M’Yolga Village, 139, 143.
=N.=
Naam R., 74, 154, 155.
Naba W., 92, 93.
Nabagaia District, 63.
Nafab Tribe, 91, 93.
Nafiab Tribe, 105.
Naga Temples, 214, 226, 315.
“Nagas” (milch camels), 205.
Nagdyeb, 192.
Nahud District, 2, 176, 177, 179; town, 182, 189, 218; P.O., 219.
Naita Mt., 149, 150, 151.
Nakhla Oasis W., 202.
Napata, 34, 222-225, 312, 315.
Nasaib El Ruchan Ridge, 209.
Nasari W., 92, 93.
Naseib W., 202.
Nasser, 15, 120, 131, 132, 135, 136, 137, 274; post, 132, 133, 134; forts, 138.
Nason, D.S.O., Col. F. J., Secretary-General (1904), 3, 268.
Natila, 251, 252.
Native characteristics, 75-85, 122, 125-129, 132, 137-140, 143-149, 160, 161, 179, 180, 187, 192, 196; customs and habits, 75-85, 106, 122, 126, 128, 129, 138, 140, 143, 144, 146, 147, 148, 152, 160, 161, 179, 180, 192, 196-199; habitations, 85, 126, 181, 187; feasts, 128, 129, 194; arms, 122, 133, 140, 148, 149, 160, 178, 179; morals, 128, 129; disposal of property, 129; tools, 140; industries, 187; wives, 128, 129, 193; price of, 128, 129, 193; divorce, 128, 129; religion, 161, 162; misconduct, 128, 129; dress, 123, 126, 134, 135, 160, 161, 178, 180; music, 160.
Natron, 201; seam of, collecting, 202.
Naui Island, 30; (Dongola), 83, 86.
Navigation, 7, 19, 20, 21, 26, 27, 32, 35, 37, 41, 47, 59, 60, 62, 74-77, 80, 83, 96, 111, 114, 115, 131, 136, 137, 142, 154, 159, 165-170, 210, 216; navigators, 197; Sudd, 300; of cataracts, 23, 24, 26, 35-37, 111; towing haulage, 35-37, 44; channels, 44-47, 52-81, 96, 111, 136, 142, 144, 159, 165, 166, 167, 168-170; false channels, 74, 75, 82.
Nawaiba Tribe, 186.
Nazir of Ababda Tribe, 93.
Nazir El Agab Abu Gin, 109.
Nazir Sheikh Wad Zaid, 107.
“Ndala,” vel “Obiloh,” tree, 13, 154. N’Doggo, vel Ndoggo, Tribe, 159-163. Ndoruma, 161.
Negroes in Egypt, classification, 180, 221, 228-230, 317, 318.
Neolithic Race, 221.
Neriko District, 32.
Nerol, 139, 141.
Neshd W., 92.
Neubari R., vel Ruzi II, 136, 137.
Neufeld, 252.
Neum Village, 137, 138.
Neumann, Mr. Oscar, 120, 138.
Neuralgia, 157.
Newcombe, R.E., Lieut., 35.
“New Race,” 221.
Niar Wad Koing, 143.
Nierchuk, 148.
Nielwag, 193.
Niger, 15.
Nightjar, 309.
Nigol R., vel Nuer, 136.
Nik-Kieya (mythical being), 197.
Nile, 1, 7, 15, 19-81, 83-91, 96-101, 103, 104-108, 111, 114, 116-124, 126-131, 136, 137, 142, 147, 151, 153, 159, 161, 165, 173, 174, 182, 184, 189, 192, 194, 197, 201, 202, 204-209, 213, 221, 232, 237; bed slope, 16, 19, 45, 75; post, 76; affluents, 15-21; valley, 12, 79; high, 17, 23-26, 35-37, 53, 54, 113, 142, 173; half, 17, 24, 27; rise, 15; low, 17, 19, 23-27, 37, 39, 53, 59, 66-70, 73, 142, 216; banks, 22-83; itinerary, 23-81; lower, 216; upper, 17, 21, 60, 217; expedition (1884), 20, 29; (1884-5), 33; (1897), 44; watershed, 161, see Flood, see Blue, White, Victoria and Upper Niles; pilots, 35, 36; sources, 15, 16; velocity, 16, 17, 74-76; mapping, 235.
Nile goose, 162.
“Nile Tributaries of Abyssinia” (Baker), 101.
Nilis, Capt., 262, 263.
Nilotic people, 138, 318, 319.
“Nimetti” fly, 85.
Nimr, Mek, 231.
Nimr Tribe, 179.
Nimule, 16, 21.
Nizezi District, 32.
Nogara Village, 100, 290.
“Notes for Travellers and Sportsmen in the Sudan,” 213.
“Notes on Outfit for the Sudan,” 213.
Nuago Island, 59.
Nuba Mts., hills (Talodo), district, 2, 70, 173, 175, 176, 178, 327.
Nuba Tribe, Arab, 173, 174, 177, 178, 179, 180-182, 226, 318.
Nubawi Tribe, 196.
Nubia District, 36; see Desert Nubians, 221-228, 243, 317, 318.
“Nubian” sandstone, 32 (lower and upper), 209, 210.
Nuer Tribe, 20, 73, 75, 81, 122, 131, 132, 133, 135, 136, 138, 139, 140, 142, 143, 144, 148, 151, 152, 165, 167, 194; country, 130, 131-138; District, 137, 143, 152; expedition, 276.
Nufrium, 93.
“Nugger” vel “Nuggar” (boats), 21, 35, 36, 216.
Nun, 193.
Nur, 166.
Nur El Daim, 57.
Nurri Village, 38.
Nushi Pasha, 248.
“nuzl” (store), 49, 75.
“nwana” tree, 158.
Nyabanjo, 196.
Nyagir, 196.
Nyagwado, 193.
Nya-Kang (demi god and intermediary), 197, 199.
Nyam Nyam, vel Azandré, Tribe, 156; country, 157, 158, 159, 161.
Nyanabek, 151, 152.
Nyandeng Village, 141.
Nyanga, 151.
=O.=
Oases, 123, 201, 202, 203, 221.
Oasis of Amur, 90.
Oashi Village, 197.
Obai, 194.
Obak W., 90, 94.
Obeid, see El Obeid.
Obokh, 94.
Oboth R., 137.
Odi Plain, 97.
Odilo, 154, 155.
Odrus Plain, 89, 90.
Ohrwalder, Father, 253.
Oi, 89, 90.
Oil (edible), 155, 158, 176.
Ojallo (vel Shilluk), 192.
“Oke” (2¾ hours), 49.
Omar, 41.
“Omda” (“The”), 118.
“Omda” Abbas Musa, 118.
“Omda” Abd El Kadir, 105.
“Omda” Ahmed Mahomed El Zein, 118.
“Omda” El Imam Hadibai, 118.
“Omda” El Sheikh Ali El Haj Taba, 118.
“Omda” Ibrahim Wad El Netif, 118.
“Omda” Ismail Musa, 118.
“Omda” Mahomed Osman Ibrahim, 105.
“Omda” Sheikh Mahomed Osman Abd El Rahman, 118.
“Omda” Torin Ahmed, 118.
Omdurman, 1, 7, 11, 17, 31, 45, 47, 49-53, 84, 98, 106, 119, 155, 177, 179, 182, 184, 187, 189, 199, 207, 208, 213, 214, 216-218, 248-273; district, 2; expedition (1898), 45; battle (1898), 47; (1902), 276; P.T.O., 219.
Omka, 24.
Omo R., 137.
Ongwat, 93.
Oni W., 93.
Onib, 87, 88.
Onions, 7, 57, 160, 161, 173, 178, 190.
Ophthalmia, 83.
Oquelokur R., 141, 142.
Oran Villages, 138.
Ordi El Monfok, 28.
Ore, analysis, 156.
Oriang, 196.
Oribi, 98, 110, 120, 148, 161, 183, 308.
Ornaments, 145, 178.
“Ororo” (Shillucks, ordinary), 199.
Oryx, 96, 109, 183, 308.
“Oshur” (harvest tax), 189.
Osman Digna, 251-260, 273; headquarters, 96.
Osman Pasha, 240.
Ospreys, 309.
Ostrich, 12, 99, 162, 177, 309; wild, farming, trade, value, Government restriction (see Feathers).
Otellia valisneria, 300, 303.
Othman Fakri, vel Othman Amian, 41.
Otwol village, 138, 139.
Oubanghi, see Ubangi.
Owen, Capt. R. C. R., 278.
Owen, Maj. R., 262.
Owls, 309.
Oxen, 213; pack, 217, 218.
Oyia W., 93.
Oysters (freshwater), 59.
=P.=
Pabek, 144.
Palms, 23, 25, 26, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 40, 41, 42, 43, 73, 75, 76, 155, 204.
Palms, date, 7, 9, 30, 35, 39, 41, 67, 83, 84, 173, 177, 190, 202, 203, 204, 206; fruit-bearing species, 203; seedling, 206.
Palms, Deleib, 68, 70, 74-77, 91, 143, 155, 166.
Palms, Dom, 38, 39, 43, 44, 63, 64, 68, 84, 97, 99, 101, 113, 143, 167, 173, 180, 202, 204, 206, 208, 209, 210; matting, 97, 105.
Panicum pyramidale, 302, 303.
Papyrus grass, 20, 59, 73, 74, 75, 76, 144, 157, 166, 167, 299; islands, 21.
Parker, Capt. A. C., 97.
Parkia filicoidea, 155.
Parrakeets, parrots, 309.
Parsons, Col. (1898), 106, 259, 267, 289.
Partridge, 162, 182.
Pass, 19, 40, 47, 88, 202; defile, 89, 90.
Passenger accommodation (river and rail), 213-215.
Patok Village, 138.
“Paw-paw” tree, 79, 81.
Peake, Maj., 15, 73, 166, 169, 266, 273, 305.
Pearl, Mother-of-, 9.
Pelican, 139, 309.
Pepi Is., 222.
Pepper, 108, 173, 189.
Perbong Village, 139.
Perim, 94, 294.
Perthes, Julius (map), 75.
Petherick (explorer), 16, 131.
Petrified, wood, 32, 209; forests, 201, 203.
Petroleum, 13, 20.
Pharaohs, The, 222.
Phragmites communis, 302, 303.
Phthisis, 157.
Piankhi, King, 224.
Pibor R., 16, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136, 138, 139, 141, 142; Upper, 142, 151, 152; swamp, 136, 141; affluents, 136.
Pig, 99, 122; bush pig, 110.
Pigeon, blue rock, 88.
Pilgrims, 189.
Pirie, Capt., 276.
Pistia stratiotes grass, 76, 303.
Plains, 27, 29, 44, 73, 74, 77, 80, 85-90, 94, 95, 97, 99, 106, 120, 122, 123, 131, 132, 134, 138, 139, 140, 149, 165, 166, 174, 181, 184, 201, 208, 209, 210.
Plateau, 44, 94, 95, 101, 103, 131, 139, 151, 154, 155, 156, 157, 159, 160, 184, 201; tableland, 153, 154, 157, 158.
Plovers, 309.
Pneumonia, 184.
Pokum, 134.
Police, 25, 34, 57, 59, 67, 81, 104, 109, 118, 126, 135, 146; posts, 95, 104, 135.
Poncet, Dr., 229.
Ponds, pools (“Hafirs”), 21, 99, 101, 103, 117, 118, 120, 123.
Ponies, 182; price of, 217.
Poore, Lieut., R.N. (1884), 35.
Population, 1, 7, 11, 13, 23, 27, 30, 32, 41, 45, 47, 49, 50, 55-57, 59, 73, 77, 83, 85, 94-96, 98, 105, 106, 108, 113, 114, 117, 119, 122, 123, 126, 134, 147, 151, 181, 182, 186, 187, 190, 192, 193, 196; riverain, 83, 117, 119; native, 7.
Ports, 5, 182.
Port Durnford, 238.
Portage, 24, 36, 37, 38, 47.
“Poste des Rapides,” 154.
Posts and Telegraphs, Director, 3; Egyptian, 12, 16, 27; Italian, 101; offices, 27, 57, 59, 62, 67, 85, 95, 98, 105, 107, 109, 113, 118, 213, 215, 218, 219; list of, 219; stamps, 218.
Post Master (travelling), 218; parcel post, 98, 219; money orders, 218, 219; postal steamer, 27; registered correspondence, 219 (see also Telegraphs); Letter Box (“Sandtek”), 84.
Potter, Mr., 80, 270.
Powell-Cotton, 280.
Power, 247, 248.
Prehistoric, 311.
Prices (and Values), 49, 94, 104, 108, 218; animals, 182, 217, 218; of wife, 128, 129, 193.
Primates, 307.
Primitive rocks, 44.
Prisons, Inspector of, 3.
Products and industries, 7, 9, 84, 100, 125, 135, 137, 176, 189, 205.
Prophet, The, 91.
Prosopis oblonga, 155.
Prout, Major, 236.
Provinces, chief towns and districts, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9, 13, 60; boundaries of, 335-338.
Ptolemy, 225.
Puff adder, 310.
Pulmonary ailments, 194.
Pulse crops, 7.
Pulsometer, 94.
Pump, 81; “Norton tube,” 210.
Pumpkins, 156, 160, 189, 190.
“Punda malia” beads, 135, 149.
Punt, land of, 317.
Purdy, Col., 156, 236.
Pygmies, 221, 318, 320.
Pyramids, 38, 42, 45, 105, 214.
Python, 310.
=Q.=
Quail, 99, 107, 183.
Quarantine camp, 23, 33; island, 94.
Quartz, dyke, 153, 183.
Queen of Sheba, 45, 105 (supposed residence).
Queen Topein of Latuka, 147.
Quinine, 156.
=R.=
Rafili, 154, 159.
Rafts, 21, 111, 216.
Ragabat El Gamal Cataract, 39.
Ragreig Mts., 123.
Rahad R., 106, 107, 109, 110, 114; district, 107, 114, 115, 119.
Rahami Cataract, 39.
Rahid R., 109.
Raids (raiders, forays, razzias), 122, 126, 149, 159, 176, 177, 180, 181, 196, 201.
Rain, 11, 13, 15, 73, 83, 85, 87, 89, 90, 94, 98, 101, 106-109, 113, 114, 119, 123, 125, 126, 131, 147, 149, 168, 173, 174, 185, 189, 207; tropical, 183, 208; fall, 17, 49, 87, 90, 94, 98, 103, 109, 120, 151; season, 11, 21, 73, 79, 80, 89, 94, 96, 97, 113, 120, 139, 140, 146, 147, 156, 159, 168, 183, 185, 193, 194, 199, 208-210; maker, 180; villages, 64; lands and crops, 4, 107, 113.
Rakabat El Gamel, 37, 39.
“rakubas” (huts), 181.
Railway battalion, 3; communications, 106, 213-215; curves, 214; construction (speed), 213; director of, 3; distances, 210, 214; gauge, 22, 214; gradients, 214; engine pit, 214; headquarters, 23, 214; historical, 213, 214; light railway, 213, 215; mileage, 214; receipts (1902-3), 215; shops, 85, 105, 214, 215; stations, 85, 105; list of, 214, 215; surveys, 5, 213; traffic, 215; traffic manager, 214, 215; termini, 23, 27, 34, 49, 85, 213, 214.
Railway, Nile-Red Sea, 7, 20, 45, 84, 208, 214, 218.
Railway, Government, 7, 23, 83, 85, 86, 215.
Railway, Halfa-Abu Hamed, 83, 85, 86.
Railway, Halfa-Kerma, 7, 22, 218; destruction (1885-96), 22; rebuilt (1896), 22.
Railway, Halfa-Khartoum, 4, 7, 23.
Railway, Khartoum-Abu Hamed, 44.
Railway, Merowe-Abu Hamed, Scheme (1904), 35, 44.
Railway reconnaissance, 35.
Railway, Suakin-Berber, 5, 19, 90, 214, 217.
Railway, Suakin-Nile, 5.
Rameses, 222.
Rapids, 17, 20, 21-26, 35-37, 40, 44, 45, 50, 83, 131; gates of, 24, 38.
Ras Kasar Harbour, 96.
Ras Magdam Harbour, 95, 96.
Ras Makunnen, 270.
Rasheida Tribe, 96.
Ratel, 307.
Ratib Pasha, 238.
Rattan, 155.
Rauai W., 90.
Rauf Bey, 234-244.
Ravines, 38, 39, 44, 45, 138, 210, see also Khors.
Rawlinson, Professor, 221.
Rebellion (1884), 47.
Receipts and Expenditure, 4, 5; railway receipts, 215.
Reconnaissance (April, 1904), 35, 218.
Red Sea, 1, 7, 83, 85-89, 91, 95, 96, 217; littoral, 87, 88, 96.
Red Sea Pilot, The, 94.
Reed-buck (see also Buck), 98, 109, 110, 120, 151, 162, 183, 308.
Reed-rat, 157.
Reeds, 20, 58, 59, 62, 77, 80, 134, 165-168, 169.
Reefs, 44, 47, 95, 166.
Refuge, place, 211; refugees, 5, 125.
“reis” of “nuggers,” 35.
Rejaf, 11, 16, 20, 21, 80, 234, 261-270, 279.
Religion, 10, 11, 125, 128, 145, 146, 161-163, 187, 189, 193, 197; sun worship, 163.
Renier, Monsieur, 80.
Renk, 2, 16, 21, 50, 62, 63, 66, 71, 126, 129; district, 73; action (15.9.98), 62, 66, 71, 120, 217; vel Muli, P.T.O., 219.
Reports, 10, 15, 17, 23, 36, 37, 49, 73, 74, 98, 99, 123, 137, 139, 141, 147, 148, 201, 203, 207, 221.
Reptiles, 183; toads, 183, 309.
Rera W., 104, 105.
Reservoirs (tanks and cisterns), 168; tanks, 117, 120; cisterns, 209, 210; natural, 209; storage (suggested), 206.
Residency, 81; civilian residences, 94, 105.
Resources, 7.
Rest-houses, 27, 29, 31-33, 77, 94, 145.
Revenue and Expenditure (1899-1904), 4-6, 84.
Rheumatism, 24.
Rhinoceros, 98, 99, 109, 110, 148, 151, 161, 182, 307; horns, 7, 189.
“rial mejidi” (coin), 189.
“riang,” vel “bei,” tree, 158.
Ridges, 73, 75, 77, 80, 83, 90, 125, 148, 156, 173, 204, 205, 209.
Riding animals, 213, 217.
Rifles, breech-loading, 100, 122, 140, 160, 161, 180, 189; Italian, 180; Remington, 160, 179, 180.
“rigl,” 173.
Ripon Falls, 17.
Riul, v. 139.
River column (1885), 35, 38, 40, 43; (1881-85), 37; (1885), 43.
River communication, 7, 213, 215-217; transport, 159.
Rivers in Province of Bahr El Ghazel, 154.
Rivers, rise of, 131. See also Nile.
Rizeigat Tribe, Baggara, 187.
Roads, 5, 7, 22, 24-34, 38, 41, 42, 52-56, 58-60, 62-67, 76, 80, 83, 86, 88-96, 100, 104, 105, 109, 120, 123, 126, 131, 136, 138, 142, 148, 151, 155, 159, 175, 179, 185, 189, 196, 201-203, 206-209, 213, 214, 217; road tax, 4, 5; road communication, 7, 95; list, main, 218; routes, 90, 93-95, 100; route reports, 104.
Roan-antelope, 98, 110, 120, 151, 161, 182, 308.
Robatab District, 2, 44; tribe, 83.
Robbers, 100, 189; thieves, 193.
Rocks (in Nile), 20, 22-27, 34-37, 39-41, 44, 47, 53, 59, 60, 92, 131; rocky (country), 23, 24, 26, 30, 32, 35, 38-41, 83, 125, 173, 214.
Rock-fowl, 88, 162.
Rodentia, 307.
Rodi R., 75, 154.
Rodd, Sir R., 270.
Rohl R., 76, 154, 165, 166.
“roko” bark, 161.
Rolling stock for railways, 5.
Rom, vel Um Gursan, Village, 66.
Roribet, M., 289.
Ross, Captain, 202.
Roseires District, 2, 50, 62, 109, 111, 113, 120, 123, 216-218; battle (Dec. 1898), 122; P.T.O., 219.
Rossignoli, 253.
Rowaya Harbour, 96.
Royal descendants (Shillucks), 199; family, descent of (Darfur), 186; royalty by selection and inheritance, 199.
Royalties, 4, 5, 189.
Royan Railway Station, 214.
“ruba” (24 = 1 “ardeb”), 117.
Rufaa District, 2, 105; tribe, 118, 119.
Rufaa El Sharg Tribe, 109.
Rufifrons Gazelle, 183.
Ruins, 30-32, 39, 40, 43, 55, 57, 58, 60, 104, 105, 119, 177, 179, 180, 204.
Ruin, 24, 28.
Rumbek District, 2, 76, 153, 154, 156-159, 217, 218.
Rumi Is., 30.
Rundle, Lieutenant, 247, 248.
Ruwenzori Mountains, 15.
Ruzi I. R., vel Ajibur, 138.
Ruzi II. R., vel Neubari, 136, 137.
=S.=
Saati Beshir, 28.
Sâbah Tribe, Arab, 190.
Sabderat, 97, 218, 289, 290, 294; agreement, 291.
Saccharum spontaneum, 302.
Sacchi R. and Valley, 151.
Sacrifice, 145, 146, 162, 199.
Saddlebill Stork, 309.
Sagag, 38.
“Sagias,” 27, 29, 30, 31, 38, 41, 45, 83, 84, 98, 105, 113, 119; iron, 105.
Sagiet El Abd, 26, 202.
Saglias, 173.
Sahaba, 28.
Sai Island, 26.
Said Ahmed, 98.
Said Ali El Morghani, 98.
Said Pasha (1860), 213, 232, 236.
Sakiet El Abd, 25, 26.
Sako R., 135.
Salahia, 54.
Salamat, 37, 40, 41.
Sali, 28.
Salisbury, Lord, 285.
Salmia, 42, 43.
Salt, 105, 145, 155, 176, 177, 185, 190, 203, 204; works, 54, 58, 103, 203, 209; water and wells, 103 (see Brackish).
Salvadora persica, 208.
Samina Hills, 125.
“samr” (acacia), 12, 84, 89, 103, 208.
Sand, 31, 76, 123; stony, 201; red, 202, 204, banks, 17, 20, 23, 27, 45, 80, 131, 132; dunes, 30, 44, 53-55, 58, 90, 201, 205; hills, 32, 33, 52, 54, 55, 86, 97, 202, 210; drifting hills, 209, 210; storms (dust), 30, 31, 49, 94, 95, 98; whirlwinds, 208; “sand of destruction,” 205, 206.
Sand-grouse, 88, 309.
Sandpipers, 309.
Sandstone, 44, 86, 103, 202, 210, 211; red and white, 185; “old,” 31; “Nubian,” 32, 209, 210; “Desert,” 34.
Sandals (woven), 84.
Sanders, Captain, 169, 170.
“Sanduk” (box), 74.
Saneit, 99.
Sani, 208.
Sania, W., 93.
Sanseviera guineensis, 158.
“Sant,” vel sunt, acacia, 12, 13, 58.
“Sapotaceæ” order (botanical), 154, 155.
Sarankchau, 125.
Sararab Tribe, 91.
Sararat W., 90.
Sarari, deserted village, 204.
Sarcocephalus esculentus, 157.
Sardines, 68.
Sarghun, 25.
Sarkamatto, 25.
Sarolea, Lieutenant, 264.
Sarras, 24, 25, 83, 85, 204, 213, 252; railway station, 215; P.O., 219; fort and post (1886-96), 24.
Sasa, 161.
Satinwood, 155.
Sauarab, vel Sawarab, tribe, Arab, nomad, 105, 207, 208.
Sawāni Village (vel El Sawani), 204-206.
Saya, 185.
“Sayal” acacia, 12, 87, 88, 103, 109, 181.
Sayala, 86, 93.
Sayif, 55.
Schists, 153, 211.
Schools, 10, 11.
Schnitzer (v. Emin Pasha), 239.
Schweinfurth, Dr., 129, 153, 161, 193.
Scott-Barbour, Lieut., 276.
Scouts, 98.
Scrub, 47, 52, 53, 55, 58, 60, 80, 81, 89, 97, 168, 173, 202; see Bush and Jungle.
Secretary-General, 3.
Sedimentary strata, 211.
Segadi Village, 118.
“Seif” (hot weather), 183.
Sela R., 288.
Selala W., 92.
“Selem” acacia, 12, 84, 86-89, 103, 201, 202.
Selim tribe, Arab, Baggaras, nomad, 62-64, 122, 126, 130, 179, 196.
Selima oasis, 25, 26, 202.
Semetic origin, 91, 317.
Semetic Tribe, 221.
Semna Rapid, 24.
Semna Temple, 24.
Senegul, 63.
Senga District, 2, 109, 113, 114, 119, 120; village, 114, 119, 216; P.T.O., 219.
Senna, 84.
Sennar, 57, 59, 109-114, 117-119, 129, 130, 228-232, 239, 245-247, 267; P.T.O, 219; occupied (1899), 119; boar, 308; tribes, 328.
Senussi, Senussiites, 189, 274, 276.
Serrug, 189.
“Serut” fly, vel “Surut,” 60, 98, 107, 109, 113, 118, 120, 155, 167.
Serval, 99, 307.
Sesame (“Semsem”), see Simsim.
Setit R., 16, 96, 99-101, 106, 291, 296.
Shaata W., 94.
“Shab” (stakes), 181.
Shaban Rapids, 26.
Shabasha, 55, 56.
Shabasha El Gharb, 56.
Shabasha El Shark, 56.
Shabibit, 290.
Shabluka Cataract, 17, 45, 47; Pass, 19, 47.
Shaduf Tribe, 54, 84.
“Shaduf” (cultivation), 53, 105, 117, 173, 175.
Shag W., 104.
Shageig, 174, 179.
Shaggara, 57.
Shaiab Tribe, 96.
Shaigia, cataract, 35; tribe, 83, 105, 118.
“Shaitan,” 162.
Shakab, 64.
Shakai Village W., 38 (? vel “Saga”).
Shakka, 217.
Shakwa El Shilkawi, 70.
Shalatein, 87, 91.
Shambe, lagoon, 21, 75, 82, 142, 144, 154, 159, 217.
Shammam, 115.
Shanabla, 182.
Shanatir Tribe, 91-93.
“Shanda,” “shandè,” “shandi,” tree, 155-158.
Shanji Village, 123.
Shankab Tribe, 179.
Shanterab, Shantirab, Tribe, 87, 91-93.
Sharg El Adeik district, 103.
Shari R. and watershed, 1, 185.
“Sharia Mohammedia” law, 189.
Shat, 179.
“Shatta” (red pepper), 108, 173.
Shawal, 57, 118.
Sheb district, 202.
Sheb oasis, W., 202.
Sheb post, 206.
Shebabik or Shebabit, vel Shebebit, Village, 36, 39.
Shebakat, 210.
Shebatut, vel Shadadud, 29; camp, Nile Expedition, 29; camp (1885), Lt. Camel Regt., 29.
Shebodinab Tribe, 97.
Sheep, 4, 45, 52, 58, 62, 87, 88, 91, 97, 99, 104, 126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 135, 139, 145, 147-150, 160, 178, 179, 181, 182, 190, 193, 194, 206, 208, 210; huts, 43; wool, 190.
Sheikh Abdallahi, 129.
Sheikh Abd El Kader, 122.
Sheikh Abu El Gasim, 196.
Sheikh Abu Hamed’s Tomb, 43, 44.
Sheikh Abu El Wahab Walad Handigai, 196.
Sheikh Abu Ras Wad Sogheir, 125.
Sheikh Agweir Owal, 143.
Sheikh Aiung Yor, 143.
Sheikh Ajak, 64.
Sheikh Akol, 66.
Sheikh Ali Wad El Had, 104.
Sheikh Ali Tom, 179.
Sheikh Amara Abu Sin, 104.
Sheikh Amin Musa, 130.
Sheikh Awel Wad Agwot, 132.
Sheikh Bakhit Niok, 63, 126.
Sheikh Barghut, 94, 96.
Sheikh Bikori, 126.
Sheikh Bilburka, 123.
Sheikh Bor, “Being-Dit,” 144-146.
Sheikh Delal, 67.
Sheikh Deng, 143.
Sheikh Denkur, 140.
Sheikh Diu, 143.
Sheikh El Hag Suleiman, 130.
Sheikh El Merghani, 98.
Sheikh El Nur, 125.
Sheikh El Obeid, sons of, 105.
Sheikh Fadl Mula Wad Rekha, 205, 207.
Sheikh Fador Wad Koing, 143.
Sheikh Fakia Hamed, 196.
Sheikh Fakir, 125.
Sheikh Gaffa Ageil, 104.
Sheikh Gurung, 144.
Sheikh Hambalha, 125.
Sheikh Hassan Khalifa, 207.
Sheikh Idris Tomb, 26.
Sheikh Jela Abdalla, fled (1897), 123.
Sheikh Jok, 64, 66, 132, 136.
Sheikh Kodak, 67.
Sheikh Kula, 146.
Sheikh Kur, 144, 145.
Sheikh Lado, 80, 146-148.
Sheikh Lado Kanga, 146.
Sheikh Lefo Abu Kuka, 146.
Sheikh Legi Lefo, 146.
Sheikh Lom, 144.
Sheikh Lowala, 146, 148.
Sheikh Lowir, 67.
Sheikh Luong, 68.
Sheikh Mohammed Suleiman, 103, 104.
Sheikh Mohammed Talha, 104.
Sheikh Mudi, 146.
Sheikh Nadgweir, 152.
Sheikh Nail, 196.
Sheikh Nur El Taib, 57.
Sheikh Nyal Wad Jek, 143.
Sheikh Nyekeia, 67.
Sheikh Ojilo, 135.
Sheikh Okwai, 136.
Sheikh Regeb Wad Idris, 122, 123, 130.
Sheikh Salem Banga, 63, 64.
Sheikh Salim, 52.
Sheikh Sherif Village, 27.
Sheikh Taib El Nimr, 107.
Sheikh Tak, 67.
Sheikh Talha Village, 109.
Sheikh Toi Wad Thief, 143.
Sheikh Wani, 146.
Sheikh Warao Wad Koing, 143.
Sheikh Wungo, 146.
Sheikh Yogagieb Wad Awell, 196.
Sheikh Yowe, 136.
Sheikhs, 10, 91, 92, 104, 125, 135, 136, 179; head, list of, 196, 322-334.
Shekho, 138.
Shellal, vel Assuan, Cataract, 17, 23.
Shellal, W., 93, 215, 219.
Shellal El Homar Cataract, 44.
Shellal Gurgurib, 43.
Shemsi, 206.
Shenabla Tribe, 179.
Shendi, 2, 11, 45, 50, 103, 105, 184, 208, 209, 217, 231; P.T.O., 219; destroyed (1823), 45, 105; occupied (26.3.98), 105; cavalry headquarters, 45, 105, 214; railway station, 214.
Sherafa Tribe, 105.
Sherari, vel Sherrai, Island, 37, 41.
Sheré Tribe, 162.
Shereik, railway station, 214.
Sherif El Din, 274.
Sherif Yagub, 115.
Sherkeila, 58, 175, 179.
Shershar, 173.
Shidera, 176.
Shilluk Tribe, 13, 58-60, 63, 64, 66, 70, 81, 126, 128, 129, 130, 132, 134, 135, 138, 140, 143, 166, 192, 194, 196, 197, 199, 253-261, 277-279; Nation, Country, and Kings, 192-199; vel “Shula” or “Ojallo,” 192; “Gwared,” of Royal descent, 199; “Ororo,” of ordinary descent, 199; and “Shulla,” common people, 197.
Shilluk Village, 58-60, 63, 64, 66.
Shinai, W., 92.
Shirri, 35.
Shirri Island, 37, 41, 43.
Shit, 140.
Shitangul, 183.
Shitta, 183.
Shoar Island, 40, 41.
Shol Ajik, 139.
Shops and stores, 27, 97, 106, 214.
Shows, agricultural and industrial, 9.
Shrews, shrikes, 307.
Shukoka, 43.
Shukria Tribe, 98, 103, 105, 106, 119; Sheikhs of, 104-106.
Shukuk Pass (drawings, A.D. 2nd and 3rd century), 40.
Shwai, v., 131, 132.
“Siat El Ilbil” (camel owning tribes), 178, 179.
Sirdar of Egyptian Army, 1.
“Sidr” bush, 76, 109, 113, 114, 158.
Sigat Allim M., 289.
“Siha” plant, 103.
Sikator Island, 24.
Sikkat El Masalat road, 189.
Sikkat Dar Sula road, 189.
Sikkat Zaghawa road, 189.
“Silag” tree, 13, 108, 115, 158.
Silko, king, 226.
Silver ornaments, 178.
Simit Island, 27.
Simone, 290.
“Simsim,” 84, 106, 107, 109, 122, 125, 126, 146, 156, 160, 176, 178, 182, 189, 190.
Sinai, 222.
“Sink,” 174.
Sinkat Pass, W., 89, 90, 213, 214.
Sinkat Agaba, 95.
Sinut, 179.
Situtunga, 161.
Siwa, 225.
Skins, 7, 12, 21, 128, 130, 134, 135, 138, 148, 160, 179, 181, 211.
Skinks, 309.
Slade, R.A., Major (1885), 38.
Slatin Pasha, 3.
Slaughtering dues, 4; wild animals, 12.
Slavery, trade and traders, 2, 7, 12, 60, 81, 96, 100, 108, 122, 123, 126, 128, 130, 138, 160, 179, 180, 181, 182, 193, 227-247, 277, 279; department, repression of, 12; inspector of, 3.
“Sleeping sickness,” 147, 157.
Small-pox, 157, 184.
Smith, Dr. Donaldson (map), 149.
Smith, Maj. G., 278.
Smyth, Capt., 268, 274.
Snakes, 173, 194, 202, 310.
Snefru, 221.
Snipe, 99, 107, 162, 309.
Soba, 225, 226, 312, 315, 319.
Sobat R., 2, 7, 15, 18, 19, 20, 67, 68, 70, 71, 111, 119, 120, 122, 129, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136, 138, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 151, 192, 194, 196, 197, 216, 295; upper, 134; description and tributaries, 131, 132-143; vel Baro, vel Kir, vel Upeno, 131.
Soda, 185.
Soda, vel Dar Fung, District, 2, 122.
“Soffar,” 108, 113, 119.
Sofi Village, 100, 101, 103, 107.
Sogada hills, 99.
Sohanit W., 93.
Soil, 103; loam, 153, 173, 185; “do-do” (rich black), 193; see Alluvial; virgin, 141.
Somalis, 238, 243, 321.
“Sömmering’s” Gazelle, 98.
Sonka R., 120, 136.
Sonki, 24.
Sopo R., 154.
Sorghum dura, 156.
Sori vel Sali Village, 28.
Soteir, 210.
Soundings, 94, 95; shoals, 95.
Sparkes, C.M.G., Col. (1899), 70, 156, 161, 263, 273-277, 304.
Spate, 87, 100.
Spear (see Native Arms).
Special Services, 5.
Speke and Grant, 15, 232.
“Spills,” spill channels, 76; “Maya,” 114, 136, 142.
Spirits, 2.
Spoonbills, 309.
Sport regulations, 32; men, 160.
Springs, hot, 24; perennial, 96, 97, 99, 109, 123, 201.
Spur fowl, 162.
Spur winged goose, 162.
Stanley, H. M., 260.
Stanton, Capt. E. A., 36, 266.
Steamboats (steamers), 7, 13, 19, 20, 21, 35, 36, 37, 47, 49, 50, 52, 53, 57, 62, 67, 73, 74, 75, 79, 83, 111, 114, 115, 118, 131, 134, 135, 136, 142, 144, 154, 167, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219; Director of, 3; Budget, 5; “Bordein,” 47; “Mukhbir,” 217; postal, 27; wreck (1884), 41; paddle and stern wheel, 115, 216; service, 7, 216; tugs, 215, 216; “Zafir,” 37.
Steam engines, 105.
Stephenson, Sir F., 250.
Steppe, 56, 120, 153, 154, 157, 174, 189.
Sterculia, 158; cinerea, 13.
Stevani, Col., 259.
Stewart, Col., 21, 41, 221; murder, 41, 247.
Stewart, Sir H., 248.
Stores, 85, 159; Controller of, 3; houses, 47, 49, 154.
Storms, thunder, 21, 49, 89, 94, 97, 98, 108, 113, 156, 183; dust and sand storms, see Sand.
Strabo, 225, 226.
Streams, 135, 148, 166; perennial, 108, 209.
Stronghold (native), 187.
Stuart-Wortley, 248.
Stud Farm, 190.
Suakin, 11, 50, 85, 86, 88-90, 94-96, 98, 213, 218; provinces, 1, 7, 9, 11; district, 2, 96, 122, 217; chief town, 2; P.T.O., 219; railway station, 214; railway, 5, 7, 20, 45, 208, 257-259, 280, 283, 285; tribes, 329, 330.
Suarda, capture of Dervish stores at, 26.
Sudan, Anglo-Egyptian, 1-5, 7, 11.
Sudan, Eastern, 7, 9, 98, 103, 106, 138, 213, 221; S.E., 131-152.
Sudan, Western, 173-199; N.W., 201-211; S.W., 153-171.
Sudan, Northern, 9, 22.
Sudan, Central, 117-130.
Sudan frontiers and boundaries, 83, 96, 108, 137; territory, 80, 96, 99; conquest, 129, 231; evacuation, 213; re-conquest (1898), 15, 88.
“Sudan Almanac,” 213.
“Sudan Gazette,” 10.
“Sudan Development and Exploration Co.,” 216.
Sudanese, 11, 68, 85, 100, 109, 114, 123, 160, 181.
“Sudd,” 11, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 21, 57-70, 73, 77, 136, 137, 142, 144, 151, 153, 154, 157, 165, 166, 167, 168; blocks, 73, 74, 169; method of clearing, 304.
Sueh R. vel Jur, 16, 169.
Suez, 217, 219, 299-305.
Sugar, 7, 9, 177; factory, 7; import, 84, 98, 106; cane, 161, 189.
“Suk” (market or fair), 47, 118, 151.
Suk Abu Sin, vel Gedaref, 106.
Sukkot District, 2, 9, 83, 84, 206.
Suleiman Ibu Zubeir, 236-242.
Suleiman Wad Gamr, 39, 41.
Sultan, 202.
Sultan Abdel Rahman (17th century), 186.
Sultan Ali Dinar (1904), 187, 189.
Sultan Bekhit El Dagawi, 186.
Sultan of Beni Shangul, 125.
Sultan Dali, 186.
Sultan Mohammed El Fadl (18th century), 186, 191.
Sultan Mohammed Fadl, 187.
Sultan Musa, 159.
Sultan Nasser Andel, 159.
Sultan Ndoruma, 161.
Sultan Sasa, 161.
Sultan Suleiman (Solon), 186.
Sultan Tembura, his army, 161.
Sultan Yambio, 161.
Sultan Zemio, 161.
Sultans of Darfur, palace, burial place and genealogical table, 189, 190, 191.
Sultanate of Wadai, 1.
Sulphur, hot spring, 24; lake, 204; sulphuretted hydrogen, 201.
Sun-birds, 309.
Sungikai, 179.
“Sûnt,” vel “sant,” mimosa, 36, 41, 43, 84, 89, 109, 114, 173, 208.
Supplies (local), 30, 34, 35, 42, 44, 80, 95, 122, 135, 148, 156.
Supply Department (army), 105.
Sur Village, 45.
“Sur” (wall), 47.
“Surffa” (millipede), 176.
Surgeons (native), 194.
Surkum, 123.
Surveys, director of, 3; scale 1/250000, suggested, 206; railways, 213, 214; surveying parties, 208.
Suweihil, 100.
Swahilis, 151.
Sweet potato, 91, 160.
Swimmers (native), 36, 37.
Sycamores, 113, 136.
Syrians, 182.
=T.=
Taaisha Tribe, Baggara, 118, 178, 187.
“Tabaiig” (small spear), 179.
Tabarakalla, 100.
Tabbeh, M., 289.
Tables, distances, 35, 71; meteorological, 12; water slopes, 19.
Tabi hills, 119, 122; district, 122.
Tâgale, 180; blacks, 118; country, 176.
Taiara District, 2, 176, 177, 196; town destroyed, 182.
Taiyan, 134.
Takar District, 32, see Kassala.
Takazze, 101.
Ta Kes, 221.
“taklis,” 202.
Takruris Tribe, 98, 100, 106, 108.
Talbot, R.E., Major, Honourable M. G., 42, 43, 274, 277, 290, 291.
Talgwarab, 90.
“Talh” acacia, 7, 13, 63, 84, 97, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 119, 139, 141, 151, 158, 177.
“Talh beida” tree, 158.
“Talha” gum, 7, 13.
Talodi vel Nuba Mts., district, 2, 182. See Nuba Mts.
Tama Tribe, 187, 190.
Tamabaf watershed, 90.
“Tamam,” 202.
Tamaneb, 95.
Tamaniat Is., 47.
Tamarind, 84, 113, 158.
Tamarisk, 76, 97, 113, 206.
Tambanarti Island, 31.
Tangassi Village, 34.
Tangussi Is., 31.
Tani Hetani, 32. (See Hetani.)
Tanjur Rapid, 24.
Tanning, 12; products, 155; bark, 158; tannin, 155, 158.
Tanguedec, Lieut., 273.
Tapeworm, 184.
Tarabil pyramids, 105.
Taragma railway station, 214.
“Taras,” 117.
“Tarfa,” 13, 84, 97.
Tatug, 70.
Tau District, 64; village, 144.
Taufikia District, 2, 50, 68, 70, 71, 196, 197, 218; P.T.O., 219; garrison, 146; Baker’s headquarters (1865), 68.
Taufot, 134.
Tawal Tribe, 118.
Taweisha, 179, 185.
Taxes, 4-7, 20; “Oshur,” “Zika,” “Fitra,” 189.
Tea, 84, 189.
Teal, 107, 139; whistling, 162.
Teb, El, 257.
“Tebeldi” tree (“Homr”), 13, 113, 115, 174, 175, 176, 181, 185; “El Lagat,” or “Self-filling trees,” 176.
Tedelaie M., 289.
Tedo District, 137.
Teeth marks (tribal), 161.
Teflenai, 289.
Teigo, 120; tribe, 186, sheikh, 186.
Teit, vel Taetti, Village, 28.
Telabun, 146, 156, 160.
Telat Abda W., 92.
Tel el Kebir, 224.
Telegraphs, 3, 4, 5, 34, 35, 42, 43, 50, 55, 59, 62, 66, 67, 94, 95, 98, 105, 107, 109, 113, 114, 118, 189, 213, 214, 218, 287; poles, 218; service, 218, 219; wireless, 218; cables, 194, 197; station, 177, 214.
Telephone, 218.
Telgona District, 153, 159; hill, 153.
Tembura country, 154, 155, 157, 161, 274.
Temperature, 11, 21, 87, 89, 91, 96, 100, 146, 147, 156, 183, 202.
Temples, 23, 24, 26, 105; native, 193, 199, 214, 311, 316.
Tendelti, 190.
Tendera W., 90.
Tendik District, 2, 179.
Tents, 87, 103, 181, 208.
Teraba District, 63.
Terai Cataract, 38.
Tereiti, vel Meshra Rom, District, 66.
Terfaui Oasis W., 91, 92, 202; Oases I and II, 202.
Terns, 309.
Tewfik Pasha, 242.
Thalweg, 286, 298.
Thebes, 223.
Thiang District, 143.
Thothmes, 222.
Thruston, Capt., 262.
Tiang, 60, 109, 110, 120, 151, 161, 183, 308.
Tibna Village, 43.
Tibri, 183.
“Tiek” (price of a wife), 145.
“Tieit” (priest), 146.
Timber, 13, 155, 157, 158, 173, 205, 209, 215.
Tinné, Mdlle. (1863), 70.
Tira El Akhdar valley, 175.
Toads, 310.
Tobacco, 81, 108, 126, 132, 135, 145, 146, 147, 160, 176, 177, 189.
Tobrar range, 89.
Todabanob Valley, 97.
Todluk, 99, 290.
Tofrek, 257.
Tokar, 2, 7, 9, 11, 94, 95, 217; captured (1891), 95; P.T.O., 219.
Tomat, vel Tumat, 126, 291.
Tomatoes, 161.
Tombs, 26, 28, 38, 43, 44, 47, 52, 57, 62, 95, 104, 221.
Tonga, 142, 143; district, 196, 197; island, 70.
Tongalo, vel Dongola, 30.
Tonj R., 154, 155, 156, 159, 165, 217.
Topein, Queen of Latuka tribe, 147.
“Tope,” 148.
Topography, 117, 119.
Tora hartebeeste, 98, 110, 120.
Torba, 58.
Torrents, 86, 185, 210.
Tortoise, 310.
Toski, 253.
Toto swamp, 175.
Towns, capital and main, 1, 2, 13, 49, 85, 87, 96, 97, 104, 108, 113, 114, 118, 122, 123, 182, 190, 213; deserted, 30, 177.
Trade and traders, 68, 80, 84, 98, 105, 106, 108, 119, 122, 125, 126, 132, 134, 135, 146, 147, 149, 181, 189, 196; centres, 32, 47, 49, 56, 59; station, 68, 135; route, 91, 100, 109, 125, 126, 208; carrying, 179, 182; gum, 47, 106, 182; goods, 84, 136, 146, 177, 182; metal, 177, 182; muslin, 177; stuffs, 177, 194; soap, 84, 177; tarbushes, 146; traders (merchants), 106, 122, 182, 189; gum, 182; merchandise, 32, 83, 84, 182 (see Barter and Manchester goods).
Tracking, river, 39; game, 160.
Tramways, 20, 213.
Transport, 7, 27, 83, 91, 98, 107, 126, 156, 159, 213, 215, 217, 218; animals, 107, 109, 118, 120, 126, 139, 148, 151, 159, 184, 189, 208, 213, 217; draught, 7, 218; pack and loads, 218; service, 56; vessel, 94; motor, 213.
Trap rock, 210; dyke, 210.
Traps and trapping, 138, 194-206, 208.
Travelling and tourists, 98, 105, 108, 113, 126, 176; baths, 44; interests, 47; risks, 95; caution, 178, 184; travelling, 99, 133, 136-139, 185; winter, 202.
Treaty (Agreements, &c.), 283-298; with Menelek, 135.
Trees, 12, 13, 30, 31, 34, 45, 49, 52, 53, 57-59, 62, 64, 67-70, 73, 74-81, 84, 86, 89, 96-100, 103, 106, 110, 113, 120, 131, 136, 137, 139-143, 155, 157, 158, 165-170, 173, 176, 180, 186, 202, 204, 206, 208, 209; “Baker’s tree,” 68; treeless, 45, 52, 120.
Tribes, 5, 10, 52, 79, 91-93, 96, 103, 105, 109, 117, 132, 142, 147, 187, 318; tribute, 4, 5, 187; levies on others, 160; feuds, 93, 147; hill dwellers, 147; sedentary, 207; nomad, 5, 83-96, 109, 178, 179, 207, 208, 219; horse owning, 217; camel owning, 173, 178, 179, 182; cattle owning, 178, 179, 181; tribesmen, 206; of Bahr el Ghazel, 159-164; of Sobat, 132, 133; full lists of, 322-334.
Trinkitat Harbour, 95.
Tripoli date, 84.
Troglodytæ, 226.
Troops, 80, 94, 95, 97, 156, 181, 216; irregular, 97, 98, 103; miscellaneous, 3; quarters (1885), 31; Nubian regiments, 130; Sudanese, 3, 106, 109, 123, 181, 193; barges, 215, 216; Egyptians massacred (1882), 62.
Tsana Lake, 16, 19, 108, 110, 111, 114, 293, 295.
“Tsetse” fly, 157, 159.
Tuara Village, 197.
Tuari Cataract, 41.
“Tuga” palm, 80.
“Tukls,” 30, 52, 54, 59, 75, 77, 80, 96, 97, 105, 106, 107, 108, 118, 125, 139, 140, 145, 147, 170, 179, 181, 187, 190, 193, 202.
Tulbenab, 34.
Tumat, 125.
“Tundub” bush, 12, 88, 89, 103, 208.
Tundubi Oasis, 202, 203.
Tungur Tribe, Arabs, 185, 186; XIV Century, 185.
Tunis, 185; dates, 84.
Tura Oasis, 203.
Tura El Bedai (sulphurous lake), 204.
Tura El Khadra District, 55.
Tura El Suk, 55.
Turkana Tribe, 148, 149, 152.
“Turkash” (spear quiver), 179.
Turkey, claims on Upper Nile, 287.
Turkish Governor-General, results of misgovernment, 45.
Turks, 108.
“Turks,” 122, 129, 193, 199.
Turner, R.A., Major A. E., 204.
Türstig, Mr. R., 144, 146, 163.
Turtles, 99, 310.
Twi District, 142, 144, 145.
Twich, 145.
=U.=
Ubangi R., 298.
“Ud” (“tukl” for wife), 145.
Ufeno Tribe, 134, 137, 138.
Uganda, 7, 9, 142, 216, 219, 233, 261-273, 296; Protectorate, 81, 149; customs, 297; races, 320.
“Uganda cob,” 308.
Ulema, 11.
Ulu Hill, 120.
Umbeiba, 91.
Umbrega, 99, 101.
Umderas Island, 39.
Umrasin W., 92.
Umsiteiba, 99.
Umvili (god), 162.
Um Ali Tribes, 91, 92.
Um Ali Bisharin, tribe, country, 87.
Um Arda, 53, 55.
Um Ashrin, 21.
Um Badr, 207.
Um Bel, 179.
Um Beshtil W., 92.
“Um Bilbil” liquor, 108, 176.
Um Dam, 2, 176.
Um Debreikat, 268.
Um Deisis, 179.
Um Deras Is., 37, 39.
Um Deras Cataract, 41.
Um Dibban Village, action (Sept., 1884), 105.
Um Dobau, 183.
Um Duema, 43.
Um Gabrit W., 92.
Um Gar, 57.
Um Gursan, vel Rom, Village, 66.
Um Hababoa Cataract, 39.
Um Hadeida, 63.
Um Hagar, 99-101.
Um Hatab W., 103-105.
Um Hellal Village, 204.
Um Nagi Tribes, 91, 93.
Um Ratali, 183.
Um Ruaba, 175.
Um Rueishid W., 104.
Um Sai, 100.
Um Saneita, 57.
Um Semeina, 176.
Um Shedida W., 104.
“Um Shutur” tree, 158.
“Um Sûf,” 73, 142, 165, 169, 302, 303.
Um Tarif Tribe, 130.
Um Turan, 57, 58.
Una, 222.
Ungela Village, 138.
Ungulata, 307.
Unyoro, 233-237, 243, 259, 262.
Upeno R., vel Sobat, 131, 138.
Upper Nile Province, 2, 3, 5, 9, 15, 21, 50, 60, 68, 179, 196, 338; tribes, 330, 331.
Urbi Is., 28.
Urbi Village, 28.
Uryong, 67.
Usertsen, 222.
“Usher,” 181, 208.
“Ushur” (1/10th tax), 4.
Ushut, 179.
Usli, 33.
Uss Village, rapids, 37; island, 40.
Uternau, 145.
Utricularia, 300, 303.
Utterwulghe, General, 278.
=V.=
Valley, 31, 77, 79, 80, 89, 90, 97, 132, 148, 149, 181, 201, 202, 206, 210, 211.
Vallisneria, 303.
Vandeleur, Lieutenant, 263.
Van Kerckhoven, 79, 261, 262.
Vegetable crops, 7, 79, 80, 107, 156, 161, 190, 192.
Vegetation, 20, 27, 34, 47, 73, 77, 86-90, 95, 109, 113, 140, 157, 173, 189, 201, 205, 206, 208, 210.
Vermot, Captain, 271.
Vessels, 94, 95.
Veterinary Officer, Principal, 3.
Victoria Nile, 17.
Victoria, Nyanza, 15, 232-235.
Vigna Nilotica, 302, 303.
Village schools, 11.
Villages (“hella”), 25-34, 45, 49, 52, 53, 54-70, 73-76, 80-86, 96, 104-110, 113-115, 118, 125, 131-144, 152, 156, 159, 167, 168, 177, 179, 183, 193, 196, 197, 199, 204, 205, 214; stone built, 28; deserted, 58, 177, 204; ruins, 28.
Vine, 84.
Vocabulary, 163.
Volcanic, 52, 53, 55, 64, 185.
Vultures, 309.
=W.=
Wadi, 184.
Wadi Melh, 184.
Wadaga Hill, 123.
Wadai, 178, 184-186, 189, 217, 274, 277, 285; Sultanate, 1.
Wadelai, 16, 17, 19.
Wadi el Sufra, 315.
“Wadis,” 86-89, 103, 104, 173-175, 185, 202, 206-210.
Wadis Keheli, 86.
Wad ab Kona Is., 130.
Wad Abbas, 30.
Wad Ab Sheiba, 130.
Wad Abu Rul, 57.
Wad Ban Naga, 105; railway station, 105, 214.
Wad Beiker, 64.
Wad Belal, 53.
Wad Dakona Is., 63.
Wad El Abbas Village, 109, 114, 119.
Wad El Kereil, 53.
Wad El Negumi, 253.
Wad El Zaki, 55.
Wad Habashi, 45, 47; starting point Omdurman Expedition (1898), 45.
Wad Hamed, headquarters Egyptian cavalry, 47.
Wad Medani District, 1, 2; town, 1, 2; P.T.O., 49, 107, 109, 113, 114, 119, 123, 214, 216, 219.
Wad Nimiri, 28.
Wad Nimr, 55.
Wad Ramla District, 2, 47, 105; railway station, 105, 214.
Wad Shalai, 54.
Wad Um Meriam, 52.
Wadi Abaraga, 87.
Wadi Abu Gir, 209.
Wadi Alagi, 86-88.
Wadi Amuro, 89, 90.
Wadi Azum (vel Wadi Asum), 185, 189.
Wadi Bishara, 208.
Wadi Bulbul, 185.
Wadi Burka, 185.
Wadi Di-ib, 87, 88.
Wadi El Arku, 40.
Wadi El Butta, 206.
Wadi El Gab (vel Wad El Gab, vel Wadi Gab, vel Gab), 201, 204-206.
Wadi El Ko (vel Wadi Ko), 185, 190.
Wadi El Sigai, 174.
Wadi Gabgaba, 86-88.
Wadi Gaud, 86.
Wadi Gendi, 185.
Wadi Haieit, 87.
Wadi Halfa, 19, 22, 44, 85.
Wadi Hammamat, 221.
Wadi Hareitri, 90.
Wadi Hasium, 87.
Wadi Hufra, 87.
Wadi Ibra, 185.
Wadi Is, 87.
Wadi Jagegi, 104.
Wadi Kia, 185.
Wadi Legia, 86.
Wadi Meisa, 91.
Wadi Melh (vel Wadi El Melh), 31, 179, 184, 185, 207, 208, 210, 211.
Wadi Melit, 185.
Wadi Mofokakart, 209.
Wadi Mogaddam, 33, 207.
Wadi Murrat, 88.
Wadi Natrun, 201.
Wadi Sadik, 54.
Wadi Sonot, 185.
Wadi Tendelti (vel Dindil), 190.
Wadi Terfui, 87.
Wadi Um Marra, 209.
Wagtails, 37, 309.
“wakf” (endowments), 10.
“wakil,” 122.
Walud Mahbud Tribe, 130.
Walkait, 106.
Walker, Mr., 213, 232.
Wallada Lake, 148.
Wallak Village, 108.
Waller Mari, 147.
Walls, ruins, 211; mud, 29.
Walter, Capt., W. J., 290.
Warajok Village, 197.
Waranas, 309.
Warao District, 143.
Waratong (vel Koratong), 136.
Ward, Colonel, 238.
War Office (local), 49, 213.
Warrak, 39.
Warriors and warlike natives, 149, 160, 179, 184, 193.
Warrit (vel Loingwin), 63.
Wart-hog, 99, 110, 162, 183, 308.
Watawit Tribe, 123, 125.
Watch-towers, 77.
Water birds (fowl), 73, 139, 165, 169.
Water buck, 67, 98, 110, 120, 138, 151, 183, 300; Mrs. Gray’s (Cobus Maria), 151, 161, 183, 308.
Water wheels, 32.
Water plant, nurseries, 73.
Water-shed, 86-90, 117, 137, 153, 161, 184, 185, 285, 286, 298.
Water-courses, 47, 89, 100, 119, 141, 151, 190, 209, 211.
Water holes and pans, 90, 148, 201.
Water, medicinal, 201; alkaline bitter, 201; brackish, 89, 90, 92-94, 202, 210.
Water supply, 20, 42, 88, 90, 92-95, 98, 99, 100, 106, 108, 109, 117, 118, 119, 122, 123, 125, 131, 137, 139, 140, 145, 147, 149, 151, 154, 157, 174, 175, 181, 185, 190, 201-203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 217; perennial, 123.
Water scarcity and waterless, 26, 40, 42, 43, 83, 88, 92, 99, 100, 106, 141, 147, 173, 181, 208.
Watering places, 42, 52-58, 117, 179, 202, 203.
Watson, R.E., Lieut. (1874), 15, 235.
Wau, 155, 156, 159, 161, 169, 216-218; district, 2; town, 2.
Wau R., 153, 154.
Wauchope, Col., 265.
Weaver finches, 308.
Wegin Village, 132.
Wellby, Capt., 136, 138, 280.
Wellcome, Mr., 11.
Welli, R. (Ouelli), 298.
Wells, 32, 38, 40, 52, 67, 86-95, 97-100, 103, 104, 106, 108, 117-119, 123, 139, 140, 156, 173-175, 178, 181, 183, 185, 190, 196, 201, 202, 204, 205-211, 214, 217; maintenance, 5; ancient, 103, 104; railway, 214, 215; “butcha” construction recommended, 210; destroyed, 177; see Depth, (of wells).
West Coast, 79.
Whale-headed stork, 300, 309.
Wheat, 7, 31, 32, 35, 39, 57, 84, 117, 190.
White ants, 68, 81, 85, 218.
White Nile, 1, 2, 7, 9, 13, 15-19, 21, 49, 50, 56, 59, 60, 63, 77, 94, 104, 111, 113, 117, 118, 120, 122, 123, 126, 128, 129, 131, 132, 135, 139-146, 165, 166, 169, 179, 183, 184, 197, 218, 219; junction, 111; upper, 7, 11, 13.
Width (of rivers), 111, 114, 131, 136, 137, 139, 142-144, 154, 197.
Wild animals, 307, 308; export of, 12.
Wild ass, 88, 99, 308; boar, 162; cats, 99; dog, 88, 99, 307; fowl, 63, 99; sheep, 96, 98, 109, 308.
Wild tribes of the Sudan (James), 101.
Wilson, Capt. H. W., 135-137, 139, 143.
Wilson, Major C. E., 277.
Wilson, Sir C., 248, 249.
Winds, 11, 21, 27, 35, 36, 49, 81, 83, 98, 118, 183, 205, 208; shelter from, 202; convoy destroyed (1897), 87.
Wingate, Major-Gen. Sir F. Regd., K.C.B., K.C.M.G., D.S.O. (Governor-General) (1904), 3, 221, 268, 273.
Wira Tribe, 159, 160.
Wodehouse, Col., 253.
Wolseley, Lord, 248.
“Wong” (cattle), 145.
Wood, Sir E., 252.
Wood, Capt. P., 278.
Woods and Forests, Director of, 3, 4.
Wood (furniture and building), 7, 20, 49, 107, 142, 148.
Wood (and wooded country), 108, 131, 132, 142, 148, 155, 157, 205.
Wooding stations, 20, 53, 57, 67, 70, 76, 77, 79, 166-168.
Workshops, 11, 49; railway, 85, 105, 215; technical, 11.
Works, Director of, 3; Department of, 49; Public, 4.
Wrecks and wreckage, 39, 41.
Wurelat Island, 59.
=Y.=
Yabri, 26.
Yabus R., 120, 125.
Yaet, M., 289.
Yagor Village, 125.
Yagub, 47.
Yakwoik Village, 132.
Yambio, 161, 277.
Yambos Tribe (vel Anuak), 134, 136, 138.
Yarada Village, 125.
Yasin, 179.
Yei, 80.
Yei R., 75.
Yellow R., 17, 18, 68.
Yemba Village, 80.
=Z.=
Zabtia, 108.
“Zaf” (dom fibre), 125.
“Zafir” (steamer), 37.
Zaghawa Tribe, Arab, 179, 187, 190.
Zalia, 204.
Zanzibar, 237.
“Zaribas,” 53, 81, 143, 147; (cattle) “Mura,” 145.
Zawerat, 27.
Zawias, 189.
Zebra, 151, 308.
Zeiadia Tribe, Arab, 187, 190; country, 190.
Zeidab Railway Station, 214.
Zeila, 236-243, 257.
“Zeinuba,” 58.
“Zeitun” tree, fruit, 158.
Zeki Tumal, 108.
Zemio, 161.
Zereiga, 173, 182.
Zif, 55.
“Zika” (a tax), 189.
Zoological Gardens, 49.
Zoology, 307-310.
Zorillas, 307.
Zubeir Ibn El Awam, 91.
Zubeir Pasha, 105, 184; residence, 214, 235-247, 256, 278.
Zubeir Rabek, 273.
Zula, 236, 248.
* * * * * LONDON: PRINTED FOR HIS MAJESTY’S STATIONERY OFFICE, BY HARRISON AND SONS, ST. MARTIN’S LANE.
Transcriber's note:
For clarity, square braces in photograph credits have been left out.
pg 5 Changed "Credits from the Egptian" to: "Egyptian"
pg 37 The footnote reference, in absence of footnote, considered as a second reference to footnote 27 (pg 36).
pg 37 Changed "but otherwise is was necessary" to: "it was"
pg 57 the value for the empty cell for Miles.—Intermediate. column, Sheikh’s Tomb row, was assumed to be 2.
pg 59 Changed "dangerous to naviagtion" to: "navigation"
pg 67 Value 3 for Miles.—Intermediate. column, Ajok row, changed to 8.
pg 84 Footnote 43 Changed "is about 75 T.P." to: "P.T."
pg 96 Changed "a very short ime" to: "time"
pg 104 Changed "In the neghbourhood of" to: "neighbourhood"
pg 107 Changed "a small deatchment" to: "detachment"
pg 113 Changed "same time as drua" to: "dura"
pg 119 Sidenote Changed "Fazoglian Keili." to: "Fazogli and Keili."
pg 135 Footnote 92 Changed "whilst that at Jokan" to: "Jokau"
pg 138 Changed "some little distace" to: "distance"
pg 144 Changed "neighourhood of Bor" to: "neighbourhood"
pg 149 Changed "imagine they no not exist" to: "do not"
pg 150 Changed "that these ainmals were" to: "animals"
pg 151 Changed "the source o this important" to: "of this"
pg 155 Changed "utlimately reach the ground" to: "ultimately"
pg 158 Changed "Sanseveira guineensis" to: "Sanseviera"
pg 159 Changed "tha tribes of Darfur" to: "the"
pg 167 Changed "Balœniceps Rex" to: "Balæniceps"
pg 169 Changed "The Agolla" to: "Azolla"
pg 169 Changed "Balœniceps Rex" to: "Balæniceps"
pg 181 Changed "Leptenia spartium" to: "Leptadenia"
pg 191 Changed "Sultan Al Dinar’s Army" to: "Ali Dinar’s"
pg 197 Changed "yards wide thoughout" to: "throughout"
pg 197 Changed "from amo g men and beasts" to: "among"
pg 208 Changed "Reports of the Surveyiny Parties" to: "Surveying"
pg 208 Changed "sattadora persica" to: "salvadora"
pg 208 Changed "hypæne thebaica" to: "hyphæne"
pg 208 Changed "marakh camel thorn" to: "marakh (camel thorn)"
pg 209 Changed "supply af excellent water" to: "of"
pg 210 Changed "permeable granite angites" to: "augites"
pg 247 Changed "Egyptians by themeslves" to: "themselves"
pg 252 Changed "fighting of imporance" to: "importance"
pg 260 Changed "Egyptain occupation" to: "Egyptian"
pg 262 Changed "the 2nd Februray Major" to: "February"
pg 266 Changed "Bahr el Zaref was explored" to: "Zeraf"
pg 270 Changed "extended trom Shambe" to: "from"
pg 285 Changed "of our Agreeement" to: "Agreement"
pg 291 Changed "recoginsed as Sudanese" to: "recognised"
pg 325 Footnote 249 Changed "in Rassala and Suakin" to: "Kassala"
pg 326 Changed "Ageria Walad Omram" to: "Ageira"
pg 347 In the row of "Le Soudan égyptien": removed "Sous Mehemet Ali" from Author column and added it after the Name of the Work, then moved "H. Dehérain" from Publisher column to Author.
No thorough attempt to correct index references has been made beyond any of the changes below:
pg 351 Changed "Aden, 94, 419." to: "219"
pg 351 Entry "Adlan Wad Surur, 122, 229, 230, 321." split into three entries: "Adlan, 229, 231." "Adlan Wad Surur, 122." and "Musa Adlan, 329.", the third of which placed in page 364.
pg 352 Removed entry "Arabi Dafaaka, 144.".
pg 352 Changed "“Ardeb” (300 Hs.)" to: "300 lbs."
pg 352 Changed "Assuit, 217." to: "Assiut"
pg 353 Changed "Balamites Ægyptica" to: "Balanites"
pg 353 Changed "Bazatoda" to: "Bazaroda"
pg 354 Changed "Butyrospernum Parkii" to: "Butyrospermum"
pg 354 Changed "Cailliand, 311." to: "Cailliaud"
pg 354 Changed "Calotropis Procira" to: "Procera"
pg 354 Changed "Cheetak" to: "Cheetah"
pg 354 Changed "Combretaceœ family" to: "Combretaceæ"
pg 355 Changed "Cyprus papyrus" to: "Cyperus"
pg 355 Changed "Didant, W." to: "Didaut"
pg 356 Changed "El Debeida Village" to: "Debeiba"
pg 356 Changed "Kkartoum and Kodok" to: "Khartoum"
pg 357 Changed "Fiscus elastica, 88." to: "Ficus" and its entry moved from after: Firket Village to after: Ficus bengalensis.
pg 357 Changed "Furgor (Mek Bosh-Nubawi)" to: "Fungor"
pg 358 Changed "Gendets" to: "Genets"
pg 358 Changed "Ground-nuts, 91, 147, 156, 195." to: "Ground-nuts, 81, 147, 156, 193."
pg 359 Changed "Hamdani, 183." to: "Hamdaui"
pg 359 Changed "Haut Ubanzi" to: "Ubangi"
pg 359 Changed "Herds, 91, 104, 127," to: "Herds, 91, 104, 128,"
pg 359 Changed "Henglin’s gazelle" to: "Heuglin’s"
pg 359 Changed "Hœmoglobinura, 157." to: "Hæmoglobinuria", and its entry moved from after: Holled Smith to after: Hadendoa Tribe.
pg 359 Changed "Hypœne thebaica" to: "Hyphæne", and its entry moved up by one.
pg 361 Changed "Jokan, 135." to: "Jokau"
pg 362 Changed "Leptodenia spartium" to: "Leptadenia"
pg 363 Changed "Meliaceœ family" to: "Meliaceæ"
pg 365 Changed "Pakia filicoidea" to: "Parkia"
pg 366 Changed "Rain, [. . .] lands and crops, 4, 107, 112." to: "lands and crops, 4, 107, 113."
pg 366 Changed "Religion, 10, 11, 125, 127," to: "Religion, 10, 11, 125, 128,"
pg 366 Changed "Sacchorum spontaneus" to: "Saccharum spontaneum"
pg 367 Changed "Sanseveira guineensis" to: "Sanseviera"
pg 367 Changed "Sapotaceœ" to: "Sapotaceæ"
pg 367 Changed "Sattadora persica, 208." to: "Salvadora", and its entry moved from after: Satinwood to after: Salt (pg. 366).
pg 367 Changed "Scrub, 48," to: "Scrub, 47,"
pg 367 Changed "Shebobinab Tribe" to: "Shebodinab"
pg 367 Changed "Sheikh Adballahi, 129." to: "Abdallahi", and its entry moved up to after: Sheep.
pg 368 Changed "vel Upens" to: "Upeno"
pg 368 Changed "Sultinate of Wadai" to: "Sultanate"
pg 369 Changed "Trade and traders, 69," to: "Trade and traders, 68,"
pg 369 Changed "[Trade and traders] tarbrushes" to: "tarbushes"
pg 369 Changed "Troglodytal" to: "Troglodytæ"
pg 370 Changed "Um Dabau, 183." to: "Dobau"
pg 370 Changed "Uricularia, 300, 303." to: "Utricularia"
pg 370 Changed "Vallismeria, 303." to: "Vallisneria"
pg 371 Changed "Yambos Tribe (vel Anauk)" to: "Anuak"
Minor changes in punctuation have been done silently.
Other spelling inconsistencies have been left unchanged.